More Unbeatable Chess Lessons Snyder

More Unbeatable Chess Lessons

More Unbeatable Chess Lessons Instruction for the Advanced Player CHESS FOR EVERYONE SERIES

Robert M. Snyder Author of Chess for Everyone, Unbeatable Chess Lessons, Winning Chess Traps, Winning Chess Tournaments and Basic Chess Tactics

iUniverse, Inc.

New York Lincoln Shanghai

More Unbeatable Chess Lessons Instruction for the Advanced Player Copyright © 2007 by Robert M. Snyder All rights reserved. No part of this book may be used or reproduced by any means, graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping or by any information storage retrieval system without the written permission of the publisher except in the case of brief quotations embodied in critical articles and reviews. iUniverse books may be ordered through booksellers or by contacting: iUniverse 2021 Pine Lake Road, Suite 100 Lincoln, NE 68512 www.iuniverse.com 1-800-Authors (1-800-288-4677) The views expressed in this work are solely those of the author and do not necessarily reflect the views of the publisher, and the publisher hereby disclaims any responsibility for them. ISBN: 978-0-595-45346-7 (pbk) ISBN: 978-0-595-89658-5 (ebk) Printed in the United States of America

This book is dedicated to my uncle Max Perea, a talented artist who drew the picture for the cover of this book. His work inspired me to collect chess art.

Contents

Acknowledgments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii Symbols Used in This Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv 1. Surprise Move Amateur v. Robert Snyder, King’s Gambit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2. Castling on Opposite Sides Ivanchuk v. Rozentalis, Petrov’s Defense. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3. Effective Use of the Queen Berne v. Paris, Ponziani’s Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 4. Weathering the Storm Anthony Jasaitis v. Robert Snyder, Goring Gambit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 5. Pressure on the “e” File Chigorin v. Schiffers, Scotch Game. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 6. Overextended Pieces D. Parniani v. R. Snyder, Giuoco Piano. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 7. Refuting an Inferior Opening R. Cornelis v. R. Snyder, Giuoco Piano. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

-vii-

viii


8. Taking Advantage of an Out of Play Queen Kindermann v. Tatai, Ruy Lopez . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 9. A Deep Opening Trap Tarrasch v. Marco, Ruy Lopez. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 10. Surprise Diagonals Jasper Rom v. Robert Snyder, Ruy Lopez. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 11. Surviving the Marshall Gambit Badzarani v. Malinin, Ruy Lopez. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 12. Allowing an Isolated Pawn for Active Piece Play Jorge Brittencourt v. Robert Snyder, Ruy Lopez . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 13. Exploiting Small Advantages in Time and Space Zapata v. Welling, Scandinavian Defense. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 14. The Bad Bishop Minic v. Hulak, Pirc Defense. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 15. Taking Advantage of an Uncommitted King Robert Snyder v. Sergey Kalinitchew, Modern Defense. . . . . . . . . . . 134 16. Position under Siege Sax v. Hecht, Alekhine’s Defense. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 17. Sacrificing on “f6” Against the Castled King Sax v. Ghinda, Alekhine’s Defense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 18. Junior Champion Kasparov in Action Kasparov v. Palatnik, Alekhine’s Defense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 19. Fighting the Sicilian Gross v. Zrzavy, Sicilian Defense. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 20. Sacrifice on “f2” Bukhuti Gurgenidze v. Mikhail Tal, Benoni Defense . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Robert M. Snyder

ix

21. Sacrifice on “h7” Anatoly Karpov v. Victor Korchnoi, Queen’s Indian Defense. . . . . . . 205 22. The Desperado James Tarjan v. Robert Snyder, Queen’s Indian Defense. . . . . . . . . . 212 23. Breaking a Pin Laurence Newton v. Robert Snyder, Nimzo-Indian Defense . . . . . . . 222 24. A Knight on the Rim is Dim Richard Mann v. Robert Snyder, Bird’s Opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 About the Author. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Acknowledgments

Thanks are due to Calvin Olson (author of The Chess Kings) for his extensive help in editing, proofreading and reviewing the manuscript. Additional proofreading has been provided by Chris Stratford. I am very grateful for their help.

-xi-

Introduction

Thousands of chess books have been written containing game collections. Even though there are so many game collection books, when I wrote my second book, Unbeatable Chess Lessons, I was confident that it would be a success. I felt that since I had used these games in lessons for many years and understood in some detail the thinking process of my students, such a work would allow me to provide a unique insight to my readers not found in other books. The readers of my first book, which covered basic rules and strategy, had urged me to write a second and more advanced book. So the story continues; after completing my second book, consisting of the games I use in lessons, I was then urged to write yet another book with more lessons based on games. After being hit over the head numerous times with the idea of expanding on Unbeatable Chess Lessons, I realized that another twenty-four lessons would fill in most of the important gaps that couldn’t be covered in one volume. But, before I started on this project I completed another book. My third book, Winning Chess Tournaments, was designed to be the perfect companion and at an equal level of understanding to go along with Unbeatable Chess Lessons. Just as in Unbeatable Chess Lessons, the games in this new book were selected mostly for their instructive value, but with elements of beauty and entertainment taken into consideration. Even though More Unbeatable Chess Lessons is a followup book, it still works well enough for the more advanced scholastic player as a stand alone book. To some extent, the same tiered approach is used to cover basic ideas while going into more advanced concepts and analysis. In order to allow this book to expand on Unbeatable Chess Lessons I included a more detailed analysis of the openings—not just a simple repetition of the same general rules and concepts found in my previous books. However, on occasion when an idea or concept is of extreme importance there may be some repetition.

-xiii-

xiv


Every move in each game is commented on—except for when the exact same opening moves were played in a previous game. A major focus is placed on important tactical and positional concepts. However, another important consideration is the selection of games using openings that filled in gaps in Unbeatable Chess Lessons. Since the games have been arranged by opening in both books, this makes them especially easy to use in helping to prepare a comprehensive opening system. Many new opening innovations will be found in these games that will not be found elsewhere. Since I am a full time chess teacher and educator, with total dedication to my work, many hours of analysis went into making sure that this book contains the highest quality and most accurate analysis possible. Many of the games were played by the world’s best players. However, I have also selected some games that I played against players ranging from expert to Grandmaster. Such games allow me to show my readers how to exploit mistakes made at different levels of play. An added advantage is that teachers usually understand their own games best. In these games the first player named, which is on the left, is playing White. We will now move on to our first lesson!

Symbols Used in This Book

SYMBOL x + ++ = 0-0 0-0-0 e.p. ? ?? ! !!

MEANING captures check checkmate promoted to a Castles kingside Castles queenside en passant weak move very weak move strong move very strong move

-xv-

LESSON 1

2 f4 White initiates the King’s Gambit. He offers to sacrifice his “f ” Pawn to remove Black’s “e” Pawn from the center. By removing Black’s Pawn from “e5” White can more easily occupy the center by placing a Pawn on “d4”. If Black accepts the gambit Pawn, White plans to apply pressure to Black’s Pawn on “f4” along the half open “f ” file after castling and with his Bishop on the “c1-h6” diagonal after moving the “d” Pawn.

Surprise Move Amateur vs. Robert Snyder 2001 Opening: King’s Gambit It is rare to see the King’s Gambit played at the Master level today. However, it is important to be prepared for less common and inferior openings. This short game shows how preparation and precise play can bring a quick victory. Though White (with an Elo rating of approximately 2200) knew after nine moves that he had a bad position he had no idea that his opponent’s next move would cause him to resign.

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kgn4} {0p0pdp0p} {wdwdwdwd} {dwdw0wdw} {wdwdP)wd} {dwdwdwdw} {P)P)WdP)} {$NGQIBHR} vllllllllV

1 e4 White immediately claims a stake in the center and frees the Bishop on “f1” and the Queen. When I was a scholastic player I experimented with other first moves, but quickly returned to my favorite 1 e4. I recommend this and the next move to my students because it quickly leads to the greatest variety of tactical situations.

Diagram 1. Position after 2 f4.

2 … exf4 The old saying, “The only way to refute a gambit is to accept it”, applies here. There is nothing wrong with playing the King’s Gambit Declined if you are satisfied with an equal game after 2 … Bc5 3 Nf3 (not 3 fxe5?? because of 3 … Qh4+ and now if 4 g3, then 4 … Qxe4+ forking King and Rook, or if 4 Ke2??, then 4 … Qxe4++) d6 4 Nc3 (if 4 c3, then 4 …

1 … e5 Black also stakes his claim in the center while freeing his Bishop on “f8” and Queen. --


Nf6 5 d4 exd4 6 cxd4 Bb6 7 e5 Ne4 8 Nc3 d5) Nf6 5 Bc4 Nc6 6 d3 a6 7 fxe5 dxe5 8 Bg5 h6 9 Bh4 Qd6. 3 Bc4 White immediately develops his Bishop and attacks the weak “f7” square (a common target point and thematic idea with the King’s Gambit). The weakness of this move is not that it leaves the “h4-e1” diagonal available to Black’s Queen, but because through aggressive play White’s Bishop on “c4” will be a target to Black’s “d” Pawn. The most common move played in King’s Gambit is the natural developing move 3 Nf3. This not only keeps Black’s Queen off “h4” but it avoids the pitfalls of having the Bishop exposed to attack on “c4”. After 3 Nf3, Fischer’s defense with 3 … d6 is a very effective way of combating the King’s Gambit. With 3 … d6, Black immediately challenges the control of the important “e5” square while freeing his Bishop on “c8”. Part of the idea will be to reinforce Black’s weak Pawn on “f4” by creating a Pawn chain with Pawns at “h6” and “g5”. In reality there is a fine balance between these Pawns being a weakness or becoming a threat to expose White’s King to an attack.

After 3 Nf3 d6 there are two main lines for White: 1. 4 Bc4 h6 5 d4 (5 h4, to prevent 5 … g5, is nicely met by 5 … Nf6 6 Nc3 Be7 7 d4 Nh5) g5 6 h4 (or if 6 0-0, then 6 … Bg7 7 c3 Nc6 8 g3 Bh3) Bg7 7 c3 Nc6 8 Qb3 Qe7 9 0-0 Nf6 10 hxg5 hxg5 11 Nxg5 Nxd4! 12 Bxf7+ Kd8 13 cxd4 Nxe4 14 Bxf4 (not 14 Nf3? because of 14 … Bxd4+! 15 Nxd4 Qh4) Bxd4+ 15 Be3 Ng3. 2. 4 d4 g5 5 h4 g4 6 Ng1 (if 6 Ng5, then 6 … f6 and White’s Knight dies without nearly enough compen sation) f3 (another good alternative is 6 … f5 7 Nc3 fxe4 8 Bxf4 d5) 7 gxf3 Be7 8 h5 (if 8 Be3, then 8 … Bxh4+ 9 Kd2 Bg5) Bh4+ 9 Ke2 (if 9 Kd2, then 9.… Bg5+) f5. 3 … Nf6 Black develops his Knight, threatens White’s “e” Pawn and prepares support for a future placement of a Pawn on “d5”. Making White lose his ability to castle with 3 … Qh4+ 4 Kf1 is acceptable. However, White will have a decent game after developing his Knight to “f3” and gaining time by attacking Black’s Queen.

Robert M. Snyder

4 Nc3

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kgw4} {0p0pdp0p} {wdwdwhwd} {dwdwdwdw} {wdBdP0wd} {dwHwdwdw} {P)P)WdP)} {$wGQIwHR} vllllllllV

of taking advantage of White’s early development of his Bishop to “c4”. 5 e5

White develops his Knight to defend his threatened “e” Pawn. Other alternatives also give Black an edge: 1. 4 Qe2 d5! (this aggressive freeing move is thematic) 5 exd5+ Be7 6 Nf3 0-0 7 d4 c6 8 dxc6 (if 8 Bxf4, then 8 … cxd5) Nxc6 9 c3 Bd6 10 0-0 Bg4 11 Nbd2 Re8 and Black’s lead in development and active pieces more than compensate for his weak Pawn on “f4”. 2. 4 d3 d5! 5 exd5 Nxd5 6 Nf3 Nc6 7 Bxd5 Qxd5 8 Bxf4 Bg4 9 Nc3 (if 9 Bxc7?, then 9 … Nd4) Qa5 10 0-0 0-0-0 11 Qd2 Bc5+ 12 Kh1 Rhe8 and Black achieves a dream position with every piece nicely in play.

This aggressive advance, which threatens Black’s Knight on “f6”, is over-ambitious. White had a choice of a couple of slightly more accurate moves, which could continue: 1. 5 Bb3 (this is probably White’s best choice; it anticipates Black’s attack on his Bishop by 5 … d5) d5 6 exd5 cxd5 7 d4 Bb4 8 Nf3 0-0 9 0-0 Bxc3 10 bxc3 Qc7 11 Qe1 Nc6 12 Qh4 Ne7, planning to meet either 13 Qxf4 or 13 Bxf4 with 13 … Qxc3. Though Black is a Pawn ahead, White has some compensation with his spatial advantage and lead in development. 2. 5 d4 d5 6 exd5 cxd5 7 Bb5+ (if 7 Bb3, then 7 … Bb4 8 Nf3 Qe7+ 9 Ne5 Nc6 10 Bxf4 0-0 11 0-0 Nxd4 12 Nxd5 Nxd5 13 Bxd5 Be6) Bd7 8 Bxf4 Bb4 9 Bxd7+ Nbxd7 10 Nge2 0-0 11 0-0 Qb6 12 Qd3 Rfe8 and Black stands slightly better. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

4 … c6

5 … d5

Black prepares to support the advance of his Pawn to “d5” in line with the theme

Black follows through with his plan by boldly countering in the center while attacking White’s Bishop on “c4”. This

Diagram 2. Position after 4 Nc3.


also frees Black’s queenside pieces by opening the “c8-h3” diagonal for his Bishop and “d7” for his Knight. 6 exf6 White intends, through exchanges, to give Black two sets of doubled Pawns. However, Black’s extra Pawn and active Bishop pair will still give him the advantage. The alternative, 6 exd6e.p., also gives Black a clear advantage. After 6 exd6e.p. the game might continue, 6 … Bxd6 7 Qe2+ (or 7 Nf3 0-0 8 0-0 Bg4) Be7 8 Nf3 b5 9 Bb3 0-0 10 0-0 (or 10 d3 Bc5!) Bc5+ 11 Kh1 Re8. 6 … dxc4 Black recovers his piece. 7 Qe2+

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kgw4} {0pdwdp0p} {wdpdw)wd} {dwdwdwdw} {wdpdw0wd} {dwHwdwdw} {P)P)QdP)} {$wGwIwHR} vllllllllV Diagram 3. Position after 7 Qe2.

White brings his Queen to a more active location and sets up a pin on Black’s Bishop when it goes to “e6”.

7 … Be6 This is Black’s only move to avoid a loss of material. However, you only need one good move in a position! Black develops his Bishop and aids the protection of his Pawn on “c4” with one move. 8 fxg7 White saves the Pawn by capturing and doubling Black’s isolated “f ” Pawns. 8 … Bxg7 Black recovers his Pawn and develops his Bishop. A good alternative would be 8 … Qh4+, planning to meet 9 g3 with 9 … fxg3 10 gxf8=Q+ (if 10 gxh8=Q, then 10 … g2+ 11 Qf2 gxh1=Q 12 Qxh4 Qxg1+ 13 Ke2 Bg4+ 14 Qxg4 Qxg4+) Kxf8 11 Kf1 Rg8 12 Qg2 Qf4+ 13 Ke2 (if 13 Nf3, then 13 … Bh3! 14 Qxh3 Qxf3+) gxh2 14 Qxh2 Qxh2+ 15 Rxh2 Rxg1 16 Rxh7 Kg8 17 Rh4 Na6 and an endgame emerges with Black a Pawn ahead and with a superior position. Therefore, after 8 … Qh4+ White does better to play 8 Kf1 Bxg7 9 Nf3 Qg4. Black’s extra Pawn and active Bishop pair still give him a major advantage. 9 Nh3? White attacks Black’s weak Pawn on “f4”. However, it will soon be

Robert M. Snyder

demonstrated that White should have played the natural developing move 9 Nf3 (keeping Black’s Queen out of “h4”). After 9 Nf3 the game might continue 9 … Na6 (from “a6” the Knight has numerous ways to get actively into play) 10 0-0 Nb4 and Black has a superior position and an extra Pawn. 9 … Qh4+ Black attacks White’s King along the weakened “h4-e1” diagonal. 10 Kd1?

cuuuuuuuuC {rhwdkdw4} {0pdwdpgp} {wdpdbdwd} {dwdwdwdw} {wdpdw0w1} {dwHwdwdN} {P)P)QdP)} {$wGKdwdR} vllllllllV Diagram 4. Position after 10 Kd1.

This innocent looking move is a fatal mistake! White had nothing better than to offer a Queen trade with 10 Qf2 Qxf2+ 12 Nxf2 Na6 (once again, placing the Knight temporarily on the edge of the board gives it opportunities to come into play by going to either “c5” or “b4” and attack White’s weak “c” Pawn) 13 a3 Nc5. However, Black’s

doubled isolated “f ” Pawns are little compensation for White because of Black’s active pieces, Bishop pair, and extra Pawn. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 10 … f3! White resigned here. This subtle move must have been a shock for White. It attacks White’s Queen and “g” Pawn (a critical defender of the Knight on “h3”). Black wins at least a piece. If 11 Qxf3, then 11 … Bg4 pins and wins Black’s Queen. If 11 Qf2 (or 11 Qf1), then 11 … fxg2 12 Qxg2 Qxh3 13 Qxg7? Qf3+ forking the King and Rook.

LESSON 2

2 … Nf6 Black initiates Petrov’s defense. Instead of defending his “e” Pawn, Black counters by developing his Knight toward the center and attacking White’s “e” Pawn.

Castling on Opposite Sides Ivanchuk vs. Rozentalis Debrecen, 2001 Opening: Petrov’s Defense

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kgw4} {0p0pdp0p} {wdwdwhwd} {dwdw0wdw} {wdwdPdwd} {dwdwdNdw} {P)P)W)P)} {$NGQIBdR} vllllllllV

When I was young I read in a book that Petrov’s defense (where the first two moves of the game are copied by Black and a symmetrical position is reached) often leads to a dry and boring game. In theory, as White, if your opponent copies your moves to excess Black will be forced to deviate or obtain an inferior game at some point. In reality, Petrov’s defense contains some very sharp and interesting tactical lines that still make it popular among world-class players. In this game Ivanchuk, one of the top rated players in the World, shows how to use the Steinitz variation in an effective way against Black’s defense. After both players castle on opposite sides of the board, White uses elaborate tactics to quickly destroy his opponent.

Diagram 5. Position after 2 … Nf6.

3 d4 This is known as the Steinitz Variation. White boldly strikes at the center with a Pawn, attacking Black’s “e” Pawn a second time and freeing his Bishop on the “c1-h6” diagonal as well as his Queen on the “d” file. Also, in some variations White will develop his Knight to “d2”, which is now available. The most common move here is to capture Black’s “e” Pawn with 3 Nxe5. It would be unwise for Black to immediately recapture his Pawn with 3 … Nxe4? because White would attack along the “e” file with 4 Qe2. After 4 Qe2 the game might continue 4 … Qe7 (not 4 … Nf6?? because of 5 Nc6+

1 e4 e5 2 Nf3 This is the most popular second move for White in the open game. It develops a piece toward the center and attacks Black’s “e” Pawn.

--

Robert M. Snyder

winning Black’s Queen, or 4 … d5? losing a Pawn after 5 d3 Qe7 6 dxe4 Qxe5 7 exd5) 5 Qxe4 d6 6 d4 dxe5 7 dxe5 Nc6 8 Bb5 Bd7 9 Nc3 0-0-0 (if 9 … Nxe5, then 10 Nd5 Qd6 11 Bxd7+ Kxd7 12 Bf4 Re8 13 0-0-0 Kc8 14 Rhe1) 10 Bf4 g5 11 Bg3 Bg7 12 0-0-0 and White emerges with an extra Pawn and a spatial advantage. After 3 Nxe5 Black does best to first drive back White’s Knight before recovering his Pawn by playing 3 … d6 4 Nf3 Nxe4. The game might continue 5 d4 d5 6 Bd3 Be7 (Marshall’s more aggressive 6 … Bd6 gives White the edge with a possible continuation being 7 0-0 0-0 8 c4 c6 9 Re1 Bf5 10 Qc2) 7 0-0 Nc6 8 Re1 Bg4 9 c3 Nf6 (if 9 … f5, then 10 Qb3 is strong) 10 h3 Bh5 11 Bg5 0-0 12 Nbd2 and White stands better. 3 … Nxe4 Black liquidates part of White’s Pawn center and posts his Knight aggressively. The other common book move here also liquidates part of White’s Pawn center with 3 … exd4. After 3 … exd4 the game might continue 4 e5 Ne4 5 Qxd4 d5 6 exd6e.p. Nxd6 7 Nc3 Nc6 8 Qf4 g6 (if 8 … Be7, then 9 Bd2 0-0 10 Bd3 Be6 11 0-0-0) 9 Bd3 Bg7 10 Be3 Be6 11 0-0-0 Qf6 12 Qa4 Qe7 (if 12 … h6, then 13 Bb5 Bd7 14 Bd4 Qf4+ 15 Rd2 0-0 16 Nd5) 13 Ne4 0-0

14 Rhe1 Nxe4 15 Bxe4 Rfd8 16 Rxd8+ Nxd8 17 Bd4 with a clearly superior position for White. 4 Bd3 White develops his Bishop with an attack on Black’s aggressively posted Knight. This also clears the way for castling. 4 … d5 Black boldly strikes at the center with a Pawn, defends his Knight on “e4”, and frees his Bishop on the “c8-h3” diagonal along with his Queen on the “d” file. This also opens up the possibility for Black to develop his Knight to “d7”. An interesting possibility for Black is to immediately develop his Knight toward the center with 4 … Nc6. After 4 … Nc6 the game might continue 5 Bxe4 d5 6 Nxe5 Nxe5 (if 6 … dxe4, then 7 Nxc6 bxc6 8 0-0) 7 Qe2! dxe4 (if 7 … Be6, then 8 dxe5 dxe4 9 Nc3) 8 Qxe4 Bf5 (if 8 … Be6, then 9 Qxe5 Qd7 10 0-0 Bd6 11 Qe2 0-0 12 Be3 f5 13 f4) 9 Qxe5+ Qe7 10 Qxe7+ Bxe7 11 c3 and White’s extra Pawn is worth slightly more than Black’s Bishop pair and temporary lead in development.


cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kgw4} {0p0wdp0p} {wdwdwdwd} {dwdp0wdw} {wdw)ndwd} {dwdBdNdw} {P)PdW)P)} {$NGQIwdR} vllllllllV Diagram 6. Position after 4 … d5.

5 Nxe5 White recovers his Pawn and takes the active “e5” outpost for his Knight. 5 … Nd7 This is the most common move here. Black develops his Knight and challenges White’s aggressively posted Knight on “e5”. The second most popular move for Black is to develop the Bishop and apply pressure to White’s Knight on “e5” with 5 … Bd6. After 5 … Bd6 the game might continue 6 0-0 0-0 7 Nd2 (the most common move recommended by theory is 7 c4, which gives Black a dead even game after a somewhat complex variation with 7 … Bxe5 8 dxe5 Nc6 9 cxd5 Qxd5 10 Qc2 Nb4 11 Bxe4 Nxc2 12 Bxd5 Bf5 13 g4 Bxg4 14 Be4 Nxa1 15 Bf4 f6 16 Nc3 fxe5 17 Be3 Bf3 18 Rxa1 Rad8) Bxe5 8 dxe5 Nc5 9 Nb3 Nxd3 10 Qxd3 Nc6 11 Bf4 (also good

is 11 Qg3 and White is slightly better) Qh4 12 Bg3 Qc4 13 Rad1 Nb4 14 Qxc4 dxc4 15 Nd4 c5 16 Nb5 Nxc2 17 Nc7 Rb8 18 e6 fxe6 19 Bd6 and White is better. The passive development of Black’s Bishop with 5 … Be7 results in a somewhat more substantial advantage for White. This becomes clear after 5 … Be7 6 0-0 0-0 7 c4 Nf6 8 Nc3 c6 9 Re1 Be6 10 cxd5 cxd5 11 Qb3. If Black recaptures with 10 … Nxd5 (instead of 10.… cxd5) then an interesting continuation could occur after 11 Nxd5 Bxd5 (if 11 … Qxd5, White would play 12 Bc4 planning to meet 12 … Qd6 with 13 Bxe6 and Black loses material after either 13 … Qxe6 14 Nxc6 Qxc6 15 Rxe7, or 13 … fxe6 14 Qb3 b6 15 Ng6! hxg6 16 Rxe6) 12 Qh5 g6 (if 12 … h6, then 13 Qf5! g6 14 Nxg6) 13 Bxg6! hxg6 14 Nxg6 Bf6 (if 14 … fxg6, 15 Qxg6+ Kh8 16 Re5 threatening 17 Rh5++) 15 Nxf8 Kxf8 (if 15 … Qxf8, then 16 Bh6 Bg7 17 Bxg7 Kxg7 18 Qg4+ and now 18 … Kh7 19 Re3, or 18 … Kf6 19 Re5 Qh6 20 Rae1 Qg6 21 Qf4+ Kg7 22 Rg5) 16 Bh6+ Bg7 17 Bxg7+ Kxg7 18 Re3 with the idea of 19 Rg3+ and White has a winning attack against Black’s exposed King. 6 Nxd7 White relieves the pressure on his Knight on “e5” by exchanging Knights.

Robert M. Snyder

6 … Bxd7 Black recovers his piece and develops his Bishop. 7 0-0 White removes his King from the center and brings his Rook to an active location.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdw1kgw4} {0p0bdp0p} {wdwdwdwd} {dwdpdwdw} {wdw)ndwd} {dwdBdwdw} {P)PdW)P)} {$NGQdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 7. Position after 7 0-0.

7 … Qh4 Black brings his Queen aggressively into play on the kingside and prepares to castle queenside. Another reasonable move for Black is to complete his minor piece development with 7 … Bd6, in which case White does best to immediately strike at the center with 8 c4. After 8 c4 the game might continue 8 … c6 9 cxd5 cxd5 10 Qh5 and now Black must sacrifice a Pawn to avoid getting a bad position with 10 … 0-0 (if Black defends his Pawn with 10 … Nf6, White would

play 11 Re1+ Be7 12 Qe2) 11 Qxd5 Bc6 12 Qh5 g6 13 Qh3 Ng5 14 Qh6 Ne6 (if 14 … Be7, then 15 Be3 Bf6 16 Bc4 Re8 17 Nd2 Ne6 18 Rad1) 15 Be3 Qf6 (if 15 … Bf4, then 16 Bxf4 Qxd4 17 Be3 Qxd3 18 Nc3, or if 15 … Re8, then 16 Nc3 Bf8 17 Qh3 Nxd4 18 Rad1) 16 Nc3 Nxd4 (if 16 … Bf4, then 17 Qh3 is best) 17 f3 and White is slightly better. 8 c4 White boldly strikes at the center with a Pawn. This move is particularly effective because it attacks Black’s “d” Pawn, which supports his Knight on “e4”, and allows for the possibility of White’s Queen going to “c2” or “b3”. 8 … 0-0-0 Black removes his King from the center and brings a Rook onto a center file. Often when players castle on opposite sides of the board an imbalance is created and the game becomes complicated. This allows for the possibility of Pawns to be advanced in a Pawn storm against the enemy King without each side exposing their own King. As a result a sharp struggle may ensue. Critical judgments may be required between moves that pursue the attack against the enemy King and moves that defend your own King.

10


As you have probably noted, it is far more common to castle kingside than queenside. This is for two reasons: 1. It only requires two pieces between the King and Rook to be developed to castle on the kingside. 2. Castling kingside removes the King further away from the center (removing the King from the center and placing him behind a wall of protective Pawns are the main reasons for castling). However, the one common advantage of castling queenside is that the Rook is immediately placed on a central file. 9 c5 This move prevents Black’s Bishop from being developed to “d6” and is in line with the theme of attacking on the queenside. It is not appealing for White to go Pawn grabbing with 9 cxd5 since after 9 … Nf6 10 Nc3 Bd6 11 g3 Qh3 White has doubled, isolated Pawns that are targets for Black.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdk4wgw4} {0p0bdp0p} {wdwdwdwd} {dw)pdwdw} {wdw)ndw1} {dwdBdwdw} {P)wdW)P)} {$NGQdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 8. Position after 9 c5.

9 … g6 Black prepares to fianchetto his Bishop to “g7”. However, this is not as popular as the more aggressive 9 … g5. Playing 9 … g5 allows Black to fianchetto his Bishop to “g7” and also start a counterattack on the kingside. After 9 … g5, a favorite move of the famous Soviet World Champion Garry Kasparov is to immediately develop the Bishop with 10 Be3. The idea (instead of the usual 10 Nc3) is to develop the Knight to “d2” where it will challenge Black’s actively posted Knight on “e4”, allow for an increased possibility of attack along the “c” file, and give White the option of bringing his Knight to “f3”. After 9 … g5 a possible continuation is 10 Be3 Re8 (or 10 … Bg7 11 f3 Nf6 12 Bf2 Qh6 13 Nc3 g4 14 b4 gives White a small edge) 11 Nd2 Bg7 12 Nf3 Qh5 13 Nxg5 Qxd1 14 Rfxd1 Nxg5 15 Bxg5 Bg4 (if 15 … Bxd4, then 16 c6 Be6 17 cxb7+ Kb8 18 Rd2 favors White) 16 Rd2 Bxd4 17 c6 Be5 18 Bb5 b6 19 f4 Rhg8 20 Re1 and White is clearly better. 10 Nc3 White develops his Knight toward the center attacking Black’s Knight on “e4” and unprotected Pawn on “d5”.

Robert M. Snyder

10 … Bg7 Black completes his fianchetto and attacks White unprotected Pawn on “d4”. 11 g3 White attacks Black’s Queen and drives her away from her aggressive post where she supports the Knight on “e4”. It would be weak to prematurely capture Black’s Pawn with 11 Nxd5?. After 11 Nxd5? a possible continuation is 11 … Be6 12 g3 Nxf2! 13 Rxf2 Qxd4 14 Nf4 g5 15 Nxe6 fxe6 16 Bxg5 Rhf8 17 Bf4 Qxd3 18 Qxd3 Rxd3 19 Re2 Rf5 and Black stands slightly better in the endgame. 11 … Qh3? It will soon become apparent in the game that Black’s attempt to keep the Queen aggressively posted on the kingside is inaccurate on both a tactical and positional basis. Correct is 11 … Qf6 keeping the Queen where the action is and increasing the pressure on “d4” and “f2”. White’s strongest move is then to develop his Bishop and reinforce his protection of “d4” and “f2” with 12 Be3. The game might then continue 12 … Ng5 (weak is 12 … Bf5 because of 13 Nb5! and now if 13 … a6, then 14 Nxc7! planning to meet 14 … Kxc7 with 15 Bf4+ Kc8 16 Be5; or if 13 … Bh3, then White obtains a

11

nice attack by sacrificing the exchange after 14 Nxa7+ Kb8 15 Nb5 Bxf1 16 Bxf1 threatening numerous winning continuations with moves such as 17 Bf4, 17 Qa4, or 17 f3) 13 f4 Nh3+ (White clearly dominates in the center after 13 … Qe6 14 Re1 Ne4 15 Bxe4 dxe4 16 d5) 14 Kg2 Rde8 15 c6 (the usual move recommended by theory, 15 Qd2, gives Black too much counterplay on the kingside after 15 … h5) Qxc6 16 Re1 planning to meet 16 … Qb6, 16 … Qd6 or 16 … Kb8 with 17 Rc1. White gets more than enough compensation for the sacrificed Pawn. 12 Nxd5

cuuuuuuuuC {wdk4wdw4} {0p0bdpgp} {wdwdwdpd} {dw)Ndwdw} {wdw)ndwd} {dwdBdw)q} {P)wdW)w)} {$wGQdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 9. Position after 12 Nxd5.

White wins Black’s “d” Pawn and undermines the protection of Black’s Knight on “e4”. 12 … Bg4 Black attacks White’s Queen with a discovered attack on White’s Knight on

12


“d5”. Black is under the false impression that he has good counter-play for the Pawn he just sacrificed. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 13 Ne7+! White gets his Knight out of attack while attacking Black’s King. Black must have been hoping for the very interesting continuation 13 Qb3 Bf3 (threatening 14 Qg2++) 14 Nf4 Ng5! 15 Be2 (not 15 Nxh3?? because of 15 … Nxh3++) Qg4 (threatening 16 Qxf4!) 16 c6! (threatening 17 Qxb7++) b6 (if 16 … bxc6, then 17 Ba6+ Kd7 18 h3) 17 Qa3 (threatening 18 Qa6+ Kb8 19 Qb7++) Kb8 18 Qa6 (threatening 19 Qb7++) Qc8 and both sides have survived with a fairly even game! 13 … Kb8 Moving the King toward the center wouldn’t be much better, e.g. 13 … Kd7 14 Qb3 Bf3 15 Bb5+ Kxe7 16 Qxf3 Qf5 17 Qe2 Kf8 18 Re1 Rxd4 19 Be3. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 14 Nc6+! This aggressive attack against Black’s King is the key move that makes White’s

earlier moves sound. Otherwise, Black’s attack would be overwhelming. 14 … Kc8 White is also winning after 14 … bxc6 15 Qb3+ Ka8 (if 15 … Kc8?, then 16 Ba6+ Kd7 17 Qxf7++) 16 Bxe4. Also if 14 … Ka8 then 15 Qa4 is devastating. 15 Nxa7+ White wins a Pawn and continues his attack against Black’s King.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdk4wdw4} {Hp0wdpgp} {wdwdwdpd} {dw)wdwdw} {wdw)ndbd} {dwdBdw)q} {P)wdW)w)} {$wGQdRIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 10. Position after 15 Nxa7+.

15 … Kb8 Moving the King toward the center with 15 … Kd7 would lose quickly after 16 Qb3 (threatening 17 Qxf7++) Rhe8 17 Bxe4 Rxe4 18 Qd5+ forking King and Rook. 16 Nc6+ White relentlessly continues his attack on Black’s King.

Robert M. Snyder

16 … Kc8 Capturing the Knight with 16 … bxc6 once again allows White to win easily with 17 Qb3+. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 17 f3 White interposes with a Pawn to get his Queen out of attack and forks Black’s Knight and Bishop. If 17 Be2, then White’s advantage is minimal after 17 … Bxe2 18 Qxe2 Rhe8 (threatening 19 … Nxg3) 19 Ne5 Rxd4.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdk4wdw4} {dp0wdpgp} {wdNdwdpd} {dw)wdwdw} {wdw)ndbd} {dwdBdP)q} {P)wdWdw)} {$wGQdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 11. Position after 17 f3.

17 … Rxd4? Black has too many pieces under attack along with an exposed King. He can’t avoid eventual loss. However, this move speeds up the collapse. Objectively best is 17 … Nxg3 18 fxg4 Bxd4+ (if 18 … Rxd4, then 19 Rf4! and now 19 … Rhd8 20 Qe1! Rxd3 21 Nxd8, or 19 …

13

Ne4 20 Rxe4 Rxd3 and White can win with either 21 Ne7+ Kb8 22 Qe2 or the more complicated 21 Qa4 bxc6 22 Be3! Kd7 23 Rd1 Rxd1+ 24 Qxd1 Kc8 25 Qa4) 19 Nxd4 Rxd4 20 Rf4 Rhd8 21 Rxd4 Rxd4 22 Qe1! Qxg4 (if 22 … Rxd3, then 23 Bg5! threatening 24 Qe8+; or if 22 … Ne4, then 23 Be2!) 23 hxg3 Rxd3 24 Be3 and White’s material advantage will prevail. Also if 17 … bxc6, then 18 Ba6+ Kd7 19 fxg4 opening the “f ” file wins easily. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 18 Be3 Even though 18 fxg4 would also win the game, this move is the most efficient because it eliminates any significant counter-play by Black. White develops his Bishop and attacks White’s Rook on “d4” a second time. 18 … Rxd3 With so many pieces under attack Black tries to get as much material as he can! He has nothing better. 19 Qxd3 White gets his Queen out of attack by capturing Black’s Rook.

14


19 … Nxg3 Black captures a Pawn and attacks White’s Rook on “f1”. The Knight cannot be captured with 20 hxg3 because of 20 … Qxg3+ 21 Kh1 Bxf3+ 22 Rxf3 Qxf3+ followed by 23 … Qxc6, and then it is Black who is winning. 20 Bf4

cuuuuuuuuC {wdkdwdw4} {dp0wdpgp} {wdNdwdpd} {dw)wdwdw} {wdwdwGbd} {dwdQdPhq} {P)wdWdw)} {$wdwdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 12. Position after 20 Bf4.

White attacks Black’s Knight on “g3” a second time and plans to meet 20 … Nxf1 with 21 Ne7+ Kb8 22 Bxc7+! Kxc7 (or if 22 … Ka7, then 23 Qa3++) 23 Qd6++. Black Resigns. He cannot avoid being hopelessly behind in material.

LESSON 3

3 c3

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kgn4} {0p0pdp0p} {wdndwdwd} {dwdw0wdw} {wdwdPdwd} {dw)wdNdw} {P)w)W)P)} {$NGQIBdR} vllllllllV

Effective Use of the Queen Berne vs. Paris 1921 Opening: Ponziani’s Opening A common opening problem among amateurs is when to bring their Queen out and where to place her. Often the Queen is brought out too early or is placed where she becomes an easy target for the opponent’s weaker pieces, thus resulting in a loss of the time. In this game White commits his Queen early by bringing her out on the fourth move. As a result she ends up being ineffectively placed. Black, on the other hand, waits until the ninth move to bring his Queen into play. He waits until it becomes clear where she will be effectively placed and this results in a major pay off in the game. 1 e4 e5 2 Nf3 Nc6 Black develops his Knight toward the center and defends his “e” Pawn.

Diagram 13. Position after 3 c3.

White initiates the Ponziani Opening. With 3 c3 White releases his Queen along the “d1-a4” diagonal and prepares support for a Pawn on “d4”. The drawback is that at this point White’s plan is over ambitious; it gives Black a chance to play aggressively and achieve easy equality. 3 … d5 This is Black’s most aggressive and best treatment! Black immediately strikes at the center with a Pawn, threatens White’s “e” Pawn, and frees both his Bishop on the “c8-h3” diagonal and his Queen on the “d” file. A weaker line for Black is 3 … Nf6 4 d4 Nxe4 5 d5 Ne7 6 Nxe5 Ng6 7 Qe2 Qe7 8 Nxg6 hxg6 8 Bf4 and White stands slightly better.

-15-

16


4 Qa4 White immediately brings his Queen into play, pins White’s Knight on “c6”, and threatens Black’s Pawn on “e5” with 5 Nxe5. It becomes apparent that a drawback of White’s third move (placing a Pawn on “c3”) is that it doesn’t allow White to attack Black’s Queen on “d5” by placing a Knight on “c3”—after 4 exd5 Qxd5. A possible continuation after this might be 5 d4 exd4 6 cxd4 Bg4 7 Be2 0-0-0 8 Nc3 Qa5 9 Be3 Nf6 10 0-0 with an even game. Developing and pinning Black’s Knight by playing the more dynamic continuation 4 Bb5 also gives Black a comfortable game after 4 … dxe4 5 Nxe5 Qd5 6 Qa4 (if 6 Bxc6+, then 6 … bxc6 7 d4 exd3e.p. 8 0-0 Bd6) Nge7 7 f4 exf3e.p. 8 Nxf3 Qe6+. This might continue: 9 Be2 (if 9 Kf2, then 9 … Bd7 10 d4 0-0-0 11 Re1 Qf5 12 Nbd2 a6 13 Bf1 g5) Bd7 10 Qc4 0-0-0 11 Qxe6 Bxe6 12 0-0 h6 13 d4 g5 14 Nbd2 Bg7 15 Bd3 Rhe8. 4 … Nf6 Black develops his Knight with an attack on White’s “e” Pawn. Black offers his “e” Pawn as a gambit. However, it will soon be pointed out that this is inferior to reinforcing the “e” Pawn with 4 … f6. After 4 … f6 5 Bb5 (5 exd5 would transpose after 5 … Qxd5

6 Bb5 Nge7) Nge7 6 exd5 Qxd5 Black is to be preferred. 5 Nxe5

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kgw4} {0p0wdp0p} {wdndwhwd} {dwdpHwdw} {QdwdPdwd} {dw)wdwdw} {P)w)W)P)} {$NGwIBdR} vllllllllV Diagram 14. Position after 5 Nxe5.

White does best to accept the gambit and attack Black’s Knight on “c6” a second time. 5 … Bd6 In keeping with the theme of the gambit, Black continues with his rapid development, threatens White’s Knight on “e5” and prepares to castle. 6 Nxc6 White takes care of the threat on his Knight by exchanging it for Black’s Knight. 6 … bxc6 Black recovers his Knight.

Robert M. Snyder

7 d3 White reinforces the defense of his “e” Pawn, frees his Bishop on “c1”, and opens up “d2” for his Knight. It wouldn’t be wise for White to go Pawn grabbing with 7 Qxc6+ Bd7 8 Qa6 Nxe4 9 d4 0-0 as Black’s overwhelming lead in development gives him the advantage. 7 … 0-0

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1w4kd} {0w0wdp0p} {wdpgwhwd} {dwdpdwdw} {QdwdPdwd} {dw)Pdwdw} {P)wdW)P)} {$NGwIBdR} vllllllllV

Diagram 15. Position after 7 … 0-0.

Black removes his King from the center and brings his Rook into play where it may easily be moved to the half open “e” file. 8 Bg5? This aggressive pin is over-ambitious. White should have completed his kingside development with 8 Be2, planning to meet 8 … Re8 with 9 Nd2 and White is slightly better. White will soon be able to castle and Black will not

17

have quite enough compensation for his sacrificed Pawn. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 8 … h6 Black attacks and threatens White’s Bishop. This will force White either to make an unfavorable exchange of his Bishop for Black’s Knight or to lose time and retreat his Bishop. 9 Bxf6 White solves the problem of his Bishop being threatened by exchanging it for Black’s Knight. If White tries to avoid the exchange by retreating with 9 Bh4, then the game might continue 9 … dxe4 10 dxe4 (if 10 Bxf6, then 10 … Qxf6 11 dxe4 Bc5 and now 12 f3 Qg5! or 12 Qc2 Rd8! with a sizable advantage for Black in both cases) g5 11 Bg3 Nxe4 and Black recovers his Pawn with a superior position. White doesn’t play 12 Qxe4?? because 12 … Re8 pins the Queen. 9 … Qxf6 Black recovers his piece and brings his Queen into play actively.

18


10 Be2? White develops his Bishop. However, it would be more accurate to develop the Knight with 10 Nd2. The reason for this will become apparent after Black’s next move. After 10 Nd2 a good move for Black is to bring his Rook onto the half open “b” file and attack White’s “b” Pawn with 10 … Rb8. The game would then be approximately even. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdw4kd} {0w0wdp0w} {wdpgw1w0} {dwdpdwdw} {QdwdPdwd} {dw)Pdwdw} {P)wdB)P)} {$NdwIwdR} vllllllllV Diagram 16. Position after 10 Be2.

10 … Qg5! Black now threatens 11 … Qc1+ and 11 … Qxg2. If White had played 10 Nd2, these threats would not have occurred. 11 Nd2 White develops his Knight, which prevents 11 … Qc1+ and supports

placing his Bishop on “f3” after Black’s next move. If White plays 11 0-0?, then 11 … Bh3 12 Bf3 Qf4! 13 Rd1 Qxh2+ and White would be in bad shape. 11 … Qxg2 Black recovers his Pawn and threatens White’s Rook on “h1”. 12 Bf3 White defends his Rook and attacks Black’s Queen. Though the Queen is driven away from her menacing location on “g2”, she will soon be causing serious problems for White. 12 … Qh3 Black gets his Queen out of attack while tying down White’s pieces to the defense of his Bishop on “f3” and “h” Pawn. 13 0-0-0

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdw4kd} {0w0wdp0w} {wdpgwdw0} {dwdpdwdw} {QdwdPdwd} {dw)PdBdq} {P)wHw)w)} {dwIRdwdR} vllllllllV

Diagram 17. Position after 13 0-0-0.

Robert M. Snyder

19

White removes his King from the center and heads toward relative safety on the queenside. Without castling, it wouldn’t be long before White’s King is in serious trouble. White hopes to be able to muster some counter-play on the kingside by using his open “g” file and taking advantage of Black’s weak queenside Pawns. However, it will be demonstrated that Black’s active Queen and Bishop pair are going to be more than White can handle. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

suddenly it is White who would stand better! See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

13 … Bf4

White defends his “f ” Pawn and tries to bring his Queen to a more active location by moving her to the center.

Black pins White’s Knight threatening to win White’s Bishop with 14 … Qxf3 or 14 … Bxd2+ 15 Rxd2 Qxf3. 14 Be2 White saves his Bishop by removing it from the attack by Black’s Queen. If White tries to complicate matters by attacking Black’s Rook on “a8” with 14 Qxc6, then Black would have played 14 … Bxd2+ 15 Kxd2 (if 15 Rxd2, then 15 … Qxf3 threatening White’s Rook on “h1”) Rb8 threatening 16 … Qxf3 and 16 … Rxb2+. White now threatens to play 15 exd5 with a discovered attack by the White Queen on Black’s Bishop on “f4”, and

14 … Qh4! A key move! Black repositions his Queen so that 15 exd5?? would be met by 15 … Bxd2+ followed by 16 … Qxa4 winning White’s Queen. This move also threatens White’s Pawn on “f2” and clears the “h3” square for possible use by Black’s Bishop. 15 Qd4

15 … Re8 The placement of a Rook on the half open “e” file, which pins White’s “e” Pawn, is a natural move. Another continuation that would give Black an advantage is 15 … dxe4 16 Rhg1 (threatening 16 … Qxg7++) Bg5 17 Qxe4 Qxf2 18 Rg2 Qf5 19 Kb1 (going Pawn grabbing with 19 Qxc6 Rb8 20 Qxc7 would give Black a position worth well more than the sacrificed Pawn after 20 … Be6) Rb8.

20


cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdrdkd} {0w0wdp0w} {wdpdwdw0} {dwdpdwdw} {wdw!Pgw1} {dw)Pdwdw} {P)wHB)w)} {dwIRdwdR} vllllllllV

Diagram 18. Position after 15 … Re8.

16 Kc2 White removes the menacing pin from his Knight. It would be safer for White to hide his King with 16 Kb1 Rb8 17 Ka1. After 17 Ka1 the game might continue 17 … Be5 18 Qe3 Bd6 19 Qd4 Qf4 and Black’s Bishop pair and more active pieces give him the edge. 16 … dxe4 This gives White an opportunity to sacrifice a Pawn to activate his pieces. Therefore, it would be more accurate to increase pressure on the queenside with 16 … Rb8. The game might continue 17 Rhg1 (threatening 18 Qxg7++) Be5 18 Qc5 Qf6 with Black’s Bishop pair and more active pieces giving him a nice advantage. Black’s extra Pawn would only give him a minimal advantage in the endgame that results after 16 … Bxd2 17 Rxd2 dxe4 18 Rg1 exd3+ 19 Bxd3 Qxd4 20 cxd4 Be6.

17 dxe4? This leads to a major advantage for Black. Therefore, White would do better to sacrifice a Pawn to activate his pieces with 17 Rhg1 (threatening 18 Qxg7++) exd3+ 18 Bxd3 Bg5. Even though White doesn’t have enough compensation for his Pawn this would give him a better chance of survival than the move played in the game. 17 … Bf5 An interesting way of getting the Bishop actively developed. Black uses a pin to attack White’s “e” Pawn with a second piece and places the Bishop on the same diagonal as White’s King. A strong alternative would be to drive White’s Queen out of the center with 17 … c5!. After 17 … c5, if White plays 18 Qd3 (or 18 Qxc5 18 … Bxd2 19 Kxd2 Qxe4 and White is in bad shape), then Black ends up with a great game after 18 … Bb7 19 f3 Red8. 18 Qc5? White plays aggressively by attacking Black’s Bishop on “f5” and unprotected Pawn on “c6”. However, this removes the Queen as a defender of White’s “e” Pawn and White will not have time to capture Black’s “c” Pawn. It would be better to place a Rook on the half open “g” file with 18 Rhg1 and threaten

Robert M. Snyder

mate. But, after 18 … Bg6, Black still retains his enormous pressure. Capturing Black’s Bishop with 18 exf5 allows Black’s Rook to penetrate the King’s position and gives Black a vastly superior endgame after 18 … Rxe2 19 Rhg1 Bg5 20 Qxh4 Bxh4. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdrdkd} {0w0wdp0w} {wdpdwdw0} {dw!wdbdw} {wdwdPgw1} {dw)wdwdw} {P)KHB)w)} {dwdRdwdR} vllllllllV Diagram 19. Position after 18 Qc5.

18 … Bg6! Black gets his Bishop out of attack while maintaining pressure on White’s “e” Pawn and on the “h7-b1” diagonal. This is stronger than immediately breaking the ice and winning a Pawn with 18 … Bxe4+ 19 Nxe4 Rxe4 20 Bd3 Re5 21 Qd4. 19 f3 White reinforces the defense of his “e” Pawn and relieves his Queen of the

21

defense of the “f ” Pawn. But, White’s false sense of security is soon broken. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 19 … Bxd2 Black strips White of an important defender of his “e” Pawn. 20 Kxd2 White decides to use his King to recover his piece instead of the Rook. However, White could offer more resistance by playing 20 Rxd2 Bxe4+ 21 Kc1 (not 21 fxe4 because of 21 … Qxe4+ forking White’s King and Rook). But, after 21 … Qf4!, pinning White’s Rook and threatening to pile up on it with 22 … Rad8, White is still in bad shape. 20 … Rad8+

cuuuuuuuuC {wdw4rdkd} {0w0wdp0w} {wdpdwdb0} {dw!wdwdw} {wdwdPdw1} {dw)wdPdw} {P)wIBdw)} {dwdRdwdR} vllllllllV

Diagram 20. Position after 20 … Rad8+.

22


Black brings his Rook into play to join the attack on White’s King. 21 Ke3 White uses his King aggressively and tries to reinforce his center Pawn. Any hopes that the “f ” and “e” Pawns will act as a shield for his King will quickly dissipate. But, White would be in trouble no matter what he did as illustrated by the following possible continuations: 1. 21 Kc2 Bxe4+! 22 fxe4 Qxe4+ 23 Bd3 Qg2+ 24 Kb1 Rxd3 25 Qxa7 Re2. 2. 21 Kc1 Qf4+ 22 Kb1 Bxe4+! 23 fxe4 Qxe4+ 24 Ka1 Qxe2. 3. 21 Bd3 Rxe4! 22 fxe4 Qxe4 23 Kc2 Rxd3 24 Rxd3 (if 24 Kb3 then 24 … Rxd1 25 Rxd1 Qc2+ 26 Ka3 Qxd1) Qxh1. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 21 … Rxd1 This exchange relieves Black of the burden of tying a piece down to the defense of his Rook on “d8” and leaves White’s pieces in a position that allows Black to make an effective sacrifice.

22 Bxd1 White recovers his Rook. White would last longer with 22 Rxd1 Bxe4! 23 fxe4 Qxe4+ 24 Kd2 Qxe2+ 25 Kc1 Qxh2 26 Qxa7 Re2. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 22 … Bxe4! Black cracks open the position and exposes White’s King to a deadly attack.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdrdkd} {0w0wdp0w} {wdpdwdw0} {dw!wdwdw} {wdwdbdw1} {dw)wIPdw} {P)wdwdw)} {dwdBdwdR} vllllllllV

Diagram 21. Position after 22 … Bxe4.

23 Kd2 White’s King tries to make a run for it. If 23 Qd4 then 23 … Bf5+ 24 Kd2 Rd8 wins White’s Queen. Or, if 23 fxe4, then 23 … Qxe4+ followed by 24 Qxh1. 23 … Rd8+ Black brings his Rook into the attack.

Robert M. Snyder

24 Ke2 White attempts to find the safest hiding place for his King. But, there is no escape! If 24 Kc1, then 24 … Qf4+ Qe3 25 Qxe3++. Or, if 24 Ke3, then 24 … Rd3+ 25 Ke2 Qf4! leaves White’s King helpless. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 24 … Bxf3+!

cuuuuuuuuC {wdw4wdkd} {0w0wdp0w} {wdpdwdw0} {dw!wdwdw} {wdwdwdw1} {dw)wdbdw} {P)wdKdw)} {dwdBdwdR} vllllllllV

Diagram 22. Position after 24 … Bxf3.

Though Black has several ways to win, this move quickly exposes White’s King to attack and finishes the game. White resigned here because if 25 Kxf3, the game might continue 25 … Rd3+ 26 Kg2 (or 26 Ke2 Qe4+ transposes) Qe4+ 27 Kf2 Rd2+ (or munching on the Rook with 27 … Qxh1 would certainly do the trick) 28 Kg3 g5! and White is defenseless against the impending mate.

23

LESSON 4

1 e4 e5 2 Nf3 Nc6 3 d4 White frees his Bishop on the “c1-h6” diagonal, allows his Queen to exert pressure in the center, and threatens Black’s Pawn on “e5”. This aggressive move will lead to one of numerous possible openings.

Weathering the Storm Anthony Jasaitis vs. Robert Snyder Chicago, 1973 Opening: Göring Gambit More often than not, accepting a gambit Pawn means that you must accept an inferior position. In the Göring gambit, White sacrifices a Pawn to gain space and a lead in development. However, if Black is well prepared and willing to weather the storm, he should survive and emerge with the advantage. The opening part of this game is well described above. The psychology involved in being the attacker when offering a gambit often makes it such a burden that the player who plays the gambit will over-extend himself against a solid defense. Therefore, it sometimes pays to offer a return of the gambit material at a critical part of the game. This can sometimes be the key to a refutation. In this game White refuses the return of the Pawn and attempts to push forward with his attack at all costs. Before long, it is Black who has the extra material and the attack.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kgn4} {0p0pdp0p} {wdndwdwd} {dwdw0wdw} {wdw)Pdwd} {dwdwdNdw} {P)PdW)P)} {$NGQIBdR} vllllllllV Diagram 23. Position after 3 d4.

3 … exd4 Exchanging Pawns in the center is Black’s best way of relieving the pressure on his “e” Pawn. 4 c3 White initiates the Goring Gambit by using his “c” Pawn to attack Black’s Pawn on “d4”. The most common move played here is 4 Nxd4, which leads to the Scotch Game—played in LESSON FIVE.

-24-

Robert M. Snyder

Another possibility for White here is the natural developing move 4 Bc4, which may transpose into the Max Lange attack after 4 … Nf6, or the Giuoco Piano after 4 … Bc5 5 c3 Nf6. One variation, which is worthwhile to look at, due to its independent nature, is 4 Bc4 Bc5 5 0-0 d6 6 c3 Bg4 7 Qb3 Bxf3 8 Bxf7+ Kf8 9 gxf3 Nf6, and now Black’s lead in development gives him the advantage.

25

5 Bc4

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kgn4} {0p0pdp0p} {wdndwdwd} {dwdwdwdw} {wdBdPdwd} {dw0wdNdw} {P)wdW)P)} {$NGQIwdR} vllllllllV Diagram 24. Position after 5 Bc4.

4 … dxc3 This is the most commonly played move here. Black takes care of the threat on his Pawn on “d4” by accepting the gambit. There are some excellent ways of declining the gambit that give Black a comfortable game: 1. The most common way to decline the gambit is 4 … d5, which might continue 5 exd5 Qxd5 6 cxd4 Bb4+ 7 Nc3 Nf6 8 Be2 Qa5 9 Bd2 0-0 10 0-0 Bg4, with an even game. 2. A not very well known but effective way to decline the gambit is 4 … Nge7, which might continue 5 Bc4 (if 5 cxd4, then 5 … d5 6 e5 Bg4 7 Be2 Nf5 with even chances) d5 6 exd5 Nxd5 7 0-0 Nb6 8 Bb5 dxc3 9 Nd4 Bd7 10 Bxc6 bxc6 11 Nxc3 Be7 with an even game.

White develops his Bishop to the active “a2-g8” diagonal where it applies pressure on the weak “f7” square. White is willing to go all out and offer a second gambit Pawn. A common alternative for White here is to gambit one Pawn and develop with 5 Nxc3, which might continue 5 … Bb4 6 Bc4 d6 7 0-0 (if 7 Qb3, then 7 … Bxc3+ 8 bxc3 Qe7 9 0-0 Nf6 10 Bd5 00 11 Bg5 Ne5 and White doesn’t have enough compensation for his sacrificed Pawn) Bxc3 8 bxc3 Nf6 9 Bg5 (if 9 e5, then 9 … Nxe5 10 Nxe5 dxe5 11 Qxd8+ Kxd8 12 Re1 Be6 13 Bxe6 fxe6 14 Rxe5 Ke7 and White doesn’t have enough for his Pawn) 0-0 10 Re1 Bg4 and Black’s extra Pawn is worth more than White’s better position.

26


5 … Nf6

7 … Qd7

Black develops his Knight and attacks White’s unprotected “e” Pawn. Here is the point where Black should be willing to accept the second gambit Pawn with 5 … cxb2. White clearly doesn’t have enough compensation for two Pawns after 6 Bxb2 d6 7 0-0 Be6.

This is Black’s only good move. Black defends his Pawn on “f7”. Blocking the Bishop on “c8” is part of the cost of being a Pawn ahead. Defending the Pawn with 7 … Qe7 is inferior due to 8 Bg5 with the plan of meeting 8 … h6 with 9 Nd5! Qxe4+ 10 Kf1 and White has a position worth a lot more than two Pawns.

6 Nxc3 White recovers a Pawn while developing his Knight. 6 … d6 This solid move frees the Bishop on the “c8-h3” diagonal and helps Black secure the important “e5” square. Another reasonable move for Black is to develop his Bishop and pin White’s Knight with 6 … Bb4. 7 Qb3 This move is thematic. White attacks Black’s weak point on “f7” (threatening 8 Bxf7+) and restrains Black’s Bishop on “c8” to defending his Pawn on “b7”. An immediate attack on “f7” by 7 Ng5 is met by 7 … Ne5. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

8 Ng5

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdkgw4} {0p0qdp0p} {wdn0whwd} {dwdwdwHw} {wdBdPdwd} {dQHwdwdw} {P)wdW)P)} {$wGwIwdR} vllllllllV Diagram 25. Position after 8 Ng5.

White increases pressure on Black’s weak “f7” square threatening 9 Bxf7+. If White plays less actively with 8 0-0, then Black would exchange his Knight for White’s active Bishop by 8 … Na5 9 Qb5 Nxc4 10 Qxc4 Be7. 8 … Ne5 Black posts his Knight actively, defends his Pawn on “f7”, and attacks White’s Bishop on “c4”.

Robert M. Snyder

9 Bb5 In most cases this would be an idle attack that loses time by making Black drive the Bishop away with 9 … c6. But, in this instance, the attack on Black’s Queen will give White time to counter by attacking Black’s Knight on “e5” with 10 f4. To better understand this move it should be pointed out that, if given the move, Black would gladly exchange his Knight on “e5” for White’s Bishop on “c4”. If White immediately retreats his Bishop with 9 Be2, then Black drives White’s aggressively posted Knight back with 9 … h6 10 Nf3. 9 … c6 Black blocks White’s attack on his Queen while attacking White’s Bishop on “b5”. 10 f4 White attacks Black’s Knight with the idea of forcing it from its central post. Placing a Pawn on “f4” also gains more control of the center and increases attacking chances on the kingside.

27

10 … Neg4

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdkgw4} {0pdqdp0p} {wdp0whwd} {dBdwdwHw} {wdwdP)nd} {dQHwdwdw} {P)wdWdP)} {$wGwIwdR} vllllllllV

Diagram 26. Position after 10 … Neg4.

Black gets his Knight out of attack and tries to keep it as actively posted as possible. However, the less aggressive 10 … Ng6 is not as bad as theory suggests. After 10 … Ng6 the game might continue 11 Bc4 (if 11 Bd3, then 11 … h6 12 Nf3 Be7 and if White prepares to castle queenside with 13 Bd2, then Black throws a monkey wrench into the works with 13 … Qg4!) d5 12 Nxd5 (if 12 exd5, then 12 … Bc5! 13 dxc6 Qe7+ 14 Kf1 0-0) Nxd5 (not 12 … cxd5?? because 13 Bb5 wins Black’s Queen) 13 exd5 Bc5 14 dxc6 Qe7+ 15 Kf1 0-0 16 Bd2 bxc6 with about even chances. 11 h3 White attacks Black’s aggressively placed Knight. Two other possibilities are: 1. If White preserves his Bishop with 11 Be2, the game might continue

28


11 … h6 12 Nf3 d5 13 h3 (if 13 e5, then 13 … Ne4!) dxe4 14 Ng1 Nf2 15 Kxf2 Bc5+ 16 Kg3 (if 16 Kf1, then 16 … 0-0 17 Na4 Bd4) Qf5 17 Kh2 h5 and Black has two Pawns and a lot of pressure for the piece. 2. Not as strong for White would be to attack Black’s “f ” Pawn with 11 Bc4, which might continue 11 … d5 12 Nxd5 Nxd5 (not 12 … cxd5?? because 13 Bb5 wins Black’s Queen) 13 exd5 h6 14 Ne4 Qe7 and Black is clearly better after either 15 Bd3 Nf6 or 15 Kd2 Qb4+. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 11 … cxb5 Black eliminates White’s aggressive Bishop. The apparently weak, doubled “b” Pawn that is created will actually become a nuisance to White. 12 hxg4 White recovers his piece. 12 … b4 Black attacks White’s Knight on “c3” and offers his weak Pawn as a sacrifice. Black has some interesting ideas here. If White accepts the sacrifice with 13

Qxb4, Black has the opportunity to take advantage of White’s Queen being exposed to attack by the Bishop on the f8-a3 diagonal. This would occur after striking at the center with 13 … d5. If White doesn’t capture the Pawn on “b4”, he has the choice of either allowing his Knight to retreat to a less active location or allowing it to be exchanged for Black’s Knight on “d5”. 13 e5?

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdkgw4} {0pdqdp0p} {wdw0whwd} {dwdw)wHw} {w0wdw)Pd} {dQHwdwdw} {P)wdWdPd} {$wGwIwdR} vllllllllV Diagram 27. Position after 13 e5.

White plays too aggressively—trying to attack when his opponent has a reasonably solid position. Here is where the psychology of having played a gambit has a negative effect. White feels that, since he sacrificed a Pawn, he must attack. The problem is that White doesn’t have an attack at this point. It would be better for White to either accept the Pawn with 13 Qxb4, which might continue 13 … d5 14 Qb3 d4 15 Nd5 Nxd5 16 exd5 Be7, or take the natural outpost for his Knight with 13

Robert M. Snyder

Nd5, which might continue 13 … b6 (also playable is 13 … Nxd5 14 Qxd5 h6) 14 Nxf6+ gxf6 15 Nxh7 Be7. In either case Black would stand slightly better. 13 … dxe5 Black opens up the diagonal for his Bishop on “f8”. This also breaks up and isolates White’s Pawns. 14 fxe5 White recovers the Pawn. 14 … bxc3 Black eliminates White’s potentially active Knight and continues to favorably open up lines.

29

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdkgw4} {0pdqdpdp} {wdwdw0wd} {dwdwdwHw} {wdwdwdPd} {dw!wdwdw} {P)wdWdPd} {$wGwIwdR} vllllllllV

Diagram 28. Position after 16 Qxc3.

16 … Qe7+ Black attacks White’s exposed King in the center. This move also defends Black’s Pawn on “f6” and opens the “c8-h3” diagonal for his Bishop. A good alternative for Black is 16 … Qxg4. However, this is a more complicated line after 17 Qxf6.

15 exf6 White recovers his Knight. 15 … gxf6 Black eliminates White’s menacing Pawn and threatens White’s Knight. 16 Qxc3 White recovers his Pawn and pins Black’s Pawn on “f6”.

17 Be3? On the surface this developing move may look natural. However, it ties down White’s Queen to defending the Bishop when the Queen already has the important task of pinning Black’s Pawn on “f6”. In effect, White’s Queen becomes overworked. White’s best move here is 17 Kf1. However, after 17 Kf1 Black has a substantial advantage after 17 …

30


Bxg4 18 Be3 (with White’s King on “f1” the Queen doesn’t need to defend the Bishop on “e3” because White’s Rook at “a1” has access to the “e” file) Qe5. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 17 … fxg5! This wins White’s Knight. 18 0-0 White had nothing better than to remove his King from the center and unpin his Bishop. White would go down quickly after 18 Qxh8 Qxe3+ 19 Kf1 b6! (threatening 20 … Ba6++) 20 g3 Qf3+ 21 Ke1 (if 21 Kg1, then 22 Qxg3+ Kf1 23 Ba6++) Qxh1+. 18 … Rg8 Black gets his Rook out of attack. However, it is nice when a forced move is also a constructive move. The Rook will come nicely into play after this.

19 Bd4

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdkgrd} {0pdw1pdp} {wdwdwdwd} {dwdwdw0w} {wdwGwdPd} {dw!wdwdw} {P)wdWdPd} {$wdwdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 29. Position after 19 Bd4.

White centralizes his Bishop and opens up the “e” file. White hopes to take advantage of Black’s uncastled King. However, White will soon come to realize that his own King is not as secure as he thinks. Black’s extra material will be overpowering when it comes into play. 19 … Be6 Black chooses the safest continuation by developing a piece and shielding his King along the “e” file. However, Black could have easily gotten away with Pawn grabbing after 19 … Bxg4 20 Rae1 Be6. 20 Kh1 This is a waste of time. White’s King will be exposed to attack along the “h” file. It is more constructive for White to bring the inactive Rook into play with 20 Rae1.

Robert M. Snyder

See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 20 … Rg6 Black brings his Rook into play where it will be able to attack along the “h” file. 21 Rfe1 White brings his Rook into play on the important center file.

31

22 … Qd6 Black pins White’s Bishop and attacks the “h2” square. Immediately attacking on the “h” file with 22 … Rh6+ 23 Kg1 Qd6 is also good. 23 Rad1 White brings his other Rook into play on a central file while unpinning his Bishop. 23 … Rh6+

21 … Rc8 Black brings his other Rook into play on an open file and threatens White’s Queen. The immediate attack on White’s King with 21 … Rh6+ is also good. 22 Qd3 White gets his Queen out of attack while trying to keep her as active as possible.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdrdkgwd} {0pdw1pdp} {wdwdbdrd} {dwdwdw0w} {wdwGwdPd} {dwdQdwdw} {P)wdWdPd} {$wdw$wdK} vllllllllV Diagram 30. Position after 22 Qd3.

Black begins his assault on White’s King. 24 Kg1 This is White’s only move to get out of check without losing his Queen. 24 … Qh2+ Black continues his assault on White’s King; he penetrates White’s kingside position with his Queen and drives White’s King out into the open.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdrdkgwd} {0pdwdpdp} {wdwdbdw4} {dwdwdw0w} {wdwGwdPd} {dwdQdwdw} {P)wdWdP1} {dwdR$wIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 31. Position after 24 … Qh2.

32


25 Kf2 White gets his King out of attack. It makes little difference if the King goes to “f1”. Black now has a choice of several good moves to polish White off. 25 … Qf4+ Black has maneuvered his Queen to a great attacking post before bringing his Bishop into play on the “b8-h2” diagonal. 26 Kg1 The alternative, 26 Qf3 (26 Ke2 would lose White’s Queen after 26 … Bxg4+) loses quickly after 26 … Rc2+ 27 Kg1 (if 27 Re2, then 27 … Rxe2+ 28 Kxe2 Bxg4 wins White’s Queen) Qh2+ 28 Kf1 Rf6!!. The Rook cannot be captured (if 29 Qxf6, then 29 … Qxg2++; or if 29 Bxf6, then 29 … Qh1++). 26 … Bd6

cuuuuuuuuC {wdrdkdwd} {0pdwdpdp} {wdwgbdw4} {dwdwdw0w} {wdwGw1Pd} {dwdQdwdw} {P)wdWdPd} {dwdR$wIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 32. Position after 26 … Bd6.

Black brings his Bishop into the attack and threatens 27 … Rh1+! 28 Kxh1 Qh2++. White is a Bishop and Pawn behind and has to face Black’s overwhelming attack. White resigned.

LESSON 5

1 e4 e5 2 Nf3 Nc6 3 d4 exd4 4 Nxd4

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kgn4} {0p0pdp0p} {wdndwdwd} {dwdwdwdw} {wdwHPdwd} {dwdwdwdw} {P)PdW)P)} {$NGQIBdR} vllllllllV

Pressure on the “e” File Chigorin vs. Schiffers St. Petersburg, 1880, Match, Game 6 Opening: Scotch Game Mikhail Chigorin was considered to be the strongest player in Russia during the late 1800s. He played matches for the World Championship against William Steinitz in 1889 and 1892. Emanuel Schiffers was considered the next best player in Russia during the same period. White sacrifices a Pawn to open his “e” file and gain time to build up a King side attack. Throughout this game White’s use of pressure along the “e” file plays a critical role in achieving victory. This game is also a good example of when you should advance Pawns in front of your own castled King. The game ends with an exchange sacrifice to expose Black’s King followed by a nice Queen sacrifice to force mate.

Diagram 33. Position after 4 Nxd4.

White recovers his Pawn and posts his Knight in the center. 4 … Bc5 Black develops his Bishop and threatens White’s Knight on “d4”. Another popular move here is for Black to develop his Knight and attack White’s “e” Pawn with 4 … Nf6. After 4 … Nf6 White has two common replies: 1. He can immediately capture Black’s Knight on “c6” with the idea of attacking and driving away Black’s Knight on “f6” by 5 Nxc6 bxc6 6 e5. Black’s best move here is to pin and threaten White’s “e” Pawn with 6 … Qe7. This will result in both Queens blocking their kingside Bishops after 7 Qe2. Black wants to take advantage of the fact that White’s kingside Bishop would be the one

-33-

34


that is more effectively developed. Often players don’t want to make any move that violates a basic principle. However, as a general rule, “it is good to consider a move that violates a general principle if it forces your opponent to also violate a general principle.” You must evaluate who loses the most! After 4 … Nf6 5 Nxc6 bxc6 6 e5 Qe7 7 Qe2, the game might continue 7 … Nd5 8 c4 Ba6 9 b3 Qh4 (this aggressive move frees the Bishop on the “f8-a3” diagonal and can lead to some interesting tactical possibilities) 10 a3 (if 10 Bb2, then 10 … Bb4+ is good) Bc5 11 Qf3 Nb6 12 Bb2 Rb8 13 g3 Qe7 14 Bc3 f6 with approximate equality. 2. The other common reply for White, after 4 … Nf6, is to develop his Knight toward the center and defend his Pawn with 5 Nc3. Black’s most aggressive treatment is to threaten White’s “e” Pawn by aggressively developing his Bishop and pinning White’s Knight with 5 … Bb4. Since White would like to develop his Bishop to “d3” and defend his “e” Pawn without hanging his Knight on “d4” he first exchanges his Knight with 6 Nxc6. After 4 … Nf6 5 Nc3 Bb4 6 Nxc6, the game might continue 6 …

bxc6 7 Bd3 d5 8 exd5 cxd5 9 00 0-0 10 Bg5 (White threatens to undermine the defense of Black’s “d” Pawn with 11 Bxf6) c6 11 Qf3 Bd6 12 Bxf6 (or if 12 Rae1, then 12 … Rb8 13 Nd1 Be6 with an equal game) Qxf6 13 Qxf6 gxf6 14 Ne2 Be6 15 b3 Rfe8 16 Nd4 c5 17 Nxe6 fxe6 18 f4 Kg7 19 c4 d4 with an even game. 5 Be3 White develops his Bishop and defends his Knight on “d4” while threatening 6 Nxc6 followed by 7 Bxc5. Less popular but playable is 5 Nxc6 (also if 5 Nb3, then 5 … Bb6 6 a4 a6 7 Nc3 d6 8 Nd5 Ba7 and now either 9 Be3 Bxe3 10 Nxe3 Nf6 11 Bd3 0-0 12 0-0 Re8, or 9 Be2 Nf6 10 0-0 Nxd5 11 exd5 Ne5 12 Nd4 0-0) when a good continuation for Black is 5 … Qf6 6 Qd2 dxc6 7 Nc3 Be6 8 Qf4 Qxf4 9 Bxf4 0-0-0 10 Bd3 Ne7 11 Bg3 Ng6 12 f4 Rhe8 13 Ne2 Bg4 14 h3 Bh5 and now best is 15 f5 Bxe2 16 Kxe2 Ne5, but not 15 Bh2 as Black comes out on top after 15 … Nh4 16 g4 f5!. 5 … Qf6 Black eliminates White’s threat of 6 Nxc6 followed by 7 Bxc5 and threatens White’s Knight on “d4”.

Robert M. Snyder

6 c3 White defends his Knight on “d4” and increases his foothold in the center. 6 … Nge7

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdkdw4} {0p0php0p} {wdndw1wd} {dwgwdwdw} {wdwHPdwd} {dw)wGwdw} {P)wdW)P)} {$NdQIBdR} vllllllllV

Diagram 34. Position after 6 … Nge7.

Black develops his Knight while opening up the possibility of castling and supporting a strike at the center by placing a Pawn on “d5”. 7 Bc4 White develops his Bishop to the “a2g8” diagonal and clears the way for castling. 7 … d6 Black frees his Bishop on the “c8-h3” diagonal while he defends his Bishop on “c5” and covers the “e5” square. A more aggressive alternative for Black is to play 7 … 0-0 and keep open the option of striking at the center with “d5”. After 7 … 0-0, the game might

35

continue 8 0-0 Ne5 9 Be2 d5 and now if 10 Nd2, then 10 … Bb6 11 a4 N5c6, or if 10 f4, then 10 … N5c6 11 e5 Qh4. 8 f4 White plays aggressively in trying to gain more control of the center and kingside. This move has the drawback of creating a pin on White’s own Knight on “d4”. However, the alternative of immediately castling with 8 0-0 is ok for Black after 8 … Ne5 9 Be2 Qg6. 8 … Qg6 Black attacks White’s unprotected “e” and “g” Pawns. This will give White the opportunity to sacrifice a Pawn to gain time and open up lines. It would be safer for Black to play 8 … 0-0 9 0-0 Be6 with a comfortable game. 9 0-0 White removes his King from the center and activates his Rook on the kingside. Attempting to defend both the “e” and “g” Pawns with 9 Qf3 is weak because of 9 … Bg4, with a clear advantage for Black.

36


9 … Qxe4

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdkdw4} {0p0whp0p} {wdn0wdwd} {dwgwdwdw} {wdBHq)wd} {dw)wGwdw} {P)wdWdP)} {$NdQdRIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 35. Position after 9 … Qxe4.

Black accepts the sacrifice. White would have a slight edge if Black declined the gambit after 9 … 0-0 10 Nd2. 10 Re1 White brings his Rook to the open “e” file to take advantage of Black’s uncastled King and Queen on “e4”. 10 … Qg6? Black removes his Queen from her exposed location on the “e” file. However, this is inaccurate because it will allow White to play a combination which will greatly increase White’s pressure on the “e” file. It would be better for Black to play 10 … Bxd4 11 cxd4 0-0 12 Nc3 Qg6. White would then certainly have a lot of play for his Pawn. However, Black’s position would be a lot better

here than after the move played in the game. If Black castled with 10 … 0-0, White would have played 11 Bd3 Qd5 12 c4. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 11 Nxc6 This Knight exchange allows for a Bishop exchange, which opens up the “e” file for White’s Rook. 11 … Bxe3+ Black must exchange Bishops to avoid getting tripled, isolated Pawns. If 11 … bxc6, then 12 Bxc5 dxc5 13 Qe2 threatening 14 Qe7++. 12 Rxe3 White recovers his Bishop. 12 … bxc6 Black recovers his Knight. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

Robert M. Snyder

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdkdw4} {0w0whp0p} {wdp0wdqd} {dwdwdwdw} {wdBdw)wd} {dw)w$wdw} {P)wdWdP)} {$NdQdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 36. Position after 12 … bxc6.

13 Qe2 White increases the pressure on the “e” file threatening Black’s pinned Knight. 13 … Qf6 Black brings a second defender to protect his Knight. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 14 Nd2 White develops his Knight and frees his Rook on “a1”. White is now threatening to win quickly with 15 Rae1 or 15 Ne4. 14 … d5 This move is necessary. Black drives White’s Bishop away from its attack on the important “e6” square. This allows Black to post his Bishop on “e6” to limit White’s attack on the “e” file.

37

Also, the move prevents White’s Knight from going to “e4”. 15 Bd3

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdkdw4} {0w0whp0p} {wdpdw1wd} {dwdpdwdw} {wdwdw)wd} {dw)B$wdw} {P)wHQdP)} {$wdwdwIw} vllllllllV Diagram 37. Position after 15 Bd3.

White gets his Bishop out of attack finding an excellent new home on the “b1-h7” diagonal. The Bishop also covers the important “f5” square, restricting its use by Black and supporting a possible advance of White’s “f ” Pawn. 15 … Be6 Black develops his Bishop and blocks White’s attack along the “e” file. 16 Rf1 White defends his “f” Pawn and prepares support for its advance to “f5”. A good alternative for White is to sacrifice the “f” Pawn to open lines and get tremendous pressure with 16 f5. After 16 f5 the game might continue 16 … Nxf5 (not 16 … Bxf5?? because 17 Bxf5 wins a piece)

38


17 Rf1 g6 18 Kh1 (not 18 g4 right away because of 18 … Qg5 threatening White’s Rook on “e3” and pinning the “g” Pawn) h5 19 Bxf5 gxf5 20 Qa6! 0-0 21 Qxc6 and White stands considerably better due to having more active pieces, a far superior Pawn structure and a superior Knight against Black’s bad Bishop. Black’s extra Pawn will not count for much in this situation. 16 … g6 Black does his best to cover the critical “f5” square. 17 Nb3 White continues to bring all of his pieces to assist with the build-up. From “b3” the Knight is taking advantage of Black’s dark square weaknesses on “d4” and “c5”. Both of these squares are potentially good posts for the Knight. 17 … 0-0

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdw4kd} {0w0whpdp} {wdpdb1pd} {dwdpdwdw} {wdwdw)wd} {dN)B$wdw} {P)wdQdP)} {dwdwdRIw} vllllllllV


Black removes his King from the center and off of the “e” file. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 18 g4! White continues his build-up on the kingside by initiating a Pawn storm. White is not afraid to open up his own King’s position by advancing his kingside Pawns. I have had students miss a strong attack because they are overly concerned about weakening their own castled position. As a general rule, “It is reasonable to consider advancing the Pawns in front of your own castled King, if your initiative is strong enough to prevent your opponent from attacking you.” This position is a good example of where this applies. You will note that Black’s pieces are restricted and White’s King is in no danger of being attacked. However, in more complicated situations good judgment is necessary. 18 … Rae8? This is a good example of choosing the wrong Rook. Indeed Black needs to brace himself the best he can against White’s impending attack along the “e” file. White plans to support this attack with such moves as posting the Knight on “c5”, which attacks Black’s Bishop on “e6” a third time, and the thematic

Robert M. Snyder

break by advancing his “f ” Pawn to “f5”. With 18 … Rae8 Black has created some problems that could have been resolved with 18 … Rfe8. One problem is that Black’s Rook on “f8” has no mobility and is cramped. Another problem is that now there is no possibility of moving Black’s King to “f8” to support his pieces on “e8” and “e7”. Even though 18 … Rfe8 would be a better choice Black would still be in a lot of trouble after 19 f5. 19 Nc5 White occupies the awesome “c5” outpost with his Knight and attacks Black’s Bishop a third time. This is a natural outpost for a Knight in such positions. Black has a bad Bishop on the opposite color of the Knight’s outpost on “c5”. Also, the Knight cannot be attacked by any of Black’s Pawns. White has an even stronger and more forceful move here. I often tell my students, “If you see a good move, look again; there may even be a stronger move!” He can immediately crack Black open with 19 f5. After 19 f5 the game might continue 19 … gxf5 20 gxf5 Bd7 (if 20 … Bc8, then 21 Re1 wins) 21 Nc5 Nxf5 22 Rxe8 Rxe8 23 Qg4+ Qg7 24 Qxg7+ Kxg7 25 Nxd7 and White is winning.

39

19 … d4? Black plays aggressively and attempts to counter-attack by attacking White’s Rook and opening lines in the center. However, White will quickly demonstrate the inaccuracy of this move. Black’s most stubborn defense required that he get his Bishop out of attack and retreat it with 19 … Bc8. However, Black would have a horrible position and be in serious trouble after 20 f5 gxf5 21 Bxf5 Qd6 22 Nb3 threatening 23 Bxc8. 20 g5 White attacks Black’s Queen, driving her to a less active post and away from the protection of Black’s Bishop. 20 … Qh8 This is an ugly location for a Queen. Black could last a little longer with 20 … Qg7. After 20 … Qg7 the game might continue 21 Nxe6 fxe6 22 Rxe6 dxc3 23 Bc4 Kh8 23 bxc3 and Black is dying. White’s plan consists of winning Black’s Knight on “e7” by playing moves like Re4 (attacking “f7” with the Bishop to keep Black from moving his Rook there to defend the pinned Knight) followed by either Re1 or even Rd1 with the idea of Rd7.

40


See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdr4k1} {0w0whpdp} {wdpdbdpd} {dwHwdw)w} {wdw0w)wd} {dw)B$wdw} {P)wdQdw)} {dwdwdRIw} vllllllllV


21 Rxe6! White sacrifices the exchange to crack open the position and allow for a quick and devastating penetration. This will fully take advantage of Black’s exposed King and inactive Queen. 21 … fxe6 Black must recapture to avoid massive material loss. 22 Qxe6+ White’s Queen penetrates, beginning the assault on Black’s King and continuing the pressure along the “e” file. 22 … Kg7 Black gets his King out of attack. If 22 … Rf7, then 23 Bc4 Qg7 24 f5 is crushing.

23 Re1 White certainly had a choice of ways to proceed from here (other moves that would win easily were 23 Qd7 or 23 Bc4). White chooses to resume his attack on the “e” file, which will turn out to be most colorful! 23 … dxc3

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdr4w1} {0w0whwip} {wdpdQdpd} {dwHwdw)w} {wdwdw)wd} {dw0Bdwdw} {P)wdwdw)} {dwdw$wIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 40. Position after 23 … dxc3.

Anything that Black might have done here would end in quick defeat. So Black, in effect, does nothing to enhance his position and allows a brilliant finish. If 23 … Rxf4, then 24 Qe5+; or if 23 … Nd5, then 24 Qd7+. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 24 Qxe7+! It would be nice if we could finish all of our games like this! White sacrifices

Robert M. Snyder

41

his Queen to expose Black’s King to a quick mate.

pieces are brought into play to finish off Black.

24 … Rxe7

26 … Rf7

Taking White’s Queen will delay mate the longest. If 24 … Rf7, then 25 Ne6+ Kg8 26 Qxe8+ Rf8 27 Qxf8++; or if 24 … Kg8, then 25 Bc4+ Rf7 26 Qxf7++.

This is Black’s only legal move to get out of check.

25 Rxe7+ White captures Black’s Rook continuing the attack against Black’s King. 25 … Kg8

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdw4k1} {0w0w$wdp} {wdpdwdpd} {dwHwdw)w} {wdwdw)wd} {dw0Bdwdw} {P)wdwdw)} {dwdwdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 41. Position after 25 … Kg8.

Black’s only alternative, 25 … Rf7, allows mate in the same number of moves after 26 Ne6+ Kg8 27 Re8+ Rf8 28 Rxf8++. 26 Bc4+ White brings his Bishop into the assault on Black’s King. Note that all of White’s

27 Re8+ White forces Black’s King to move to his final resting place! 27 … Kg7 Once again, this is Black’s only legal move to get out of check. 28 Ne6++

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdRdw1} {0w0wdrip} {wdpdNdpd} {dwdwdw)w} {wdBdw)wd} {dw0wdwdw} {P)wdwdw)} {dwdwdwIw} vllllllllV Diagram 42. Position after 28 Ne6.

Black is checkmated!

LESSON 6

3 … Bc5 Black develops his Bishop to the “a7g1” diagonal. This and 3 … Nf6 are the two most common moves played here. Examples of the Two Knights Defense (3 … Nf6) are found in LESSONS FIVE and SIX in my book Unbeatable Chess Lessons.

Overextended Pieces D. Parniani vs. Robert Snyder Los Angeles, 1973 Opening: Giuoco Piano This game contains a nice example of how to take advantage of overextended minor pieces. White aggressively posts a Bishop on “b5” and a Knight on “g5” only to find these pieces under attack with their retreat cut off. 1 e4 e5 2 Nf3 Nc6 3 Bc4

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kgn4} {0p0pdp0p} {wdndwdwd} {dwdw0wdw} {wdBdPdwd} {dwdwdNdw} {P)P)W)P)} {$NGQIwdR} vllllllllV

4 c3 This is the most common and active move. White prepares to support the placement of a Pawn on “d4”. Less active is 4 d3, which is found along with analysis of the Evan’s Gambit (4 b4) in LESSON SEVEN in Unbeatable Chess Lessons. 4 … Nf6

Diagram 43. Position after 3 Bc4.

White develops his Bishop to the long “a2-g8” diagonal and applies pressure to the “f7” square. This is certainly not as popular as playing the Ruy Lopez (3 Bb5) at the Master level. However, this move is not uncommon at the amateur level. Therefore, it is important to be prepared to meet it.

Black develops his Knight toward the center and attacks White’s unprotected “e” Pawn. White gets a small edge if Black plays less actively with 4 … Qe7, which might continue 5 d4 Bb6 6 0-0 (or 6 Bg5 Nf6 7 d5) d6 7 h3 Nf6 8 Re1 0-0 (or 8 … h6 9 a4 a6 10 Be3) 9 Na3 h6 10 Nc2. Also, if 4 … d6, then White gets a strong Pawn center after 5 d4 exd4 6 cxd4.

-42-

Robert M. Snyder

5 0-0?

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kdw4} {0p0pdp0p} {wdndwhwd} {dwgw0wdw} {wdBdPdwd} {dw)wdNdw} {P)w)W)P)} {$NGQdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 44. Position after 5 0-0.

White immediately removes his King from the center. However, this allows Black to break-up White’s center and obtain a good game. The usual move here, 5 d4, will be covered in LESSON SEVEN. White could also play passively and defend his “e” Pawn and free his queenside pieces with 5 d3. After 5 d3 a typical continuation is 5 … d6 6 0-0 (or 6 b4 Bb6 7 a4 a6 8 0-0 0-0 9 Nbd2 Ne7 10 Bb3 Ng6 11 Nc4 Ba7 with an equal game) 0-0 7 Bb3 a6 8 Nbd2 Ba7 9 Nc4 h6 10 Be3 b5 11 Ncd2 Na5 12 Bxa7 Rxa7 13 d4 Re8 14 Bc2 exd4 15 cxd4 c5 with an equal game. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 5 … Nxe4 Black captures White’s important “e” Pawn and breaks-up White’s center.

43

6 d4 White boldly strikes at the center, attacks Black’s Bishop on “c5” and Pawn on “e5”, and frees his queenside pieces. White must play aggressively or Black will simply be a Pawn ahead. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 6 … d5! Two can play at this game! Black counters in the center using his “d” Pawn to attack White’s Bishop on “c4”, defend his Knight on “e4”, and free his queenside pieces. 7 Bb5 White gets his Bishop out of attack and pins Black’s Knight on “c6” that protects Black’s “e” Pawn. If White had played 7 dxc5, I planned on playing 7 … dxc4 8 Qxd8+ (if 8 Qe2, then 8 … Qd3! gives Black the advantage) Kxd8 9 Rd1+ Ke7 10 Re1 f5 and White is a Pawn down without compensation. 7 … exd4 Black takes care of the threat on his “e” Pawn by exchanging it before getting his Bishop on “c5” out of attack.

44


8 cxd4

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kdw4} {0p0wdp0p} {wdndwdwd} {dBgpdwdw} {wdw)ndwd} {dwdwdNdw} {P)wdW)P)} {$NGQdRIw} vllllllllV

9 … 0-0

White recovers his Pawn, maintains a Pawn in the center and renews his threat to capture Black’s Bishop. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

Black ignores White’s attack on his “d” Pawn and gets his King out of the center and into safety. There is no need to directly protect the “d” Pawn because, after 9 … 0-0, if White captures the Pawn with 10 Nxd5, Black would play 10 … Bxh7+ followed by 11 Qxd5. Tempting, but second best, is to exchange Knights with 9 … Nxc3 10 bxc3 0-0. The idea of making even exchanges when ahead a Pawn is good. However, this would strengthen White’s Pawn center by allowing him to capture toward the center and White’s “d” Pawn would no longer be isolated. Therefore, Black is patient and will wait for favorable exchanges on his terms.

8 … Bd6

10 h3

Black gets his Bishop out of attack by placing it on the active “b8-h2” diagonal (where it covers the important “e5” square and applies pressure on “h2”).

This move prevents the possibility of Black’s Bishop from pinning White’s Knight on “f3” and also threatens 11 Nxd5. If White exchanges Knights with 10 Nxe4, the game might continue 10 … dxe4 11 Bxc6 bxc6 12 Ng5 Qe7 (not 12 … f5?? because of 13 Qb3+) 13 Re1 f5 and, though Black has doubled isolated “c” Pawns, his extra Pawn and Bishop pair give him a major advantage. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

Diagram 45. Position after 8 cxd4.

9 Nc3 White develops his Knight to its most natural square, challenges Black’s actively posted Knight on “e4” and attacks Black’s Pawn on “d5”. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

Robert M. Snyder

10 … Ne7 This move has several good ideas behind it: 1. Black can move his Pawn to “c6” where it attacks White’s Bishop on “b5” and reinforces his “d” Pawn. 2. The Knight can be maneuvered to potentially active posts on the kingside. 3. It removes the possibility of doubling Black’s Pawns by exchanging the White Bishop for Black’s Knight on “c6”. 4. It protects the Pawn at “d5”.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1w4kd} {0p0whp0p} {wdwgwdwd} {dBdpdwdw} {wdw)ndwd} {dwHwdNdP} {P)wdW)Pd} {$wGQdRIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 46. Position after 10 … Ne7.

11 Nxe4? White’s idea is to give Black a weak overextended Pawn on “e4” and then use his Knight and Rook to attack it. This is a wonderful idea, if the Pawn is weak and can be captured. However,

45

the Pawn on “e4” will become a major contributing factor to White’s downfall because Black is able to defend it using an elaborate series of moves. White’s best idea is to reposition his overextended Bishop and attack Black’s actively posted Knight with 11 Bd3, which might continue 11 … Nxc3 (this exchange is better here than on move 9 because Black, being a Pawn ahead, will be able to seek further exchanges) 12 bxc3 Bf5—challenging White’s Bishop on “d3”. 11 … dxe4 Black recovers his piece and threatens White’s Knight on “f3”. 12 Ng5 White gets his Knight out of attack and continues with his plan of attacking Black’s Pawn on “e4”. 12 … Bf5 Black completes his minor piece development and defends his “e” Pawn. Not 12 … f5??, because of 13 Qb3+.

46


13 Re1

cuuuuuuuuC {rdw1w4kd} {0p0whp0p} {wdwgwdwd} {dBdwdbHw} {wdw)pdwd} {dwdwdwdP} {P)wdW)Pd} {$wGQ$wIw} vllllllllV Diagram 47. Position after 13 Re1.

White brings his Rook to the half open “e” file and attacks Black’s “e” Pawn a second time. At a glance it may appear that Black’s “e” Pawn is lost. However, Black has a nice resource that brings his pieces to life and saves the Pawn. If White attacks Black’s “e” Pawn with 13 Qe2, then Black remains a solid Pawn ahead after 13 … c6 14 Bc4 Bc7 15 Nxe4 (if 15 Rd1, then 15 … Qd6 16 g3 Rae8 17 Nxe4 Qg6) Qxd4. Offering to exchange Pawns with 13 f3 leaves White’s kingside weak on the dark squares and gives Black an opportunity to return the Pawn for a major positional advantage; 13 … e3! 14 Bxe3 Nd5 15 Bc1 (if 15 Qd2, then 15 … Bb4 16 Qf2 Nxe3 17 Qxe3 Qd5) c6 16 Bc4 Qb6 and Black has pressure on White’s isolated “d” Pawn and a nice lead in development. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

13 … Bb4! Black counters by attacking White’s Rook on “e1” and opening up the “d” file for his Queen. 14 Re2 White gets his Rook out of attack while maintaining his attack on Black’s “e” Pawn. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 14 … Qd5 The main idea behind Black’s last move now becomes apparent. Black centralizes his Queen, defends his “e” Pawn, and attacks White’s unprotected Bishop on “b5”. 15 Qa4? On the surface this move looks good. It defends White’s Bishop and attacks Black’s Bishop. The problem is that White’s Queen now occupies the “a4” square, which was the Bishop’s only retreat square. White now has a Bishop on “b5” and Knight on “g5” that are overextended. Currently these pieces have no retreat available to them. This brings us to the question of what White should have done here. The answer is simple! The circumstances dictate that he should retreat his Bishop with 15 Ba4, which would give

Robert M. Snyder

him the possibility of repositioning it on “b3”. This would have certainly been an improvement for White over the move played (though objectively White would have still been lost after 15 … Nc6 16 Bxc6 Qxc6). Black’s extra Pawn, Bishop-pair, and superior position would be too much for White to handle. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdw4kd} {0p0whp0p} {wdwdwdwd} {dBdqdbHw} {Qgw)pdwd} {dwdwdwdP} {P)wdR)Pd} {$wGwdwIw} vllllllllV Diagram 48. Position after 15 Qa4.

15 … a5! Black defends his Bishop on “b4” and threatens to win White’s Bishop on “b5” with 16 … c6, or White’s Knight on “g5” with 16 … h6. 16 f3 White decides to deal with the problem of his overextended Knight by attacking Black’s “e” Pawn and threatening 16 fxe4. White would have lasted longer

47

with 16 a3 c6 17 axb4 cxb5 18 Qa2 Qxd4, although being a couple of Pawns down certainly didn’t appeal to White. 16 … exf3 Black eliminates the threat on his “e” Pawn by exchanging it. 17 Nxf3 White recovers the Pawn. White has solved the problem of his overextended Knight, but not his overextended Bishop on “b5”. 17 … c6 Black attacks White’s Bishop on “b5”; it has nowhere to go. 18 Re5

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdw4kd} {dpdwhp0p} {wdpdwdwd} {0Bdq$bdw} {Qgw)wdwd} {dwdwdNdP} {P)wdwdPd} {$wGwdwIw} vllllllllV Diagram 49. Position after 18 Re5.

White plays aggressively by attacking Black’s Queen and attempting to open

48


a retreat for the Bishop on “b5”. But, there is no time for this. 18 … cxb5 Because this capture attacks White’s Queen, he wins White’s Bishop. 19 Qd1 White decides not to trade Queens and win Black’s Pawn on “b5” with 19 Qxb5 Qxb5 20 Rxb5 Be4 since he would be a full piece down with an inferior position. 19 … Qd7 Black gets his Queen out of attack and defends his Pawn on “b5”.

Black brings his Knight into play and attacks White’s Rook and “d” Pawn. Being a piece ahead, Black is willing to give up his extra Pawn to simplify and go into an easily won endgame. 21 Rxb5 White gets his Rook out of attack while capturing Black’s Pawn. 21 … Nxd4 Black captures White’s Pawn and attacks White’s Queen and Rook; this forces further simplifying exchanges. 22 Nxd4 White eliminates the menacing Knight.

20 Qe2 White brings his Queen into play, attacks Blacks Pawn on “b5” a second time and applies pressure on the “e” file.

22 … Qxd4+ Black recovers his piece. 23 Be3

20 … Nc6

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdw4kd} {dpdqdp0p} {wdndwdwd} {0pdw$bdw} {wgw)wdwd} {dwdwdNdP} {P)wdQdPd} {$wGwdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 50. Position after 20 … Nc6.

White finally develops this Bishop, gets his King out of check, and attacks Black’s Queen.

Robert M. Snyder

23 … Qd3

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdw4kd} {dpdwdp0p} {wdwdwdwd} {0Rdwdbdw} {wgwdwdwd} {dwdqGwdP} {P)wdQdPd} {$wdwdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 51. Position after 23 … Qd3.

Black gets his Queen out of attack and forces an exchange of Queens because of his attack on White’s Queen and Rook. White resigned here. After 24 Qxd3 Bxd3 25 Rxb7 White would be a full piece down in the endgame. At the master level, resigning in such a situation is common. However, in most scholastic tournaments the chance for mistakes is great enough to make it unwise to resign.

49

LESSON 7 Refuting an Inferior Opening R. Cornelis vs. Robert Snyder Fresno, 1972 Opening: Giuoco Piano

5 … exd4

The Møller variation of the Giuoco Piano was considered sound for over a hundred years. However, nowadays this variation is considered to be inferior due to the modern treatment used in this game. An opening played by White is generally considered to be refuted when Black can get an advantage with precise play. This game also contains an instructive Knight endgame where one side is a Pawn ahead with a massive queenside Pawn majority. 1 e4 e5 2 Nf3 Nc6 3 Bc4 Bc5 4 c3 Nf6 5 d4

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kdw4} {0p0pdp0p} {wdndwhwd} {dwgw0wdw} {wdB)Pdwd} {dw)wdNdw} {P)wdW)P)} {$NGQIwdR} vllllllllV Diagram 52. Position after 5 d4.

White follows through with the idea behind 4 c3 by placing a Pawn on “d4” to attack in the center. White now threatens Black’s Bishop on “c5” and Pawn on “e5”. This is considered the sharpest way to fight for the center.

Black gets rid of the threat on his “e” Pawn by exchanging it before getting his Bishop on “c5” out of attack. Weak would be 5 … Bb6? because of 6 dxe5 Ng4 (if 6 … Nxe4??, then 7 Qd5) 7 Bxf7+ Kxf7 8 Ng5+ followed by 9 Qxg4. 6 cxd4 White recovers his Pawn and threatens Black’s Bishop on “c5”. The aggressive attack on Black’s Knight by 6 e5 doesn’t pose a significant problem for Black. After 6 e5 the game might continue 6 … d5 (not 6 … Ne4 because 7 Bd5! is strong) 7 Bb5 Ne4 8 cxd4 Be7 (or 8 … Bb6 is good enough for equality) 9 Nc3 0-0 10 Bd3 f5 11 exf6e.p. Bxf6! (an improvement over Steinitz’s 11 … Nxf6 when White stands slightly better after 12 h3! restricting Black’s use of the important “g4” square) 12 Be3 Bf5 13 Qb3 Kh8 with approximately even chances. Also, immediate castling, with 6 0-0, doesn’t offer a problem for Black after

-50-

Robert M. Snyder

6 … Nxe4 7 cxd4 d5! 8 dxc5 (8 Bb5 transposes into the game in LESSON SIX) dxc4 9 Qxd8+ (if 9 Qe2, then 9 … Qd3 10 Re1 f5 11 Nc3 0-0 12 Nxe4 fxe4 13 Qxe4 Bf5 and now 14 Qh4 Rae8 and Black is slightly better, or 14 Qf4 Qd5! planning to meet 15 Qxc7 with 15 … Be4) Kxd8 10 Rd1+ Bd7 11 Be3 Kc8 12 Nbd2 (if 12 Rc1, then 12 … Be6 and now 13 Nbd2 Nxd2 14 Nxd2 Ne5, or 13 Na3 Nb4 14 Nxc4 Nd3 15 Rc2 Nexc5) Nxd2 13 Rxd2 Re8 14 Rc1 b5 and Black is better. 6 … Bb4+ Black gets his Bishop out of attack and attacks White’s King. The passive retreat of the Bishop with 6 … Bb6? will give White a considerable advantage after 7 d5 Ne7 (if 7 … Na5, White gets a great position after 8 Bd3 threatening to win White’s Knight with 9 b4) 8 e5 Ng4 9 d6! cxd6 (if 9 … Nxf2, then 10 Qb3 planning to meet 10 … Nxh1? with 11 Bxf7+ Kf8 12 Bg5) 10 exd6 Nxf2 11 Qb3 f6 (if 11 … Ne4, then 12 Bxf7+ Kf8 13 Bh5 Nxd6 14 Rf1 and Black is dying) 12 Rf1 Nf5 13 Bf4! and Black is tied up hand and foot!

51

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kdw4} {0p0pdp0p} {wdndwhwd} {dwdwdwdw} {wgB)Pdwd} {dwdwdNdw} {P)wdW)P)} {$NGQIwdR} vllllllllV

Diagram 53. Position after 6 … Bb4+.

7 Nc3 This was considered to be White’s most dynamic move. White actively develops his Knight and offers his “e” Pawn as a gambit. For many years this move was very popular until Grandmaster Lajos Portisch knocked the steam out of it by demonstrating that Black obtains a clear advantage in the main line. Other possible continuations are: 1. 7 Nbd2 d5 8 exd5 Nxd5 9 0-0 0-0 is equal. 2. 7 Kf1 d5 8 exd5 Nxd5 9 Nc3 (if 9 Ng5 then 9 … 0-0 and now 10 a3 Ba5 planning to meet 11 Nxh7 with 11 … Re8!, or 10 Nc3 Nf6) Nxc3 10 bxc3 Bxc3 11 Bxf7+ (if White offers his Rook with 11 Qb3?, then 11 … Bxa1 12 Bxf7+ Kf8 13 Ba3+ Ne7 14 Ne5 Qxd4 15 Bh5 Qf4 16 Qd5 and Black throws a monkey wrench into White’s attack and will be ahead in material

52


when the smoke clears after 16 … Bg4!, with possible continuations being 17 Bxe7+ Kxe7 18 Qc5+ Kf6 19 Nxg4+ Ke6, or 17 Nxg4 g6) Kxf7 12 Qb3+ Be6 13 Qxc3 Bd5 and Black stands better. 3. 7 Bd2 Bxd2+ 8 Nbxd2 d5 9 exd5 Nxd5 (White has an isolated “d” Pawn but has a small spatial advantage and active piece play in most variations) 10 Qb3 (if 10 0-0, then 10 … 0-0 11 Ne5 and the game is even after either 11 … Nxe5 12 dxe5 Be6 13 Qb3 Nf4, or 11 … Nxd4 12 Nb3 Nxb3 13 Bxd5 Qf6 14 Bxf7+ Rxf7 15 Qxb3 Qxe5 16 Rae1 Be6 17 Qxe6 Qxe6 18 Rxe6 Rd8) Nce7 11 0-0 0-0 12 Rfe1 c6 with approximate equality in these variations: • 13 a4 Qb6 14 a5 Qxb3 15 Nxb3 Rd8 16 Nc5 Rb8. • 13 Ne5 Qb6 14 Ndf3 Qxb3 15 Bxb3 Rd8. • 13 Ne4 Nb6 14 Nc5 (if 14 Bd3, then 14 … Nf5 15 Qc3 h6 16 Rad1 Nd6 17 Ne5 Nxe4 18 Bxe4 Be6) Nxc4 15 Qxc4 b6 16 Nd3 a5 17 Nf4 Qd6. White has an advantage in space in compensation for an isolated “d” Pawn and a Knight versus a Bishop.

7 … Nxe4 Black accepts the gambit and takes advantage of the pin on White’s Knight on “c3” while liquidating White’s Pawn center and attacking White’s Knight on “c3” a second time. 8 0-0 White ignores the two pieces attacking his Knight on “c3”, removes his King from the center, and prepares to bring his Rook to the critical “e” file. Other moves here would leave White in sad shape. If White tries defending his Knight while attacking Black’s “f ” Pawn a second time with 8 Qb3 then Black simply plays 8 … 0-0. 8 … Bxc3 Black removes White’s menacing Knight on “c3”. This is stronger than 8 … Nxc3 9 bxc3 with the possible continuations: 1. 9 … d5 10 cxb4 dxc4 11 Re1+ Ne7 12 Qa4+! c6 13 b5 0-0 14 Ba3 cxb5 15 Qxb5 Be6 16 Ng5 Re8 17 Nxe6 fxe6 18 Bxe7 Rxe7 19 Qxc4 Rc8 20 Qd3. 2. 9 … Bxc3 10 Ba3 d5 (if 10 … Bxa1?, then 11 Re1+ Ne7 12 Bxe7) 11 Bb5 Bxa1 12 Re1+ Be6 13 Qa4 Qb8 14 Ne5 Bc3 15 Bxc6+ bxc6 16 Qxc6+ Kd8 17 Qxc3 Qb6 18 Bc5 and White’s position is worth

Robert M. Snyder

more than the sacrificed material. A couple possible continuations are: • 18 … Qb7 19 Qg3 Re8 20 Qxg7 Qb2 21 Qxh7 Qxa2 22 Qd3 Qa4 23 Rc1 Rb8 24 Bxa7 Rb7 25 Bc5. • 18 … Qa6 19 Bb4 f6 20 Rc1 Qb7 21 Qc5 fxe5 22 Qe7+ Kc8 23 Qxe6+ Kb8 24 Qxe5. 9 d5 This move was first suggested by Jørgen Møller back in 1898. White attacks Black’s Knight on “c6”, and prevents Black from playing his natural freeing move, by placing his Pawn on “d5”. The natural looking move here is to recover the piece with 9 bxc3. However, Black gets the advantage after 9 … d5—defending his Knight on “e4”, attacking White’s Bishop on “c4” and freeing his Bishop on “c8”.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kdw4} {0p0pdp0p} {wdndwdwd} {dwdPdwdw} {wdBdndwd} {dwgwdNdw} {P)wdW)P)} {$wGQdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 54. Position after 9 d5.

53

9 … Bf6 This is the strongest move in this position. Black gets his Bishop out of attack and keeps it on the active “a1-h8” diagonal. On “f6” the Bishop covers the important “e7” square and aids in the defense of the kingside. Getting the Knight out of attack and bringing it into the center with 9 … Ne5 is now considered to be an inferior move since White obtains some pressure for his sacrificed Pawn after 9 … Ne5 10 bxc3 Nxc4 11 Qd4 f5, • Black can try to hold onto the extra Knight with 11 … Ncd6, but this gives White the advantage after 12 Qxg7 Qf6 13 Qxf6 Nxf6 14 Re1+ Nfe4 15 Nd2 f5 16 f3 0-0 17 fxe4 Nxe4 18 Nxe4 fxe4 19 Rxe4 d6 20 Bh6. • If Black immediately removes his King from the center with 11 … 0-0, then 12 Qxe4 Nd6 13 Qd3 gives White a nice spatial advantage to compensate for the sacrificed Pawn. 12 Qxc4 d6 13 Nd4 0-0 14 f3 Nc5 15 Ba3 b6 16 Bxc5 bxc5 17 Nc6 Qf6 18 Rfe1 Bd7 19 Re7 Rf7 20 Re6 Qg5 (if 20 … Bxe6, then 21 dxe6 Rff8 22 e7+ Rf7 23 Re1 Re8 24 Re6 Qg5 25 Nd8) 21 Rae1 f4 22 a4 Kh8 23 R6e4.

54


10 Re1 White brings his Rook into play and pins Black’s unprotected Knight. The less patient recovery of White’s piece with 10 dxc6 clearly favors Black after 10 … bxc6 11 Re1 0-0 planning to meet 12 Rxe4 with 12 … d5. 10 … Ne7 Black gets his Knight out of attack and shields his King on the “e” file. If Black immediately removed his King from the center with 10 … 0-0, he loses the opportunity to blockade White’s “d” Pawn after 11 Rxe4 Ne7 (11 … Na5 12 Bd3 leaves Black’s Knight on “a5” misplaced) 12 d6. After 12 d6 the game might continue 12 … cxd6 13 Bg5 d5 14 Bxd5 Nxd5 15 Qxd5 d6 16 Rd4 Re8 17 Bxf6 Qxf6 18 Rad1 and White’s position is worth a Pawn. Certainly not 10 … Ne5?? because of 11 Nxe5 Bxe5 12 Rxe4 d6 13 f4 and Black loses a Bishop. 11 Rxe4 White recovers his Knight.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kdw4} {0p0php0p} {wdwdwgwd} {dwdPdwdw} {wdBdRdwd} {dwdwdNdw} {P)wdW)P)} {$wGQdwIw} vllllllllV Diagram 55. Position after 11 Rxe4.

11 … d6 Black frees his Bishop on the “c8-h3” diagonal and prevents White’s Pawn from going to “d6”. 12 Bg5 White develops his last minor piece and threatens to double and isolate Black’s kingside Pawns with 13 Bxf6 gxf6. Interesting is a variation called the “Bayonet Attack” by 12 g4. Black does well to return the Pawn with 12 … 0-0 13 g5 Be5 14 Nxe5 dxe5 15 Rxe5 Ng6 16 Re1 Qd7! (with the idea of 17 … b5 followed by 18 … Bb7 attacking White’s isolated “d” Pawn) and now if 17 Be3, then 17 … b5 planning to meet 18 Bb3? with 18 … Qh3! threatening 19 … Nh4.

Robert M. Snyder

12 … Bxg5 Black eliminates White’s threat to exchange on “f6” by initiating the Bishop exchange first. Attacking White’s Rook with 12 … Bf5 is weak because of 13 Bb5+ Kf8 14 Re3 and White has more than enough compensation for his Pawn. 13 Nxg5 White recovers his Bishop. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 13 … h6! Black forces White’s hand by threatening White’s aggressively placed Knight. This is the move that Portisch has shown gives Black the advantage, thereby refuting the Møller Variation. Weak would be 13 … Bf5? because of 14 Qf3! Bxe4 (if 14 … Qd7, then 15 Bb5! Qxb5 16 Qxf5; or if 14 … 0-0, then 15 Rxe7 Qxe7 16 Qxf5) 15 Qxf7+ Kd7 16 Qe6+ Ke8 17 Qxe4 Qd7 18 Re1 threatening 19 Bb5.

55

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kdw4} {0p0whp0w} {wdw0wdw0} {dwdPdwHw} {wdBdRdwd} {dwdwdwdw} {P)wdW)P)} {$wdQdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 56. Position after 13 … h6.

Immediately getting the King out of the center with 13 … 0-0 doesn’t give Black any advantage after 14 Nxh7! Kxh7 (or if 14 … Bf5, then 15 Rxe7 Qxe7 16 Nxf8 Rxf8 with an even game) 15 Qh5+ Kg8 16 Rh4 f5 (if 16 … f6, then 17 g4! Re8 18 Bd3 with a sufficient attack for the piece) 17 Qh7+ Kf7 18 Rh6 Rg8 19 Re1 Kf8 (if 19 … Qf8, then 20 Bb5 Rh8 21 Qxh8 gxh6 22 Qh7+ Kf6 23 Rxe7 Qxe7 24 Qxh6+ with a drawn game) 20 Rh3 Bd7 21 Rhe3 Nc8 22 Bd3 g6 24 h4 Rg7 24 Qh8+ Rg8 25 Qh7 with a drawn game. 14 Bb5+ With the “d” Pawn blocking White’s Bishop on the “a2-g8” diagonal, White repositions his Bishop with an attack on Black’s King. Since White is a Pawn down he must play actively and attempt to obtain counter-play. A passive retreat of the Knight with 14 Nf3 leaves White without enough compensation for the

56


Pawn after 14 … 0-0. Also, 14 Qh5 is met by 14 … 0-0 15 Rae1 Ng6 16 Nf3 (not 16 Nxf7?, because of 16 … Qf6!) Qf6 17 Nd4 Bd7 with a clear advantage for Black. The most common move played here is 14 Qe2. White will give up his Knight on “g5” and then triple on the “e” file to force Black to return the piece. However, in this line White will not obtain enough compensation for his sacrificed Pawn. After 14 Qe2 the game might continue 14 … hxg5 15 Re1 Be6 16 dxe6 f6 17 Re3 (this is considered to be the main line, it requires precise play on the part of Black—however, a reasonable reply for White is 17 Rd4, with the possible continuation 17 … c6 18 Bd3 d5 19 h3 Qb6 20 Rg4 0-0-0 21 b4 Kb8 22 a4 Qc7 23 a5 Qd6 and Black’s extra Pawn is worth more than White’s extra space) c6 (if 17 … d5, then 18 Rh3 Rxh3 19 gxh3 g6 20 Qf3! Qd6 21 Qxf6) 18 Rh3 Rxh3 (not 18 … Rf8?, because of 19 Rh7, planning to meet 19 … d5 with 20 Rxg7 Rh8 21 Qf3 Qa5 22 Rd1 f5 23 Qe3, or 19 … g6 with 20 Bd3 and now if 20 … Qa5, then 21 b4, or if 20 … Qb6, then 21 Bxg6+! Nxg6 22 Qh5 Rg8 23 Re7+! Kd8 24 Rd7+ Kc8 25 Qh7) 19 gxh3 (threatening mate in four beginning with 20 Qh5+) g6 (Black keeps White’s Queen out of “h5” with the plan of 20 … Qa5 followed by 21 … 0-0-0) 20 Qd2 (if 20 Bd3, then 20 … Qa5) Kf8

(a good alternative is 20 … d5 21 Bd3 Qd6 and Black is clearly better) 21 h4 gxh4 22 Qh6+ (If 22 Re4, then 22 … g5 23 Qc3 Kg7 24 Rg4 Kh6 planning to meet 25 Qxf6+ with 25 … Ng6) Kg8 23 Re3 (perhaps the lesser of evils for White is 23 b4, which prevents Black from moving his Queen to “a5”, although Black still stands clearly better after 23 … a5 24 Bd3 Qf8 25 Qxh4 b5 26 a3 axb4 27 axb4 f5) Qa5 24 Qxh4 Kg7 25 Rh3 Qg5+ 26 Qxg5 fxg5 and White has little chance of surviving the ending because he is a Pawn down with an overextended Pawn on “e6”. 14 … Bd7 Black develops his last minor piece while challenging White’s Bishop. If Black played 14 … c6, then White ends up with the better game after 15 Nxf7! (stronger than 15 dxc6 0-0!) Kxf7 16 Qf3+ Nf5 (if 16 … Bf5, then 19 Rae1) 17 dxc6. 15 Qe2 White defends his Bishop on “b5” and increases pressure on the “e” file with the threat of 16 Bxd7+ Qxd7 17 Re1. 15 … Bxb5 Black trades Bishops in keeping with the idea of making even exchanges when ahead in material. For the moment, this

Robert M. Snyder

will also remove White’s Queen from applying pressure on the “e” file.

57

See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

16 Qxb5+ White recovers the Bishop. 16 … Qd7 Black gets his King out of check by activating his Queen and challenging White’s Queen.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdkdw4} {0p0qhp0w} {wdw0wdw0} {dQdPdwHw} {wdwdRdwd} {dwdwdwdw} {P)wdw)P)} {$wdwdwIw} vllllllllV


17 Qe2 White gets his Queen out of attack and keeps up the pressure on the “e” file by attacking Black’s pinned Knight. White is now threatening 18 Re1. White’s Knight would have no escape if he plays 17 Qxd7+ Kxd7 18 Nxf7 Rhf8. If 17 Qxb7, Black comes out a Pawn ahead after 17 … 0-0 18 Rae1 Rab8! 19 Qxa7 Nxd5 20 Nf3 (if 20 Qd4, then 20 … Qf5 21 Nf3 Rb4 22 Nh4 Qg5 23 Qd1 Rxb2) Rxb2 21 Qd4 Qb5.

17 … Kf8 White breaks the pin on his Knight by removing his King from the “e” file. Black now threatens to win White’s Knight (with 18 … hxg5) and “d” Pawn (with 18 … Nxd5). Immediately capturing White’s Knight with 17 … hxg5 would have allowed White’s Rook to penetrate to the 7th rank after 18 Re1 0-0 19 Rxe7. 18 Re1 White has nothing better than to continue with his build-up on the “e” file and give up his “d” Pawn. If 18 Qh5, then Black comes out on top after 18 … Qf5 19 Rae1 Ng8! 20 f4 g6. Trying to expose Black’s King with a Knight sacrifice will prove unsound after 18 Nxf7 Kxf7 19 Re1 Ng8! (not 19 … Nxd5?? because of 20 Qh5+ forking King and Knight) 20 Re6 Kf8! and White is unable to make any progress. In Portisch’s important theoretical game his opponent tried 21 f4 Nf6! 22 Re7 Re8 23 Rxe8+ Qxe8 24 Qf2 Qb5 and then resigned since he is a piece down without any compensation.

58


18 … Nxd5 Black gets his Knight out of attack and wins a second Pawn. With all of White’s pieces in play he certainly has some compensation, but not enough for two Pawns. 19 Nh3? White gets his Knight out of attack. The idea of posting it on “h3” instead of “f3” is to keep the “d1-h5” diagonal open for White’s Queen. However, it is more important to bring the Knight to a more centralized location with 19 Nf3 where it would also be defending the Rook on “e1”. The significance of this will become apparent as the game continues. After 19 Nf3 Black would continue with 19 … c6 and now: 1. If 20 Qd3, then 20 … g6 21 Qd4 Kg8 22 Kf1 Kh7 23 Rh4 f6. 2. If 20 Kf1, then 20 … g6 21 h4 Kg7 22 h5 Nf6 23 Re7 Rae8 24 Rxd7 Rxe2 25 Rxf7+ Kxf7 26 hxg6+ Kxg6 27 Rxe2 Re8 and Black is a Pawn up with a superior position in the endgame. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdwiw4} {0p0qdp0w} {wdw0wdw0} {dwdndwdw} {wdwdRdwd} {dwdwdwdN} {P)wdQ)P)} {dwdw$wIw} vllllllllV Diagram 58. Position after 19 Nh3.

19 … Nf6! Black repositions his Knight, covers the important “e8” square, and threatens White’s Rook. It may look dangerous to invite White’s Rook to penetrate to the 7th rank. However, this is all part of Black’s plan! 20 Re7 White gets his Rook out of attack while posting it actively on the 7th rank and attacking Black’s Queen. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 20 … Re8! This move is the key idea behind Black’s last move. Black threatens White’s aggressively posted Rook and counter attacks on the “e” file. Black wants to force exchanges to simplify the game and relieve White’s pressure.

Robert M. Snyder

21 Rxd7?

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdriw4} {0p0Rdp0w} {wdw0whw0} {dwdwdwdw} {wdwdwdwd} {dwdwdwdN} {P)wdQ)P)} {dwdw$wIw} vllllllllV Diagram 59. Position after 21 Rxd7.

This will result in White going into a lost endgame. White would have a better chance by limiting the exchanges and trying to maintain some degree of pressure with 21 Rxe8+ Qxe8 22 Qd2 Qd7 23 Nf4. However, in the end Black’s two extra Pawns would prevail.

59

after 22 … Nxd7 Black would be two Pawns ahead. 22 … Kxf7 Black captures White’s menacing Rook. 23 Rxe2

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdwdw4} {0p0wdk0w} {wdw0whw0} {dwdwdwdw} {wdwdwdwd} {dwdwdwdN} {P)wdR)P)} {dwdwdwIw} vllllllllV Diagram 60. Position after 23 Rxe2.

Black recovers the Queen. Here is where it becomes clear why White should have posted his Knight on “f3” back on move 19 where it would be protecting the Rook on “e1”. If the Knight was on “f3”, White would be able to continue with 22 Rxc7.

White recovers his Rook. Black has reached a won endgame. Black’s advantages include being a Pawn ahead, having his extra Pawn on the queenside creating a massive queenside Pawn majority, and having a more active King and Knight. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

22 Rxf7+

23 … Re8

White uses a “desperado” to recover one of the two Pawns. If White recovers his Rook right away with 22 Rxe2, then

It is to Black’s advantage to offer further exchanges. Black challenges White’s Rook and contests control of the important “e” file. He eliminates

21 … Rxe2

60


White’s control of the “e” file so that Black’s King will be able to head toward the center to support the advance of his center and queenside Pawns. 24 Kf1 White brings his King into play and defends his Rook. 24 … Rxe2 Black exchanges Rooks clearing the way for his King to be able to move toward the center. 25 Kxe2 White recovers his Rook and brings his King further into play. 25 … Ke6 Black centralizes his King. Black’s plan will be to advance his massive majority of Pawns in the center and queenside. Black’s King will be able to support their advance and at the same time prevent White from accomplishing anything significant on the kingside where he has the Pawn majority. 26 Kf3 White would have offered more resistance by getting his Knight into play with 26 Nf4+ Kf5 27 g3. White should have kept his King on “e2”

rather than bringing him toward the kingside.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdwdwd} {0p0wdw0w} {wdw0khw0} {dwdwdwdw} {wdwdwdwd} {dwdwdKdN} {P)wdw)P)} {dwdwdwdw} vllllllllV Diagram 61. Position after 26 Kf3.

26 … Ke5 Black continues with his plan of centralizing his King before beginning the advance of his center and queenside Pawns. 27 Nf4 White finally gets his inactive Knight into play. 27 … d5 Black advances his dangerous passed center Pawn. 28 Ne2 Ideally Black would like to penetrate with his King through the center and get to “c2” where he will be able to support the advance of the “d” Pawn and threaten White’s queenside Pawns.

Robert M. Snyder

Therefore, White is attempting to set up a barrier to keep Black’s King out. If 28 Nd3+, the game might continue 28 … Kd4 29 Nf4 g5 30 Ne6+ Kd3 31 Nxc7 Kc2 with a winning position. 28 … c5 Black brings up the reserves! If White sits around and does nothing Black’s Pawn advance will win easily. 29 h3 This move prevents the entry of Black’s Knight to “g4” in the event that White moves his King to “e3”. White’s best chance is to try to obtain counterplay with his Knight and kingside Pawn majority.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdwdwd} {0pdwdw0w} {wdwdwhw0} {dw0piwdw} {wdwdwdwd} {dwdwdKdP} {P)wdN)Pd} {dwdwdwdw} vllllllllV Diagram 62. Position after 29 h3.

29 … b5 Black’s Pawn mass grows as he continues to bring up more reserves!

61

30 Nf4 White finally decides to use his Knight actively in an attempt to obtain some counter-play. 30 … c4 Black continues his queenside Pawn march with an eventual Queen in mind. 31 Ng6+ White is trying to find greener pastures for his Knight to graze. However, the game has long since been decided. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 31 … Kd4 Black’s King is advanced to support his Pawns and attack White’s queenside Pawns. 32 Ne7

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdwdwd} {0wdwHw0w} {wdwdwhw0} {dpdpdwdw} {wdpiwdwd} {dwdwdKdP} {P)wdw)Pd} {dwdwdwdw} vllllllllV Diagram 63. Position after 32 Ne7.

62


White’s Knight continues to wander, looking for some kind of counter-play. However, keeping Black’s King out of “d3” with 32 Ke2 would have allowed him to last a little longer. After 32 Ke2, one easy way for Black to win would be to play 32 … b4 with the idea of 33 … c3. 32 … Kd3 Black’s King continues to penetrate, opens up “d4” for his Pawn, and prepares to attack White’s queenside Pawns. 33 Nc6 White’s Knight is doing its best to try to rescue a hopeless situation on the queenside. The Knight attacks Black’s unprotected “a” Pawn and covers some of the squares to which Black’s Pawns want to move. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 33 … Kc2 This is Black’s most direct winning method. Black’s King attacks White’ “b” Pawn and will assist in supporting his queenside Pawns further. Black doesn’t mind temporarily sacrificing some Pawns to win White’s Knight.

34 Nxa7 White has nothing better to do than to give his Knight some Pawns for his last supper! 34 … Kxb2 Black clears the way for the advance of his “c” Pawn by moving his King out of the way and removing the “b” Pawn. 35 Nxb5

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdwdwd} {dwdwdw0w} {wdwdwhw0} {dNdpdwdw} {wdpdwdwd} {dwdwdKdP} {Piwdw)Pd} {dwdwdwdw} vllllllllV

Diagram 64. Position after 35 Nxb5.

White’s Knight eats his second Pawn and prepares to sacrifice himself to stop Black’s “c” Pawn from Queening. 35 … c3 This forces White to give up his Knight to prevent the “c” Pawn from Queening and will result in White being a full Knight down. White resigned here.

LESSON 8

3 … Nd4

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kgn4} {0p0pdp0p} {wdwdwdwd} {dBdw0wdw} {wdwhPdwd} {dwdwdNdw} {P)P)W)P)} {$NGQIwdR} vllllllllV

Taking Advantage of an Out of Play Queen Kindermann vs. Tatai Budapest, 1987 Opening: Ruy Lopez Black starts off by playing an inferior variation of the Ruy Lopez and gives White the advantage out of the opening. Then, in the face of White’s kingside build-up, Black’s places the Queen out of play on the queenside. By the time she gets over to the kingside to assist it is too late. 1 e4 e5 2 Nf3 Nc6 3 Bb5 White initiates the Ruy Lopez by developing his Bishop and attacking Black’s Knight on “c6”, which indirectly applies pressure to Black’s “e” Pawn. This is the most common move played here.

Diagram 65. Position after 3 … Nd4.

This is known as Bird’s Defense. It is rarely seen at the Master level today and would actually be better named Bird’s Attack because of its aggressive nature. On “d4” the Knight threatens White’s Bishop on “b5”. One of its drawbacks is that Black moves the same piece twice in a row and neglects development of the minor pieces. A second drawback is that Black obtains doubled Pawns. Black’s plan is to have the doubled Pawn on “d4” block White’s natural placement of a Pawn on “d4” and prevent White from being able to develop his Knight to “c3”. Overall, Black’s disadvantages outweigh these advantages. White, with proper play, will obtain an advantage in this opening. Black’s most common move, 3 … a6 will be examined in LESSONS TEN, ELEVEN & TWELVE and were

-63-

64


covered in LESSONS NINE, TEN, ELEVEN & TWELVE in Unbeatable Chess Lessons. Of other common third moves for Black: 3 … d6 will be covered in LESSON NINE and 3 … Bc5 is covered in LESSON EIGHT in Unbeatable Chess Lessons. 4 Nxd4 It is clearly best to eliminate Black’s aggressively posted Knight and double Black’s Pawns. 4 … exd4 Black recovers his Knight. 5 0-0 White gets his King out of the center and into safety behind a protective wall of Pawns. This is White’s least committing move and leaves open the greatest number of options. 5 … Bc5 Black develops his Bishop and reinforces his Pawn on “d4”. If Black immediately drives White’s Bishop back with 5 … c6, the game might continue 6 Bc4 Nf6 7 Re1 d6 8 c3 Ng4 9 h3 Ne5 10 d3 Nxc4 11 dxc4 dxc3 12 Nxc3 Be7 13 Bf4 0-0 14 Qd3 Be6 15 Rad1 Qa5 16 Nd5! cxd5 (if 16 … Bh4, then 17 g3 cxd5 18 cxd5) 17 exd5 Qxa2 18

b3 Qb2 19 Qg3 and White is clearly better. 6 d3

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kdn4} {0p0pdp0p} {wdwdwdwd} {dBgwdwdw} {wdw0Pdwd} {dwdPdwdw} {P)PdW)P)} {$NGQdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 66. Position after 6 d3.

Simple and good. White frees his Bishop on the “c1-h6” diagonal, opens “d2” for possible use by his Knight and protects his “e” Pawn. 6 … c6 Black attacks White’s Bishop on “b5”, gains support for a Pawn on “d5” and opens the “d8-a5” diagonal for possible use by his Queen. If Black plays less actively and develops his Knight with 6 … Ne7, then the game might continue 7 Qh5 Bb6 8 Bg5 0-0 9 Bc4 Qe8 10 Nd2 d6 (if 10 … Kh8, then 11 e5!) 11 f4 Kh8 12 Bxe7 Qxe7 13 f5 with a clear advantage for White.

Robert M. Snyder

7 Ba4 White gets his Bishop out of attack and places it where it has the option of being repositioned to either “b3” or “c2”. However, 7 Bc4 was also playable; White would stand slightly better. 7 … Ne7 Black develops his Knight to where it supports his Pawn going to “d5”. Developing the Knight to its more natural square by 7 … Nf6 is weaker because of 8 e5 Nd5 9 Nd2 d6 10 Ne4. Another possibility, and Black’s best move here, is 7 … d6, which could continue with 8 Nd2 Nf6 9 Nb3 Bb6 (or 9 … Nd7 10 c3 dxc3 11 bxc3 Bb6 12 d4 0-0 13 Nd2 Re8 14 Re1) 10 Bg5 Qe7 11 Nd2 0-0 12 f4 Re8 13 Bb3 Bc7 14 Nf3 and White stands slightly better.

65

Bishop on the “a2-g8” diagonal with 9 Bb3, which might continue 9 … d5 10 exd5 Nxd5 11 Re1+ Kf7 (or if 11 … Kf8, then 12 Qh5 g6 13 Qh6+ Kg8 14 Nd2 Bf8 15 Qh3 Bg7 16 Nf3) 12 Nd2 g6 13 Nf3 Kg7 14 Bxd5 Qxd5 15 Re5 Qd6 16 b4! Bxb4 17 Bb2 c5 18 a3 Ba5 19 Rxc5 and Black is in trouble. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kdw4} {0pdwhp0p} {wdpdwdwd} {dwgpdwdw} {Bdw0P)wd} {dwdPdwdw} {P)PdWdP)} {$NGQdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 67. Position after 8 … d5.

8 f4

9 f5!

White plays aggressively to increase both his control of the center and attacking chances on the kingside. White plans to use his “f ” Pawn to cramp Black’s pieces and spearhead an attack.

White continues with his plan of using the “f ” Pawn to spearhead an attack on the kingside. This move cramps Black by blocking the “h3-c8” diagonal of his Bishop and opening the “c1-h6” diagonal for White’s Bishop. Black must also concern himself with the possibility of White advancing the Pawn to “f6”.

8 … d5 Black counter-attacks in the center by attacking White’s “e” Pawn and freeing his Bishop on the “c8-h3” diagonal. If 8 … f5, then White would reposition his

66


9 … f6 Black decides to Blockade White’s “f ” Pawn and attempts to secure the “e5” and “g5” squares. The drawback of this move is that it weakens the “h5-e8” diagonal. Other possibilities are: 1. 9 … 0-0 10 f6 gxf6 11 Qh5 and Black’s weak Pawns and open King position give White a nice advantage. 2. 9 … g6 10 f6 Ng8 11 exd5 b5 (or if 11 … Qxd5, then 12 Bb3 Qd8 13 Qe1+ Kf8 14 Nd2) 12 Qe1+ Kf8 13 b4 Bb6 14 Bb3 cxd5 15 Bxd5! and White is winning (15 … Qxd5? 16 Bh6+! Nxh6 17 Qe7+ Kg8 18 Qe8++). 3. 9 … dxe4 10 dxe4 0-0 (if 10 … Qd6, then 11 Bb3 is strong) 11 Bb3 Bd6 12 Qh5 and White is clearly better. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the best move in the game. 10 Qh5+ White takes advantage of the weakened “h5-e8” diagonal by bringing his Queen to an active post and forcing Black to lose the ability to castle. 10 … Kf8 This is the safest way to get the King out of check. Trying to avoid moving

the King with 10 … g6 loses a Pawn and leaves Black’s King still exposed to attack after 11 fxg6 Nxg6 12 exd5. 11 Kh1 White removes his King from the same diagonal (“g1-a7”) as Black’s Bishop. The idea is to allow White to attack Black’s Pawn on “d4” by placing a Pawn on “c3”. However, simple development with 11 Nd2 is stronger. 11 … Bd7 Black completes his minor piece development and plans to maneuver this Bishop to defend on the kingside and drive White’s Queen away from her active post on “h5”. Another reasonable plan for Black is to expand on the queenside with 11 … a5 12 c3 b5, though White still has a substantial advantage after 13 Bd1 planning to reposition his Bishop on “f3”.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdw1wiw4} {0pdbhw0p} {wdpdw0wd} {dwgpdPdQ} {Bdw0Pdwd} {dwdPdwdw} {P)PdWdP)} {$NGwdRdK} vllllllllV


Robert M. Snyder

12 c3 White follows through with his plan of applying pressure in the center. It would also be good to continue developing with 12 Nd2. 12 … Be8 Black uses his Bishop to drive White’s Queen away from her active post on “h5” while maneuvering it to a better defensive location on the kingside. 13 Qh4 White gets his Queen out of attack, keeps her actively posted on the kingside and covers the center. From “h4” the Queen applies pressure to Black’s “h” Pawn and the Pawn on “f6” plus she adds protection to the “e” Pawn. A good alternative was 13 Qf3 where the Queen would be actively posted and exert pressure on “d5”. 13 … dxe4 Black eliminates his doubled Pawns and opens the “g8-a2” diagonal for use by his Bishop. 14 dxe4 White recovers his Pawn.

67

14 … Qb6

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdbiw4} {0pdwhw0p} {w1pdw0wd} {dwgwdPdw} {Bdw0Pdw!} {dw)wdwdw} {P)wdWdP)} {$NGwdRdK} vllllllllV

Diagram 69. Position after 14 … Qb6.

Black seeks counter-play on the queenside. He threatens to fork White’s Rook and Bishop with 15 … Qa6, ties White’s Bishop on c1 to the defense of his “b” Pawn, and gives more mobility to the Rook on “a8”. The drawback to this plan is that Black’s Queen is further removed from defense of the kingside. It would be more accurate for Black to delay committing his Queen and continue maneuvering his Bishop to a more active location with 14 … Bf7. 15 Bb3 White removes his Bishop from its unprotected location on “a4” and places it on the open “a2-g8” diagonal. White is now threatening 16 Qxf6+! gxf6 17 Bh6++.

68


15 … Bf7

16 … dxc3

Black brings his Bishop into play challenging White’s active Bishop on the “h2-g8” diagonal. This is also in keeping with the general rule of making even exchanges when you are being attacked or have a cramped position. White has a significant positional advantage even though Black has all of his minor pieces developed and White only has one minor piece developed. Black’s difficulty is in coordinating the effective use of his pieces: Black’s King is in an awkward position after losing the ability to castle and being stuck in the center. Black’s Queen is not in a good position to assist against White’s kingside attack because she is out of play on the kingside. Black’s Rook at “h8” is trapped and unable to connect with the other pieces for defense.

Black opens the “a7-g1” diagonal where his Queen and Bishop are concentrated and isolates White’s queenside Pawns.

16 Nd2 White continues with a natural development of his Knight. However, stronger is to immediately go for the attack with 16 e5. After 16 e5 the game might continue 16 … Nd5 (16 … fxe5 17 f6, or 16 … Bxb3 16 exf6 busts Black wide open in either case) 17 e6 Be8 18 Bh6! (threatening 19 Bxd5 with the plan to meet 19 … cxd5 with 20 Qxf6+) Kg8 19 cxd4 Bxd4 20 Nc3 and Black is in sad shape.

17 bxc3 White recovers his Pawn. 17 … Qa6?

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdwiw4} {0pdwhb0p} {qdpdw0wd} {dwgwdPdw} {wdwdPdw!} {dB)wdwdw} {PdwHWdP)} {$wGwdRdK} vllllllllV

Diagram 70. Position after 17 … Qa6.

Black pins White’s “a” Pawn, attacks White’s Rook on “f1”, and threatens to win material with 18 … Bxb3. However, this gives White the opportunity to easily defend against this simple threat and leave Black’s Queen terribly out of play. Instead, Black should prevent White from moving his Pawn to “e5” by repositioning his Bishop with 17 … Bd6. The game might continue 18 Bxf7 Kxf7 19 Nc4 Qc7 20 Qh5+ Kf8 21 Be3 with a substantial positional advantage for White.

Robert M. Snyder

69

18 Re1?

20 Qh5+

White meets Black’s threat of playing 18 … Bxb3 by removing his Rook from attack by White’s Queen. However, White missed a quick win with 18 e5!, because of the continuation 18 … Bxb3 (or if 18 … Nd5, then 19 c4 Ne3 20 exf6 Rg8 21 Ne4 Nxf1 22 Nxc5 Qa5 23 Qd4! Qd8 24 Qe4 and its curtains!) 19 exf6 Rg8 20 axb3! Qxa1 21 Ne4 Qa2 22 fxe7+ Bxe7 23 Bg5 Bxg5 24 Nxg5 with a crushing attack.

White’s Queen now comes back to the active attacking post on “h5” and takes advantage of Black’s white square weaknesses. This move also drives Black’s King back to “f8” where he cuts off communication between his Rooks.

18 … Re8 Black attempts to defend on the kingside by bringing his Rook into play on the “e” file. However, Black’s more serious problem is that his Queen is far removed from helping on the kingside. Therefore, it would have been prudent to get the Queen back into play with 18 … Qd3. After 18 … Qd3 the game might continue 19 Nf3 Bxb3 20 axb3 Qxc3 21 Bd2 Qxb3 22 Rab1 Qf7 23 Rxb7 and White still has a clear advantage. 19 Bxf7 White removes one of Black’s important kingside defenders leaving him weakened on the White squares. 19 … Kxf7 Black recovers the Bishop.

20 … Kf8 Black gets his King out of attack while defending his Rook on “e8”. Not 20 … g6??, because of 21 fxg6+ hxg6 22 Qxc5.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdriw4} {0pdwhw0p} {qdpdw0wd} {dwgwdPdQ} {wdwdPdwd} {dw)wdwdw} {PdwHWdP)} {$wGw$wdK} vllllllllV

Diagram 71. Position after 20 … Kf8.

21 Nb3 White attacks Black’s Bishop on “c5” and opens the “c1-h6” diagonal for his Bishop. Once again, commencing an immediate attack with the “e” Pawn is stronger. After 21 e5, White has attacking plans whether Black captures or not:

70


1. 21 … Nd5 22 e6 Re7 23 Ne4 Qc4 24 Nxc5 Qxc5 25 c4! Nc7 (or if 25 … Qxc4, then 26 Ba3) 26 a4 threatening 27 Ba3. 2. 21 … fxe5 22 f6 Ng6 (if 22 … gxf6, then 23 Ne4) 23 Ne4 Qc4 24 fxg7+ Kxf7 25 Bh6+ Kg8 26 Nf6+ Kf7 27 Rf1 and the end is near for Black. 21 … Qc4 Black defends his Bishop and begins to get his Queen back into play. 22 Bf4 White develops his Bishop to the “h3b8” diagonal and connects his Rooks on the first rank. 22 … Ba3? Black shouldn’t remove his Bishop from the important “a7-g1” diagonal, which would keep White’s Knight out of “d4”. Better is 22 … Bb6, though after 23 Rad1 White retains a nice advantage. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

23 Nd4

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdriw4} {0pdwhw0p} {wdpdw0wd} {dwdwdPdQ} {wdqHPGwd} {gw)wdwdw} {PdwdWdP)} {$wdw$wdK} vllllllllV Diagram 72. Position after 23 Nd4.

White’s Knight joins in on the attack against Black’s King threatening 24 Ne6+. 23 … Qf7 Ah! Finally, Black’s Queen comes to the kingside in an attempt to rescue the situation. But, at this point Black only delays the inevitable. If Black plays 23 … g6, then White would continue with 24 fxg6 Nxg6 25 Nf5! planning to meet 25 … Nxf4 with 26 Qh6+ Kf7 27 Qxf4 and Black has a lost position. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 24 Ne6+ White’s Knight sinks into its killer outpost and continues the assault against Black’s King.

Robert M. Snyder

24 … Kg8

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdrdk4} {0pdwhq0p} {wdpdN0wd} {dwdwdPdQ} {wdwdPGwd} {gw)wdwdw} {PdwdWdP)} {$wdw$wdK} vllllllllV

Diagram 73. Position after 24 … Kg8.

Black gets his King out of attack in this forced situation. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game 25 Qd1! This is an awesome repositioning move! White avoids the Queen exchange and threatens to win Black’s Bishop with 26 Qb3. 25 … Ng6 Black attempts to complicate matters and gain some breathing space. Other tries also fail: 1. If 25 … Nc8, then 26 Nd8 planning to meet 26 … Qc4 with 27 Qd7. 2. If 25 … b6, then 26 Nd8 Qc4 (26 … Qf8? 27 Qb3+) 27 Qd7 Kf8 28 Rad1 with the idea of cracking

71

Black open with 29 e5 and Black is dying. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 26 Nd8

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwHrdk4} {0pdwdq0p} {wdpdw0nd} {dwdwdPdw} {wdwdPGwd} {gw)wdwdw} {PdwdWdP)} {$wdQ$wdK} vllllllllV Diagram 74. Position after 26 Nd8.

This move attacks Black’s Queen and leaves Black’s Knight under attack on “g6”. Black has no defense and resigned here: 1. If 26 … Qc4, then simply 27 fxg6. 2. If 26 … Qe7, then Black is losing badly after 27 Qb3+ Kf8 28 Ne6+ Kg8 29 Nc7+ Kf8 30 fxg6.

LESSON 9

person. Many people jokingly called him the ‘strongest chess player in the world.’ In spite of his loss to Tarrasch in this game he ended up placing fourth in the Dresden tournament.

A Deep Opening Trap Tarrasch vs. Marco Dresden, 1892 Opening: Ruy Lopez

1 e4 e5 2 Nf3 Nc6 3 Bb5 d6

Black uses the Steinitz Variation of the Ruy Lopez, an opening that commits Black to a cramped position. For this reason it is rarely seen at the Master level today. This game is a good example of how White’s Bishop on “b5” indirectly applies pressure to Black’s Pawn on “e5”. Black falls into a deep opening trap after making what appears to be a perfectly normal and safe move. Little did Black dream that castling would result in the loss of material. Siegbert Tarrasch (1862-1934), was a dedicated medical doctor who was also a very successful tournament player, a challenger for the world championship and the author of the famous books The Game of Chess and Three Hundred Games of Chess. His quote, “the threat is stronger than the execution” is often true in practice. However, in this game the opposite is true. By underestimating and not reacting to White’s threat on “e5” the execution of the threat wins. Georg Marco (1863-1923), an Austrian Master, was a large and very muscular

Known as the Steinitz Variation, Black subjects him self to a cramped position from the start by restricting his Bishop on “f8”. This move adds protection to Black’s Pawn on “e5” and frees his Bishop on the “c8-h3” diagonal. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kgn4} {0p0wdp0p} {wdn0wdwd} {dBdw0wdw} {wdwdPdwd} {dwdwdNdw} {P)P)W)P)} {$NGQIwdR} vllllllllV Diagram 75. Position after 3 … d6.

4 d4 Against passive play, and when given the opportunity, take command of the center! White frees his Bishop on the “c1-h6” diagonal, allows his Queen to exert pressure along the “d” file and threatens Black’s “e” Pawn.

-72-

Robert M. Snyder

73

4 … Bd7

5 … Nf6

Black develops his Bishop while at the same time defending and breaking the pin on his Knight at “c6”. If Black tries 4 … exd4, then White gets a good game with either: 1. 5 Nxd4 Bd7 6 Nc3 transposing into main lines, or 2. 5 Qxd4 Bd7 (or if 5 … Nge7, then 6 Bg5 a6 7 Bxc6+ Nxc6 8 Qd2 Be7 9 Nc3 Bxg5 10 Nxg5 0-0 11 0-00) 6 Bxc6 Bxc6 7 Nc3 Nf6 8 Bg5 Be7 9 0-0-0 0-0 10 Rhe1 Re8 11 Kb1.

Black continues with his minor piece development and attacks White’s unprotected “e” Pawn.

5 0-0 White removes his King from the center and activates his kingside Rook. An excellent alternative is the straightforward developing move 5 Nc3, which might continue 5 … exd4 (or if 5 … Nf6, then 6 Bxc6 Bxc6 7 Qd3 exd4 8 Nxd4 Bd7 9 Bg5 Be7 10 0-0-0) 6 Nxd4 g6 (or if 6 … Nf6, then 7 0-0 Be7 8 Bxc6 bxc6 9 Qf3 0-0 10 Re1 Re8 11 Bg5) 7 Be3 Bg7 8 Qd2 Nf6 9 Bxc6 bxc6 10 Bh6 and now: 1. If 10 … 0-0, then 11 Bxg7 Kxg7 12 0-0-0 Re8 13 f3 Rb8 14 g4. 2. If 10 … Bxh6, then 11 Qxh6 Ng4 12 Qd2 Qh4 13 g3 Qh3 14 f3 0-0 15 0-0-0 and White stands better in both variations.

6 Nc3

cuuuuuuuuC {rdw1kgw4} {0p0bdp0p} {wdn0whwd} {dBdw0wdw} {wdw)Pdwd} {dwHwdNdw} {P)PdW)P)} {$wGQdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 76. Position after 6 Nc3.

White also continues with this minor piece development and defends his “e” Pawn. A very attempting approach may be to drive back Black’s Knight with 5 d5. This would certainly give White a nice spatial advantage. However, after 5 d5 Ne7 it is difficult to take advantage of it. The problem is that the position becomes closed. As a general rule: When you already have an advantage in space, releasing pressure on the opponent and closing off lines makes it more difficult to exploit your advantage. 6 … Be7 Black continues with his minor piece development and prepares to castle.

74


7 Re1

8 Bxc6

White brings his Rook to the center file and reinforces his “e” Pawn. This is a safe and sound idea in many variations of the Ruy Lopez.

This is the beginning of a long combination that wins at least a Pawn. White removes an important defender of Black’s Pawn on “e5”.

7 … 0-0?

8 … Bxc6

cuuuuuuuuC {rdw1w4kd} {0p0bgp0p} {wdn0whwd} {dBdw0wdw} {wdw)Pdwd} {dwHwdNdw} {P)PdW)P)} {$wGQ$wIw} vllllllllV


Black gets his King into safety, but neglects responding to White’s pressure on his “e” Pawn. It would be better for Black to release the tension on his “e” Pawn with 7 … exd4 8 Nxd4 0-0, transposing into the analysis to White’s fifth move. The move Marco plays falls into the famous Dresden Trap (also known as the Tarrasch Trap). Of course, the trap got its name from this game. Tarrasch prepared the analysis in advance and waited for someone to get this position so he could spring it on them. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

Black recovers his piece, brings his Bishop into play, and attacks White’s Pawn on “e4”. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 9 dxe5 White captures and wins Black’s “e” Pawn. 9 … dxe5

cuuuuuuuuC {rdw1w4kd} {0p0wgp0p} {wdbdwhwd} {dwdw0wdw} {wdwdPdwd} {dwHwdNdw} {P)PdW)P)} {$wGQ$wIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 78. Position after 9 … dxe5.

Black removes the threat on his Knight and attempts to avoid the loss of a Pawn by capturing White’s “e” Pawn. See if you can find White’s best move

Robert M. Snyder

75

here without looking at the next move in the game.

concede the loss of a Pawn and retreat his Bishop with 11 … Bd7.

10 Qxd8

12 Nxe4

White initiates the Queen exchange to avoid allowing Black to make the exchange; this would require White to recapture and remove a piece from the defense of his “e” Pawn. It would be a mistake to immediately capture Black’s “e” Pawn with 10 Nxe5 because of 10 … Qxd1 11 Rxd1 Bxe4 12 Nxe4 Nxe4 13 Re1 Nd6 and Black has avoided the loss of a Pawn with an almost equal position.

White continues with his planned combination, which will result in the win of at least the exchange (where a Knight or Bishop is exchanged for a Rook). With this move White anticipates Black’s recapture. It results in a Black’s Knight and Bishop being lined up on “e” file. They will then become targets for White’s Rook on “e1”. 12 … Nxe4

10 … Raxd8 Black recovers his Queen and brings his Rook onto the open “d” file. It will become apparent as to why recapturing with the queenside Rook and keeping the other Rook on the “f ” file is best, but only when we get to move 15! 11 Nxe5 White wins Black’s “e” Pawn and threatens to double and isolate Black’s Pawns with 12 Nxc6. 11 … Bxe4? Black is under the illusion that he can recover his Pawn. Black’s attempt to avoid losing a Pawn will result in the loss of even more material. Black should

cuuuuuuuuC {wdw4w4kd} {0p0wgp0p} {wdwdwdwd} {dwdwHwdw} {wdwdndwd} {dwdwdwdw} {P)PdW)P)} {$wGw$wIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 79. Position after 12 … Nxe4.

Black recovers his piece. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 13 Nd3! This is the key move behind the trap! White blocks Black’s Rook on the “d”

76


file and now White’s Rook is free to have a meal along the “e” file where Black’s unprotected Knight and Bishop reside. Capturing White’s Knight immediately with 13 Rxe4?? would have resulted in a back rank mate after 13 … Rd1+ 14 Re1 Rxe1++. 13 … f5 Black defends his Knight on “e4”. It was threatened by White’s Rook. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 14 f3 White attacks Black’s Knight and it cannot move because of Black’s Bishop being unprotected on “e7”. 14 … Bc5+ Black removes his Bishop from the “e” file. At a glance, this counter-attack may appear to save the day for Black. However, a deeper look will reveal that White has a series of moves with the final moves being a Bishop fork combined with a Pawn attack that wins the exchange. Perhaps the lesser of the evils would be to obtain two Pawns for a Knight with 14 … Bh4 15 g3 Nxg3 16 hxg3 Bxg3. But, Black would have immediately sentenced himself to slower death.


cuuuuuuuuC {wdw4w4kd} {0p0wdw0p} {wdwdwdwd} {dwgwdpdw} {wdwdndwd} {dwdNdPdw} {P)PdWdP)} {$wGw$wIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 80. Position after 14 … Bc5.

15 Nxc5 After Black recaptures, his Knight on “c5” and Rook on “f8” will be set up for a nice fork. This brings us back to Black’s 10th move where he had a choice of which Rook to use for the recapture. Note that if White now played 15 Kf1, then Black could play 15 … Bb6 planning to meet 16 fxe4 with 16 … fxe4+ (ah!—the purpose of having the Rook on the “f ” file becomes clear) 17 Nf4 e3 18 g3 g5 and Black recovers his piece and lives! 15 … Nxc5 Black recovers his piece. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

Robert M. Snyder

16 Bg5

cuuuuuuuuC {wdw4w4kd} {0p0wdw0p} {wdwdwdwd} {dwhwdpGw} {wdwdwdwd} {dwdwdPdw} {P)PdWdP)} {$wdw$wIw} vllllllllV Diagram 81. Position after 16 Bg5.

White’s Bishop springs into action; it attacks Black’s Rook on “d8”, and it threatens to fork Black’s Rook on “f8” and the Knight by 17 … Be7. 16 … Rd5 Black gets his Rook out of attack and defends his Knight. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 17 Be7 White attacks Black’s Rook on “f8” and Knight on “c5”. The proper order of moves is important. If White first tries to keep Black’s Rook away from the defense of his Knight with 17 c4, then Black is left with some resources after 17 … Rd4 planning to meet 18 Be7 with 18 … Nd3.

77

17 … Re8 Black gets his Rook out of attack. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 18 c4

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdrdkd} {0p0wGw0p} {wdwdwdwd} {dwhrdpdw} {wdPdwdwd} {dwdwdPdw} {P)wdWdP)} {$wdw$wIw} vllllllllV Diagram 82. Position after 18 c4.

White threatens Black’s Rook, which is the only defender of Black’s Knight on “c5”. This results in the win of the exchange. At the master level, especially in the endgame, this is a lost position. Black resigned here. If Black played on, his best move would be 18 … Kf7. This is met by 19 cxd5 Rxe7 20 Rac1.

LESSON 10

This is Black’s most common move here. Black attacks White’s Bishop and forces it to either capture on “c6” or retreat.

Surprise Diagonals Jasper Rom vs. Robert Snyder July, 2001 Opening: Ruy Lopez

4 Bxc6

Black’s Bishops come into play with devastating effect on two occasions. Often the most natural and common development of a Bishop is best. However, Black’s apparently dormant Bishop suddenly springs to life on an unsuspected diagonal and forces the win of the exchange. This game also shows how to take advantage of a misplaced Rook in the opening. A careful study of the analysis in this game will reveal a couple of excellent ways to handle the “Exchange” Variation of the Ruy Lopez. 1 e4 e5 2 Nf3 Nc6 3 Bb5 a6

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kgn4} {dp0pdp0p} {pdndwdwd} {dBdw0wdw} {wdwdPdwd} {dwdwdNdw} {P)P)W)P)} {$NGQIwdR} vllllllllV Diagram 83. Position after 3 … a6.

White initiates the “Exchange Variation.” White exchanges his Bishop for Black’s Knight and doubles Black’s Pawns. In return for having doubled Pawns, Black has the Bishop pair. White’s most common move, 4 Ba4 will be examined in LESSONS ELEVEN & TWELVE and is covered in LESSONS TEN, ELEVEN & TWELVE in Unbeatable Chess Lessons. 4 … dxc6 Black recovers his piece. Usually it is best to capture toward the center, but here it is more important for Black to free his Queen on the “d” file and Bishop on the “c8-h3” diagonal. If Black captures toward the center with 4 … bxc6, White is clearly better after 5 Nc3 d6 6 d4 f6 (or if 6 … exd4, then 7 Nxd4 Bd7 8 0-0 Nf6 9 Qf3) 7 Be3 Ne7 8 0-0 Ng6 9 Qd3. 5 0-0 White gets his King out of the center and activates his Rook. This move is considered best by theory and threatens 6 Nxe5.

-78-

Robert M. Snyder

We will now examine some other possible moves for White: 1. 5 Nxe5 is weak because of 5 … Qd4 6 Nf3 Qxe4+ 7 Qe2 Qxe2+ 8 Kxe2. 2. 5 d4 exd4 6 Qxd4 (if 6 Nxd4?, then 6 … c5 followed by exchanging Queens after White’s Knight moves) Qxd4 7 Nxd4 Bd7 8 Be3 0-0-0 9 Nd2 (or if 9 Nc3, then 9 … Re8 10 0-0-0 Bb4 11 Nde2 f5 12 exf5 Bxf5 13 a3 Bd6 with about even chances) Ne7 10 0-0-0 Ng6 with an even game. 3. 5 Nc3 f6 6 d4 exd4 7 Nxd4 (or if 7 Qxd4, then 7 … Qxd4 8 Nxd4 c5 9 Nde2 Be6 10 Nf4 Bf7 11 Nfd5 0-0-0 12 Bf4 Ne7! planning to meet 13 Nxc7 with 13 … g5 14 Bg3 f5 15 Be5 Rg8, and 13 0-0-0 with 13 … Nxd5 14 Nxd5 Bxd5 15 Rxd5 Rxd5 16 exd5 c4 with a fairly even endgame) c5 8 Nde2 Qxd1+ 9 Nxd1 Be6 10 Bf4 0-00 11 Ne3 Ne7 12 Rd1 Rxd1+ 13 Kxd1 g5 14 Bg3 Bg7 with an even game.

79

5 … Qd6

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdkgn4} {dp0wdp0p} {pdp1wdwd} {dwdw0wdw} {wdwdPdwd} {dwdwdNdw} {P)P)W)P)} {$NGQdRIw} vllllllllV


Black defends his “e” Pawn with his Queen. This also begins to clear the way for the possibility of Black castling on the queenside. From “d6” the Queen has the ability to quickly reposition herself on the kingside. Another interesting line that I like to show to my students begins with 5 … Bg4. Black uses a pin to take care of the threat on his “e” Pawn. This leads to some very instructive tactics. After 5 … Bg4, the line continues 6 h3 h5 (weak is 6 … Bxf3 because after 7 Qxf3 Black still has his doubled Pawns but no longer has the Bishop pair as compensation) 7 d3 (not 7 hxg4? because of 7 … hxg4 planning to meet 8 Nxe5? with 8 … Qh4 9 f4 g3 and White cannot prevent mate—after 7 d3 White is threatening 8 hxg4 hxg4 9 Ng5) Qf6 8 Nbd2 (again not 8 hxg4? because of 8 … hxg4 9

80


Ng5 Qh6, and not 8 Bg5?? because 8 … Bxf3 wins a piece) Ne7 9 Re1 Ng6 10 d4 (if 10 hxg4, then 10 … hxg4 11 Nh2 Bc5!) Bd6 11 hxg4 hxg4 12 Nh2 Rxh2 13 Qxg4, If White tries 13 Kxh2, Black plays 13 … Qxf2 threatening 14 … Ke7 followed by 15 … Rh8++. So, after 13 Kxh2 Qxf2 we have the following interesting possibilities: • 14 Re2 exd4+ 15 e5 Bxe5+ 16 Kh1 Qh4+ 17 Kg1 0-0-0. • 14 Qe2 exd4+ 15 e5 Bxe5+ 16 Kh1 Qh4+ 17 Kg1 Qh2+ 18 Kf1 Qh1+ 19 Kf2 g3+ 20 Kf3 Qh5+ 21 Ke4 f5+ 22 Kd3 Nf4+. Rh4 14 Qf5 Rf4! 15 Qxf6 Rxf6 16 Nf3 Re6 and Black’s active pieces provide compensation for his doubled Pawns. 6 d3 White frees his Bishop on the “c1-h6” diagonal, gives his Knight the option of going to “d2” and defends his “e” Pawn. We will now take a look at other possible lines: 1. 6 c3 Bg4 is covered in LESSON NINE in Unbeatable Chess Lessons. 2. 6 d4. Black ends up with a comfortable game after 6 … exd4 7 Nxd4 Bd7 8 Be3 (or if 8 Nc3, then 8 … 0-0-0 9 Be3 Qg6 10 Qe2 Nh6 11 Rad1 Bd6 12 f3 Rhe8) 00-0 9 Nd2 Nh6 10 f3 f5.

And if 6 … exd4 7 Qxd4, then 7 … Bg4 planning to meet: • 8 Be3 with 8 … Bxf3 9 Qxd6 cxd6 10 gxf3 Ne7 11 Nc3 Ng6. • 8 Qe3 with 8 … Ne7 9 Nbd2 Ng6 10 h3 Bd7 11 Nc4 Qc5 12 Qxc5 Bxc5 13 Be3 Be7. 3. 6 Na3 b5 7 c3 c5 8 Nc2 Ne7 9 d4 (or if 9 a4, then 9 … b4 10 Ne3 Nc6) cxd4 10 cxd4 exd4 11 Nfxd4 c5 12 Nb3 Qxd1 13 Rxd1 Nc6 14 Be3 c4 15 Nc5 f5 is approximately even.

6 … f6 Black reinforces his “e” Pawn and prevents White from moving his Knight to “g5” to attack Black’s Bishop if it develops to “e6”. This also allows for support of the advance of Black’s “g” Pawn if Black wants to execute a Pawn storm after castling queenside. A stronger alternative for Black is to immediately develop with 6 … Ne7, which has two main lines: 1. 7 Be3 Ng6 8 Nbd2 Be7 9 d4 (if 9 Qe2, then 9 … 0-0 10 Nc4 Qe6 is equal) exd4 10 Nxd4 (if 10 Nc4, then 10 … Qb4 11 Qxd4 c5 12 Qd3 Be6 13 b3 0-0 and Black stands slightly better) Ne5 11 h3 c5 12 N4b3 (or 12 Ne2 0-0 with an even game) b6 13 f4 Nc6 with approximate equality.

Robert M. Snyder

2. 7 Nbd2 Ng6 8 Nc4 Qf6 9 d4 (or if 9 Bg5, then 9 … Qe6 10 Bd2 Bc5 and now either 11 Be3 or 11 b4 allows 11 … Be7 with an equal game) exd4 10 Bg5 Qe6 11 Qxd4 f6 12 Rad1 Be7 13 Be3 0-0 with an even game. 7 Be3 White develops his Bishop to its most active and available post. Developing the Knight by 7 Nbd2 is not as strong for White. After 7 Nbd2 the game might continue 7 … Be6 8 Nc4 Qd7 9 Be3 Ne7 10 Qe2 Ng6 11 Rfd1 (if 11 d4, then 11 … Bg4 planning to meet 12 dxe5 with 12 … Nh4 threatening 13 … Bxf3 14 gxf3 Qh3 with mate to follow on “g2”) Bf7 12 h3 Be7 13 d4 Qe6 14 Ncd2 0-0 with an even game. 7 … c5

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdkgn4} {dp0wdw0p} {pdw1w0wd} {dw0w0wdw} {wdwdPdwd} {dwdPGNdw} {P)PdW)P)} {$NdQdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 85. Position after 7 … c5.

Black increases his foothold on the important “d4” square and opens

81

“c6” for possible use by his Knight. Aggressive development by 7 … Bg4 (to pin White’s Knight on “f3”) favors White. After 7 … Bg4 the game might continue 8 h3 Bh5 (or if 8 … Be6, then 9 d4 0-0-0 10 Nbd2 Ne7 11 dxe5 fxe5 12 Qe2 Ng6 13 Rfd1) 9 Qe2 0-0-0 10 Nbd2 and White’s lead in development combined with the coming queenside Pawn storm gives him the advantage. 8 a4 The logic behind this move for White is to post a Knight on “c4” and restrain Black from being able to drive the Knight away with “b5”. However, it would be better for White to continue to develop with 8 Nbd2, this might continue 8 … Be6 9 Nc4 Qc6 10 Nfd2 Ne7 11 a4 b6 (if 11 … Ng6, then 12 Na5 is strong) 12 f4 exf4 13 Bxf4 Ng6 14 Qh5 and White stands slightly better. 8 … Ne7 Black develops his Knight. From “e7” he has the option of moving toward “c6” to cover the queenside and attack the important “d4” square, or going to “g6” to attack “f4” and assist on the kingside. The fact that Black’s Bishop on “f8” is blocked is only a temporary problem.

82


9 Qe2 White’s Queen is actively posted on “e2”; this adds coverage to the “c4” square and allows the Rooks to be connected on the first rank after the Knight on “b1” is developed. A good alternative is to continue with normal development with 9 Nbd2 with the idea of going to “c4”. After 9 Nbd2 Black would do best to continue with his plan to maneuver his Knight to cover “d4” by 9 … Nc6 with an equal game. 9 … Nc6 Black brings his Knight toward the queenside where it attacks the important “d4” square. 10 c3 White attempts to keep Black’s Knight out of “d4” by attacking the square with his Pawn. However, since this weakens the Pawn on “d3” it is better to continue developing with 10 Nbd2 Be6 11 Nc4 Qd7 with an equal game.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdkgw4} {dp0wdw0p} {pdn1w0wd} {dw0w0wdw} {PdwdPdwd} {dw)PGNdw} {w)wdQ)P)} {$NdwdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 86. Position after 10 c3.

10 … Be6 Black develops his Bishop to the “g8-a2” diagonal. An even stronger alternative is to take advantage of White’s weak “d” Pawn by playing 10 … f5. After 10 … f5 Black would be clearly better after either 11 exf5 Bxf5 or 11 Na3 f4 12 Nc4 Qf6. 11 Rd1 White defends his weak “d” Pawn in anticipation of Black increasing the pressure on it along the “d” file. However, since the Rook becomes a target on “d1” it would be better to play 11 Na3 0-0-0 12 Rfd1 Bb3 13 Nc4 Qd7 14 Rd2 Be7 where Black’s advantage is minimal. See if you can find Black’s best move without looking at the next move in the game.

Robert M. Snyder

11 … Bb3 Black takes advantage of White’s white square weaknesses and the hole on “b3”. Black now attacks White’s Rook and forces it to move to an inferior square. 12 Rd2

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdkgw4} {dp0wdw0p} {pdn1w0wd} {dw0w0wdw} {PdwdPdwd} {db)PGNdw} {w)w$Q)P)} {$NdwdwIw} vllllllllV Diagram 87. Position after 12 Rd2.

White’s Rook is awkwardly placed here; it is more likely to become a target and cuts off the retreat of White’s Bishop on “e3”. Better is 12 Rc1, but after 12 … 0-0-0 Black still has the superior position. 12 … Nd4 Black’s Knight takes the strong outpost on “d4”, attacks White’s Queen and threatens to go to “c2”. This isn’t a true sacrifice since Black can immediately recover his piece. Note that this move wouldn’t have been possible if White

83

had played 12 Rc1 leaving a retreat open for his Bishop on “e3”. Also strong here for Black is 12 … Qe6 planning to meet 13 a5 with 13 … Bd6, or 13 d4 with 13 … Na5. In either case Black has a clear advantage. 13 Bxd4 White has no choice but to eliminate Black’s aggressive Knight. The other reasonable alternative, 13 cxd4, also gives Black a clear advantage. After 13 cxd4 the game might continue 13 … cxd4 14 Bxd4 exd4 15 Na3 Qd7 16 Nc2 c5 17 a5 Bd6 18 Ra3 Be6 and Black has two Bishops against two Knights. If White gets pushy here and plays 19 e5, Black can sacrifice a couple of Pawns for a nice attack after 19 … Bc7 20 exf6 0-0 21 fxg7 Rf5. 13 … cxd4 Black recovers his piece, undoubles his Pawns and opens up the “f8-a3” diagonal. Black is clearly better. He has the Bishop pair and more space. As previously mentioned White’s Rook is in an awkward position, blocks the use of the “d2” square and is a possible target.

84


14 Nh4?

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdkgw4} {dp0wdw0p} {pdw1w0wd} {dwdw0wdw} {Pdw0PdwH} {db)Pdwdw} {w)w$Q)P)} {$NdwdwIw} vllllllllV Diagram 88. Position after 14 Nh4.

White’s idea of opening up the “d1-h5” diagonal for his Queen and attacking the “f5” and “g6” squares with his Knight serves little constructive purpose. White needed to concern himself with more important matters at hand, which will be pointed out in the coming moves. It will soon become apparent that opening up the “e2” square with 14 Qe1 would be better. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 14 … g6! At first glance it may appear that the reasons for this move are to block the “h5-e8” diagonal and to prevent Black’s Knight from being able to enter “f5”. However, a second look will reveal that the real reason for this move is to free

Black’s Bishop on “f8” so that it can go to “h6”. 15 c4 White is attempting to trap Black’s Bishop on “b3” by cutting off its retreat. However, White would have stood a better chance of survival after 15 cxd4 exd4 16 Qf1 Qb4. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 15 … Qb4 This move quickly kills any ideas White has of trapping Black’s Bishop on “b3”. At “b4” Black’s Queen: 1. Attacks White’s “a” Pawn a second time. 2. Defends the Bishop on “b3”. 3. Applies pressure along the “a5-e1” diagonal. 4. Attacks White’s Rook on “d2”. 5. Has potential threats of a back rank mate on “e1”. 16 a5 White eliminates the threat on his “a” Pawn. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

Robert M. Snyder

16 … Bh6

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdkdw4} {dp0wdwdp} {pdwdw0pg} {)wdw0wdw} {w1P0PdwH} {dbdPdwdw} {w)w$Q)P)} {$NdwdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 89. Position after 16 … Bh6.

Black attacks White’s Rook and wins the exchange. White resigned here.

85

LESSON 11

1 e4 e5 2 Nf3 Nc6 3 Bb5 a6 4 Ba4

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kgn4} {dp0pdp0p} {pdndwdwd} {dwdw0wdw} {BdwdPdwd} {dwdwdNdw} {P)P)W)P)} {$NGQIwdR} vllllllllV

Surviving the Marshall Gambit Badzarani vs. Malinin Correspondence, 1991-1993 Opening: Ruy Lopez The Marshall Gambit is one of the most complicated and deeply analyzed openings. It is still seen at the Master level today and it offers Black an opportunity, at the cost of a Pawn, to have the initiative against the Ruy Lopez. White must play carefully because some of the lines are very sharp and the slightest slip can be fatal. In practice, the Marshall is not easy to handle. However, with careful play and an understanding of the critical lines of this opening, White can survive and have a small advantage. This game contains instructive tactics in both the opening and middlegame. Hang on and enjoy the ride!

Diagram 90. Position after 4 Ba4.

White gets his Bishop out of attack and maintains pressure along the “a4-e8” diagonal. It would be weak to play 4 Bc4? because, after 4 … Nf6, Black can head into similar variations of the Two Knights Defense where his extra Pawn move (“a6”) will be useful. 4 … Nf6 Black develops his Knight with an attack on White’s “e” Pawn. If Black plays 4 … d6, White comes out on top after 5 0-0 Bd7 (or if 5 … Bg4, then 6 h3 h5 7 d4 b5 8 Bb3 Nxd4 9 hxg4 hxg4 10 Ng5 Nh6 11 Bd5 c6 12 c3 cxd5 13 cxd4 Be7 14 Qd2 dxe4 15 dxe5) 6 d4 Nf6 (or if 6 … b5, then 7 Bb3 exd4 8 a4) 7 c3 Be7 (or if 7 … g6, then 8 Re1 Qe7 9 Nbd2 Bg7 10 Nf1 0-0 11 Ng3) 8 Re1 0-0 9 Nbd2 Re8 10 h3 Bf8 11 a3 g6 12 Bb3 Bg7 13 Ba2.

-86-

Robert M. Snyder

87

5 0-0

6 … b5

White removes his King from the center and activates his Rook. Less common variations are: 1. 5 Bxc6 dxc6 6 d3 Bd6 7 Nbd2 Be6. 2. 5 d4 exd4 6 0-0 Be7 7 e5 (or if 7 Re1, then 7 … 0-0 8 e5 Ne8) Ne4 8 Nxd4 Nxd4 9 Qxd4 Nc5. 3. 5 Nc3 b5 6 Bb3 Be7.

Black defends against White’s threat to capture his Knight on “c6” by driving away White’s Bishop.

5 … Be7 Black develops his Bishop and shields his King on the “e” file. The “Open Variation” with 5 … Nxe4 is covered in LESSON TEN in Unbeatable Chess Lessons. 6 Re1 White uses his Rook to defend his “e” Pawn and to keep open the option of gaining a nice Pawn center by moving his Pawns to “c3” followed by “d4”. White now threatens to win a Pawn with 7 Bxc6 followed by 8 Nxe5. Some less common variations are: 1. 6 Bxc6 dxc6 7 d3 Nd7 8 Nbd2 0-0 9 Nc4 f6. 2. 6 Qe2 b5 7 Bb3 0-0 8 c3 and now Black has the choice of offering a gambit with 8 … d5, or being more conservative and playing 8 … d6.

7 Bb3

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kdw4} {dw0pgp0p} {pdndwhwd} {dpdw0wdw} {wdwdPdwd} {dBdwdNdw} {P)P)W)P)} {$NGQ$wIw} vllllllllV Diagram 91. Position after 7 Bb3.

White gets his Bishop out of attack. 7 … 0-0 Black removes his King from the center and keeps open the option of where he will place his “d” Pawn. The alternative—7 … d6 (which frequently transposes into 7 … 0-0) will be covered in LESSON TWELVE and is covered in LESSONS ELEVEN and TWELVE in Unbeatable Chess Lesson. 8 c3 White opens a retreat for his Bishop on “c2” and prepares to support the placement of a Pawn on “d4”. If White played 8 a4 (threatening 9 axb5), Black

88


achieves easy equality after 8 … Bb7 9 d3 d6 10 Nc3 Na5 11 Ba2 b4 12 Ne2 c5. 8 … d5 Black initiates the “Marshall Gambit” (also called the “Marshall Attack”). Here 8 … d6, mentioned on Black’s last move, would transpose into main Ruy Lopez lines. A frequently repeated story is that the famous American Champion Frank Marshall spent years preparing to use this new move against the soon to be World Champion Jose Capablanca. Marshall finally got his chance to play it against Capablanca in 1918 at New York’s Manhattan Chess Club’s Master Tournament. Unfortunately for Marshall, after all that preparation, he lost. Black aggressively attacks in the center with 8 … d5, threatens White’s “e” Pawn and frees his Bishop on the “c8h3” diagonal. Black is willing to sacrifice a Pawn to obtain lasting pressure and attacking chances on the kingside. 9 exd5 White removes the threat on his “e” Pawn by exchanging it for Black’s “d” Pawn and threatens Black’s Knight on “c6”. This also opens up White’s Rook on the “e” file and attacks Black’s “e” Pawn a second time. White’s only hope

to obtain an advantage is to accept Black’s gambit. Passive defense of the “e” Pawn by 9 d3 gives Black a comfortable game after 9 … dxe4 10 dxe4 Qxd1 11 Bxd1 Bb7 12 Nbd2 Rfd8. White also fails to get an advantage with an aggressive attack in the center by 9 d4. After 9 … exd4 10 exd5 (if 10 e5, then 10 … Ne4 11 Nxd4 Nxe5 12 f3 c5 13 fxe4 cxd4 and now either 14 exd5 Bd6 15 Bf4 Re8, or 14 Bxd5 dxc3 planning to meet 15 Bxa8 with 15 … Bc5+ 16 Kh1 Nd3 17 Qe2 Bg4 18 Qf1 cxb2 19 Bxb2 Nf2+ 20 Kg1 Nxe4+ 21 Kh1 Ng3+ 22 hxg3 Qg5) Nxd5 11 cxd4 Bg4 12 h3 Bh5 13 Nc3 Nb6 Black has an even game.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1w4kd} {dw0wgp0p} {pdndwhwd} {dpdP0wdw} {wdwdwdwd} {dB)wdNdw} {P)w)W)P)} {$NGQ$wIw} vllllllllV Diagram 92. Position after 9 exd5.

9 … Nxd5 Black recovers his Pawn and posts his Knight actively in the center. White gets a clear advantage after 9 … e4 10 dxc6 exf3 11 d4 fxg2 12 Qf3.

Robert M. Snyder

89

10 Nxe5

11 … c6

White accepts the gambit Pawn and threatens Black’s Knight on “c6”. White has to take the Pawn now or the opportunity disappears and Black gets a comfortable game.

This is the most constructive way of taking care of White’s threat on the Knight. Black defends his Knight with a second piece thereby maintaining it at the active post on “d5”. Other moves are inferior: 1. 11 … Nf6 (the Knight intends to maneuver to the strong attacking post on “g4”) 12 d4 Bd6 13 Re1 Ng4 14 h3 Qh4 15 Qf3 Nxf2 (objectively best is 15 … h5, though White has a clear advantage after 16 Re2) 16 Bd2 (weaker is 16 Qxf2 because of 16 … Bh2+ 17 Kf1 Bg3, but not 16 … Bg3?? 17 Qxf7+!) Bb7 17 Qxb7 Nd3 18 Re2 Qg3 19 Kf1 Qh2 (if 19 … Nf4, then 20 Re3! Qh2 21 Qc6!) 20 g4 Qxh3+ 21 Qg2 and White is winning. 2. 11 … Bb7 (Black’s Bishop actually offers greater tactical possibilities on the “c8-h3” diagonal) 12 d4 Qd7 13 Nd2 Nf4 14 Ne4 Ng6 15 Nc5 Bxc5 16 Rxc5 Rae8 17 Bd2 and Black has little to show for White’s extra Pawn and Bishop pair. 3. 11 … Nb6 (moving the Knight further away from the kingside is not in keeping with Black’s idea of a kingside attack and makes White’s job of defense on the

10 … Nxe5 Black takes care of the threat on his Knight by exchanging it and drawing White’s Rook out to the middle of the board where it will be a target. Threats against White’s Rook on “e5” will give Black an extra tempo and thereby gain time to obtain attacking chances on the kingside. 11 Rxe5

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1w4kd} {dw0wgp0p} {pdwdwdwd} {dpdn$wdw} {wdwdwdwd} {dB)wdwdw} {P)w)W)P)} {$NGQdwIw} vllllllllV Diagram 93. Position after 11 Rxe5.

White recovers his Knight and threatens Black’s Knight. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

90


kingside easier) 12 d4 Bd6 13 Bg5 Qd7 14 Re1 Bb7 15 Nd2 Rae8 16 Be3 Nd5 17 Qh5. Black doesn’t have enough compensation for his sacrificed Pawn. 4. 11 … Nf4 (an overaggressive attempt to use the Knight to attack on the Kingside results in Black obtaining no attacking chances at all for his sacrificed Pawn) 12 d4 Ng6 13 Rh5 Bb7 14 Qg4. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 12 d4 This is certainly White’s most natural move. White frees his Bishop on “c1”, opens up “d2” for use by his Knight and occupies the center with a Pawn. 12 … Bd6 Black attacks White’s Rook and repositions his Bishop on the more active “b8-h2” diagonal. Black’s two Bishops are aiming at the Kingside to assist Black’s Queen with an assault on White’s King. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

13 Re1

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1w4kd} {dwdwdp0p} {pdpgwdwd} {dpdndwdw} {wdw)wdwd} {dB)wdwdw} {P)wdW)P)} {$NGQ$wIw} vllllllllV Diagram 94. Position after 13 Re1.

White gets his Rook out of attack. On “e1” the Rook retains its use along the “e” file, but it is no longer a target for Black’s minor pieces. 13 … Qh4 The assault begins! Black brings his Queen to the attack on the kingside and threatens White’s “h” Pawn. White must play very precisely over the next several moves to avoid giving Black the advantage. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 14 g3 White blocks Black’s Bishop from its attack on the “h” Pawn while attacking Black’s Queen. This weakens the white squares in front of White’s King, but is the lesser evil.

Robert M. Snyder

If White plays 14 h3?, Black has a nice Bishop sacrifice with 14 … Bxh3; the game might continue 15 gxh3 (if 15 Bxd5, then 15 … cxd5 16 f4 Rae8 with an attack worth more than the sacrificed piece) Qxh3 (threatening 16 … Bh2+ 17 Kh1 Bg3+ 18 Kg1 Qh2+ 19 Kf1 Qxf2++) 16 Re5 Bxe5 17 dxe5 Rae8 18 Bxd5 cxd5 19 Bf4 Re6 and Black has a clear advantage. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 14 … Qh3 Black gets his Queen out of attack and posts her aggressively where she can assist in the attack on White’s kingside (she covers “g2”, “g3” and “h2”). See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 15 Be3

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdw4kd} {dwdwdp0p} {pdpgwdwd} {dpdndwdw} {wdw)wdwd} {dB)wGw)q} {P)wdW)w)} {$NdQ$wIw} vllllllllV Diagram 95. Position after 15 Be3.

91

White develops his Bishop to a square where it is not a target or in the way of his minor piece development. Other moves are inferior as pointed out in the following possibilities: 1. 15 Re4 (White brings his Rook into the center of the board with the possibility of going to “h4” to dislodge Black’s actively posted Queen) g5 (planning to meet 16 Bxg5? with 16 … Qf5 forking Rook and Bishop) and now Black gets excellent pressure for his Pawn after either 16 Nd2 f5, or 16 Qf3 Bf5. 2. 15 Qf3 Bg4 16 Qg2 Qh5 17 Bxd5 (not 17 Nd2 because of 17 … Rae8 and White is in serious trouble) cxd5 18 f4 Rae8 and Black has more than enough compensation for his Pawn. 3. 15 Qd3 Bf5 16 Qf1 Qh5 17 Be3 Bh3 (17 … Rae8 is also playable) 18 Bd1 Qf5 19 Qe2 Rae8 20 Nd2 (If 20 Qf3, then 20 … Qd3 21 Bb3 Nxe3 22 fxe3 Re6) c5 21 a3 cxd4 22 cxd4 Nf4 23 Qf3 Qg6 and Black has enough pressure for his Pawn. 4. 15 Nd2 Bg4 16 Nf3 (if 16 f3, then 16 … Bxg3 with a winning attack) Qh5 17 Kg2 Rae8 18 Rxe8 Rxe8 19 h4 Qf5 and White is in very bad shape. 5. 15 Bxd5 cxd5 16 Qf3 Bf5 17 Qxd5 Rae8 18 Bd2 Bd3 19 Na3

92


Bxa3 20 bxa3 Bc4 21 Qf3 Rxe1+ 22 Rxe1 Bxa2 with Bishops of opposite colors and White’s white square weaknesses making the likely outcome a draw. 6. 15 Bg5 (the Bishop is a target here and it results in a loss of time for White) Bg4 16 Qd3 Qh5 17 Be3 Rae8 and Black has gained an important tempo in the main line. 7. 15 Bc2 Bg4 16 Qd3 Rae8 17 Be3 f5 and Black’s attack is worth more than a Pawn. 8. 15 a4 Bg4 16 Qd3 Rae8 17 Be3 Nxe3 18 Rxe3 Bf4 19 Rxe8 Rxe8 20 Na3 Re2 21 Qxe2 Bxe2 22 Re1 Kf8 23 Rxe2 Bc1 and Black stands better. 15 … Bg4 Black develops his Bishop and attacks White’s Queen. Black’s Bishop aims at taking advantage of White’s white square weaknesses. White must continue to be precise or suffer immediate disaster. If Black tries to weaken White’s kingside with 15 … h5, then White comes out on top after 16 Qf3 h4 17 Bxd5 cxd5 18 Qxd5 hxg3 19 hxg3 Bxg3 20 Qg2 Qxg2+ 21 Kxg2 Bd6 22 Nd2 f5 23 a4. Black doesn’t have enough compensation for his Pawn. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

16 Qd3 This is White’s only move to avoid a quick loss. If White played 16 Qd2??, Black has a forced mate after 16 … Bf3. When I show this position to my students it isn’t uncommon for them to try to block the attack on the Queen and attack Black’s Bishop with 16 f3??. However, this loses quickly after 16 … Bxg3! 17 hxg3 (if 17 fxg4, then 17 … Qxh2+ 18 Kf1 Nxe3+ 19 Rxe3 Qf2++) Qxg3+ 18 Kf1 Bxf3. 16 … Rae8 Black brings in his last piece to concentrate his attack on the kingside. Not only does this Rook apply pressure on the open “e” file, Black has the possibility of bringing it into the attack along the sixth rank by placing it on “e6”. Black placed the queenside Rook on the “e” file, instead of his Rook on “f8”, because the Rook on “f8” is already effectively placed to support the advance of his “f ” Pawn. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 17 Nd2 White completes his minor piece development and connects his Rooks on the first rank.

Robert M. Snyder

17 … Re6 This is known as the “Spassky Variation.” Along the sixth rank the Rook can be shifted to directly assist with the kingside attack. It is less popular to immediately begin the assault on the kingside with 17 … f5. After 17 … f5 the game might continue 18 f4 Kh8 (if 18 … g5, then 19 Qf1 Qh5 20 Qg2) 19 Bxd5 cxd5 20 Qf1 Qh5 21 a4 bxa4 (if 21 … g5, then 22 axb5 axb5 23 fxg5 Rxe3 24 Rxe3 f4 25 gxf4 Bxf4 26 Rg3 Qxg5 27 Kh1 Bd6 28 Qg2 Bxg3 29 Qxg3 h5 30 Rf1) 22 Rxa4 g5 23 Raa1 Re6 24 fxg5 Rfe8 25 Qf2 f4 26 gxf4 Bh3 27 Kh1. Black’s position is certainly not worth being three Pawns down. 18 a4 White attacks Black’s Pawn minority on the queenside with the idea of possible counter-play along the “a” file. White’s plan is to hold the fort on the kingside while pursuing a counter attack on the queenside and in the center. White’s Bishop on the “a2-g8” diagonal is especially effective in restraining Black’s piece activity through the use of pins. Black’s Pawn on “c6” is stressed by having to defend pieces on both “b5” and “d5”. Between White’s counter-play and extra Pawn in exchange for Black’s attack, White in theory has an edge. In practice

93

though, Black often gets just enough pressure to obtain a draw, and if White plays inaccurately punishment can be swift.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdw4kd} {dwdwdp0p} {pdpgrdwd} {dpdndwdw} {Pdw)wdbd} {dB)QGw)q} {w)wHW)w)} {$wdw$wIw} vllllllllV Diagram 96. Position after 18 a4.

18 … b4? Black takes valuable time from his attack on the kingside in an attempt to relieve the pressure created by White’s counter-attack on the queenside. Although this move relieves White’s pressure on the “a” file and releases some of the tension on Black’s “c” Pawn, it makes Black’s “a” Pawn a target by opening the “f1-a6” diagonal. However, the main problem with this move is that Black cannot afford to lose time when he has sacrificed a Pawn to obtain attacking chances on the kingside. We will examine some other possibilities: 1. 18 … f5. Bringing the Pawn into play to spearhead the attack is Black’s most common move. Black threatens to crack open White’s

94


position with 19 … f4. The main line continues with White’s next move; it challenges Black’s Queen and prepares to support the blockade of Black’s “f ” Pawn. 19 Qf1 Qh5 20 f4 bxa4, Now if 20 … g5, then 21 axb5 axb5 22 Bxd5 cxd5 and now White gains the advantage with either: • 23 fxg5 Rxe3 24 Rxe3 f4 25 Rf3 Bxf3 26 Qxf3 Qxf3 27 Nxf3 fxg3 28 Kg2 gxh2 29 Nxh2 Bxh2 30 Kxh2 Rf2+ 31 Kg3 Rxb2 32 Kf4, or • 23 Qg2 Rfe8 24 Qxd5 Qf7 25 Ra8 Kg7 26 Rxe8 Qxe8 27 Ra1 Bb8 28 Bf2 gxf4 29 Ra8 Rb6 30 Qc5. 21 Rxa4 Rfe8, Now inferior for Black are either: • 21 … g5 22 Rxa6 gxf4 23 Bxf4 Bxf4 24 Rxe6 Bxd2 25 Bxd5 cxd5 26 Qg2 f4 27 Qxd2 Bxe6 28 Rxe6 fxg3 29 hxg3, or • 21 … Rb8 22 Bxd5 cxd5 23 Rxa6 Qe8 24 Bf2 Qd7 25 Rxe6 Qxe6 26 c4 dxc4 27 Rc6!, or • 21 … Kh8 22 Bxd5 cxd5 23 Rxa6 Rfe8 24 Qb5 Rh6 25 h3 Bxh3 26 Bf2.

22 Qf2 g5 23 fxg5 f4 24 gxf4 Bh3 25 Rxa6 Bxf4 26 Qxf4 Nxf4 27 Bxf4 Qg4+ 28 Bg3 Qxg5 29 Ne4 Qf5 30 Nf2 and White stands better. 2. 18 … Qh5. Black repositions his Queen to reinforce his threatened position in the center. However, White comes out on top after 19 axb5 axb5 20 Bxd5! Qxd5 21 c4 bxc4 (if 21 … Qh5, then 22 cxb5 cxb5 23 Ra5) 22 Qxc4 Qh5 23 Ra6 Rfe8 24 Rxc6 Rh6 25 h4 Rg6 26 Rb6 Bd7 27 Qe2 Qf5 28 Qf3 Qa5 29 Qb7. 3. 18 … Nxe3. Black clears the way for his Rook to apply pressure on the “h” file. However, Black’s attack runs out of steam after 19 Rxe3 Rh6 20 Nf1 Qh5 21 axb5 axb5 22 Bd1 f5 23 f4 g5 24 fxg5 Qxg5 25 Bxg4 Qxg4 26 Qe2 Qg6 27 Re1. 4. 18 … bxa4 19 Rxa4 f5 20 Qf1 Qh5 (if 20 … f4, then White ends up having a nice advantage with four Pawns for a piece in the endgame after 21 Qxh3 Bxh3 22 Rxa6 fxe3 23 Rxe3 Nxe3 24 Rxc6) 21 f4 and we have transposed into variation #1 above. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

Robert M. Snyder

95

19 Qf1

20 c4?

White repositions his Queen to dislodge Black’s actively posted Queen and defend the kingside. Going Pawn grabbing with 19 Qxa6? would be a costly mistake after 19 … Nxe3 20 Rxe3 Rxe3 21 fxe3 Bxg3 22 hxg3 Qxg3+ 23 Kh1 (if 23 Kf1, then 23 … Qxe3) Qh3+ 24 Kg1 Qxe3+. Exchanging on “d5” leaves Black with more pressure than he deserves for his Pawn after 19 Bxd5 cxd5 20 Qf1 Qh5 21 c4 dxc4 22 Qxc4 Rg6. And, finally, if White tries to imme diately dislodge Black’s Knight on “d5” without first moving his Queen to “f1” by playing 19 c4, then Black has the strong reply 19 … Bf4!, planning to meet 20 cxd5 (here 20 Qf1 is better, however Black is clearly better after 20 … Nxe3 21 Qxh3 Bxh3 22 d5 Nxd5) with 20 … Rh6 21 Qe4 Qxh2+ 22 Kf1 Bxe3 23 Rxe3 Rf6 24 f3 Bf5 25 Qe5 Bh3+ 26 Ke1 Qg1+ 27 Ke2 Qxa1 and Black is winning.

White threatens and drives Black’s Knight out of the center. However, White misses his opportunity to win a second Pawn by playing 20 Qxa6. Black’s pressure would not be sufficient for two Pawns. After 20 Qxa6 the game might continue 20 … Rg6 (if 20 … Rfe8, then 21 a5 bxc3 22 bxc3 Bf4 23 Bc4; or if 20 … Rb8, then 21 a5 is strong) 21 Qa5 Bc7 22 Qa7 bxc3 23 bxc3 Bb6 24 Qa6 Bc7 25 Bxd5 cxd5 26 Qb5 planning to meet 26 … Rb8 with 27 Bf4! and Black is in trouble.

19 … Qh5

White recovers his piece and challenges Black’s Rook on the open “e” file. If White recaptured by 21 fxe3, then Black gets a lot of pressure with an attack on White’s center Pawns by 21 … c5 22 Bd1 Rfe8 23 Bxg4 Qxg4 24 Qf3 Qg5.

Because Black has sacrificed a Pawn, he naturally avoids allowing White to simplify by trading Queens. Therefore, weaker for Black would be 19 … Qxf1+ 20 Kxf1 bxc3 21 bxc3 Rb8 22 Bc4 and Black has little to show for the Pawn.

20 … Nxe3 Black takes care of the threat on his Knight by making an even exchange. The exchange obtains the Bishop pair and is necessary since the Knight doesn’t have a good square for retreat. Black’s Bishop pair and initiative will now be worth his sacrificed Pawn. 21 Rxe3

96


cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdw4kd} {dwdwdp0p} {pdpgrdwd} {dwdwdwdq} {P0P)wdbd} {dBdw$w)w} {w)wHW)w)} {$wdwdQIw} vllllllllV Diagram 97. Position after 21 Rxe3.

21 … Rh6 Black avoids exchanging Rooks on the “e” file and threatens 22 … Qxh7++.

23 dxc5 White eliminates the attack on his “d” Pawn by exchanging it for Black’s Pawn. However, this activates Black’s black-square Bishop and gives Black more than enough compensation for his Pawn. It would be better to return the Pawn with 23 Ree1 cxd4 24 Bd1, though Black stands better. Getting the “d” Pawn out of attack with 23 d5 allows Black’s black-square Bishop to come to life with 23 … Be5, planning to meet 24 Rb1 with 24 … Bd4. 23 … Bxc5

22 Qg2 White defends his “h” Pawn and places his Queen on the long “h1-a8” diagonal. White now threatens to play 23 c5, which would reopen the “a2-g8” diagonal for his Bishop, attack Black’s Bishop on “d6” and restrict Black’s “c” Pawn. The move played in the game is stronger than weakening White’s kingside Pawns with 22 h4, which Black would have met with 22 … c5. 22 … c5 Black attacks White’s unprotected “d” Pawn and prevents White from playing 23 c5.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdw4kd} {dwdwdp0p} {pdwdwdw4} {dwgwdwdq} {P0Pdwdbd} {dBdw$w)w} {w)wHW)Q)} {$wdwdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 98. Position after 23 … Bxc5.

Black recovers his Pawn and threatens White’s Rook on “e3”. 24 Rd3 White gets his Rook out of attack and now threatens to fork Black’s Queen and Bishop by 25 Rd5.

Robert M. Snyder

24 … Bh3 This only drives White’s Queen to a better square. It would be much stronger for Black to reposition his Rook and take command of the “e” file with 24 … Re6!, planning to meet 25 Rd5 with 25 … Qh6 (the attack on White’s Knight on “d2” prevents White from winning a piece). Black would then stand clearly better; he would have a great position worth more than a Pawn. 25 Qf3 White gets his Queen out of attack and challenges Black’s Queen. Here either 25 Qb7? or 25 Qd5? would have allowed 25 … Bf5 attacking White’s Rook and threatening 26 Qxh2+. 25 … Qe5?

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdw4kd} {dwdwdp0p} {pdwdwdw4} {dwgw1wdw} {P0Pdwdwd} {dBdRdQ)b} {w)wHW)w)} {$wdwdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 99. Position after 25 … Qe5.

Black repositions his Queen with an attack on White’s “b” Pawn and threatens 26 … Rf6. Black misses his

97

opportunity to repeat the position with 25 … Bg4 26 Qg2, which would have allowed him to then play 26 … Re6!, transposing into what he should have done back on move 24. Certainly after 25 … Bg4 26 Qg2, if Black is content with a draw, he could continue to repeat the position with 26 … Bh3. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 26 Rd5 White must play aggressively or Black’s position will become overwhelming. White actively posts his Rook and attacks Black’s Queen and Bishop on “c5”. If White plays 26 Ne4, Black would play 26 … Re6! threatening White’s Knight and pinning it (now 27 Nxc5?? loses to 27 … Qe1+! 28 Rxe1 Rxe1++). 26 … Qxb2 Black uses his Queen aggressively to recover his Pawn while threatening White’s Rook on “a1”. Black is also threatening a skewer with 27 … Rf6. A reasonable and safe alternative for Black is to get his Queen out of attack and defend his Bishop on “c5” with 26 … Qe7. After 26 … Qe7 the game might continue 27 Bc2 Be6 28 Rh5 Rxh5 29 Qxh5 g6 30 Qe2 Bd4 31 Rb1 Qf6

98


and Black’s position is worth at least a Pawn. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 27 Rb1 White gets rid of the threat on his Rook and uses the Rook to threaten Black’s aggressively posted Queen. Not 27 Rd1 or 27 Re1 because of 27 … Rf6 and after the Queen moves then 28 … Bxf2+. 27 … Re8? Black shifts the wrong Rook onto the open “e” file. At a glance, since the Rook on “h6” is already in play, it would seem logical to bring the inactive Rook into play. However, it will soon become apparent that the Rook on “h6” will be shut out in the critical variation that should have saved Black.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdrdkd} {dwdwdp0p} {pdwdwdw4} {dwgRdwdw} {P0Pdwdwd} {dBdwdQ)b} {w1wHW)w)} {dRdwdwIw} vllllllllV


Let’s now examine the correct move, 27 … Re6!. After 27 … Re6! if 28 Qd1?, Black has a nice piece sacrifice with 28 … Qf6! (threatening 29 … Qxf2+ 30 Kh1 Qg2++) 29 Rxc5 Rfe8 (White cannot keep Black’s Rook from penetrating to “e2” with an attack on “f2”) and now a possible continuation containing the most important ideas behind this position might be 30 Rd5 Re2 31 f3 g6 (Black takes the time out to make a move that prevents a backrank mate against his own King and frees his pieces for the final assault on White’s King—Black’s immediate threat is 32 … Qc3 followed by 33 … Qe3+) 32 Rc1 Rg2+ 33 Kh1 Ree2 34 Nf1 Rgf2 and it is curtains! Therefore, after 27 … Re6!, White must settle for equality by 28 Qd3 Qc3 29 Bc2 Qxd3 30 Bxd3 Be7 31 Nb3. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 28 Qd1 White relieves his Rook of having to defend the critical “e1” square against Black’s Rook on the “e” file (not 28 Rxb2?? because of 28 … Re1+ 29 Nf1 Rxf1++). Black’s Queen and the Bishop on “c5” are now threatened. Because of these two threats Black has nothing better than to sacrifice his Bishop in an

Robert M. Snyder

attempt to get as much counter-play as possible for his lost piece. It now becomes apparent why Black used the wrong Rook on move 27. If Black now played 28 … Qf6, then after 29 Rxc5 Black is unable to double his Rooks on the “e” file, which is the key ingredient behind the piece sacrifice shown in the analysis to Black’s 27th move. 28 … Bxf2+ Since Black is forced to lose a piece he at least gets a Pawn for it and exposes White’s King to attack. 29 Kxf2 White wins Black’s Bishop. 29 … Rf6+

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdrdkd} {dwdwdp0p} {pdwdw4wd} {dwdRdwdw} {P0Pdwdwd} {dBdwdw)b} {w1wHWIw)} {dRdQdwdw} vllllllllV

Diagram 101. Position after 29 … Rf6.

Black brings his Rook into the attack on White’s King. However, Black would

99

have maintained more pressure with 29 … Qf6+ 30 Kg1 Qe7. 30 Kg1 White gets his King out of attack and retreats to relative safety. 30 … Qc3 Black gets his Queen out of attack. From “c3” she threatens to support an attack with 31 … Qe3+ 32 Kh1 Rf2. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 31 Qe2! This is White’s only winning move! White prevents 31 … Qe3+ while threatening 32 Qxe8++. Black cannot take White’s Queen with 31 … Rxe2?? because of 32 Rd8+ Re8 33 Rxe8++. 31 … Kf8 Black defends his Rook and threatens 32 … Rxe2. If 31 … Rfe6, then 32 Ne4 (attacking Black’s Queen, which has nowhere to move) planning to meet 32 … Rxe4 with 33 Qxe4 Rxe4? 34 Rd8+ Re8 35 Rxe8++. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

100


32 Ne4 Once again, White is left with only one good move. Any other move would be disastrous for White (such as 32 Qd3?? Qxd3 33 Rxd3 Bf5). With 32 Ne4 White blocks the attack on his Queen while threatening 33 Nxc3.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdriwd} {dwdwdp0p} {pdwdw4wd} {dwdRdwdw} {P0PdNdwd} {dB1wdw)b} {wdwdQdw)} {dRdwdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 102. Position after 32 Ne4.

32 … Rxe4 Black tries a desperate sacrifice in a last ditch effort to keep his attack alive. However, Black’s efforts to successfully use the “e” file in his attack will be quickly thwarted due to his own King being exposed to attack. Black realized that a less aggressive approach would lead to a lost endgame where he is a piece down. An example of this would be 32 … Bg4 33 Nxc3 Bxe2 34 Nxe2 Rxe2 35 Bd1 Re1+ 36 Kg2 Rb6 37 c5 Rb8 38 c6 Re7 39 Rc5. Black would have suffered a slow but sure death. Sometimes lasting longer isn’t your best practical chance. When

you are losing: the attempt to complicate matters and give your opponent some rope to hang himself with is a wise decision. 33 Qxe4 White recaptures and is now a Rook ahead. 33 … Re6 Black continues with his idea of threa tening White’s Queen and attacking along the “e” file. Unfortunately for Black, this leads to nothing. 34 Qd3

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdwiwd} {dwdwdp0p} {pdwdrdwd} {dwdRdwdw} {P0Pdwdwd} {dB1Qdw)b} {wdwdwdw)} {dRdwdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 103. Position after 34 Qd3.

White gets his Queen out of attack and threatens to exchange Queens. Since Black is down a Rook he finds such an exchange about as popular as having a piranha in his bath tub! Also, White would have won easily after 34 Qf4.

Robert M. Snyder

34 … Re1+ Black continues with what he envisions as his last hope—an attack on White’s King. 35 Kf2 White gets his King out of attack and avoids the pitfall—35 Rxe1?? Qxe1+ 36 Qf1 Qxf1++. 35 … Qxd3 Even though Black wants to avoid an exchange of Queens he hopes that White simply recaptures with 36 Rxd3 and allows 36 … Rxb1; it would then be Black who is winning. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 36 Rxe1!

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdwiwd} {dwdwdp0p} {pdwdwdwd} {dwdRdwdw} {P0Pdwdwd} {dBdqdw)b} {wdwdwIw)} {dwdw$wdw} vllllllllV

Diagram 104. Position after 36 Rxe1.

This move is the show stopper! Black resigned here. Black’s Queen is threatened and if she avoids being

101

captured with a move like 36 … Qxb3, then White plays 37 Rd8++.

LESSON 12

Black defends his “e” Pawn with a Pawn and therefore relieves the Knight from its defense. As a result, Black now threatens to play 8 … Na5 and exchange his Knight for White’s good “Lopez” Bishop. This move also frees Black’s Bishop on the “c8-h3” diagonal.

Allowing an Isolated Pawn for Active Piece Play Jorge Brittencourt vs Robert Snyder 2001 Opening: Ruy Lopez

8 c3

In the last game Black gave up a Pawn to obtain attacking chances; in this game Black allows his opponent to give him an isolated “d” Pawn on an open file in exchange for active piece play. In what seems to be from out of nowhere, Black’s pieces suddenly jump into play on the kingside in a well coordinated attack. 1 e4 e5 2 Nf3 Nc6 3 Bb5 a6 4 Ba4 Nf6 5 0-0 Be7 6 Re1 b5 7 Bb3 d6

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kdw4} {dw0wgp0p} {pdn0whwd} {dpdw0wdw} {wdwdPdwd} {dBdwdNdw} {P)P)W)P)} {$NGQ$wIw} vllllllllV

White prepares support for the placement of a Pawn on “d4” and opens up “c2” as a retreat square for his Bishop. The immediate 8 d4 is premature. After 8 d4 Black could set up the Noah’s Ark Trap with 8 … exd4 and if 9 Nxd4? (9 Bd5 is best), then 8 … Nxd4 9 Qxd4 c5 11 Qc3 c4. However, a good sequence for Black after 8 d4 is 8 … Nxd4 9 Nxd4 exd4 and now: • if 10 Bd5 (10 Qxd4? would fall into the Noah’s Ark Trap after 10 … c5), then 10 … Nxd5 11 exd5 0-0 12 Qxd4 Bf6, or • if 10 a4, then 10 … Bb7. If White tries attacking on the flank with 8 a4, the game might continue 8 … Bg4 9 c3 0-0 10 h3 Bxf3 11 Qxf3 Na5 12 Bc2 c5 13 d3 b4 14 Nd2 Rb8 15 Rb1 Nd7 16 Nf1 Bg5 with approximate equality.

Diagram 105. Position after 7 … d6.

-102-

Robert M. Snyder

8 … 0-0

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1w4kd} {dw0wgp0p} {pdn0whwd} {dpdw0wdw} {wdwdPdwd} {dB)wdNdw} {P)w)W)P)} {$NGQ$wIw} vllllllllV


Black removes his King from the center and brings his Rook to a more active location. 9 h3 Before striking at the center with his “d” Pawn, White prevents Black’s Bishop from going to “g4” and pinning his Knight. Passive play such as 9 d3 gives Black a comfortable game after 9 … Na5 10 Bc2 c5 11 Nbd2 Nc6 12 Nf1 Re8 13 Ne3 Bf8 14 a4 Bb7. If 9 d4, Black has a strong pin with the move 9 … Bg4. Possible continuations are: 1. 10 d5 Na5 11 Bc2 c6 12 dxc6 (if 12 h3, then 12 … Bc8! 13 dxc6 Qc7) Qc7 13 Nbd2 Qxc6 14 h3 Be6 15 Nf1 Nc4 with an equal game. 2. 10 Be3 exd4 11 cxd4 d5 (also playable is 11 … Na5 12 Bc2 c5) 12 e5 Ne4 13 Nc3 Nxc3 14 bxc3 Qd7 15 h3 Bh5 16 Bc2 (if 16 Bf4,

103

then 16 … Na5 17 Bc2 and now either 17 … Qe6 or 17 … Nc4 18 Qb1 Kh8) f5 17 exf6e.p. Bxf6 18 Qd3 Bg6 19 Qd2 Be4 with an equal game. 3. 10 h3 Bxf3 11 gxf3 Na5 12 Bc2 Nh5 13 f4 Nxf4 14 Bxf4 exf4 15 Qg4 Qc8! 16 Qf3 c5 and Black stands better. 9 … Na5 Black drives White’s “Lopez” Bishop off of the “a2-g8” diagonal and frees his “c” Pawn. The “Breyer Variation” with 9 … Nb8 is covered in LESSON TWELVE in Unbeatable Chess Lessons. 10 Bc2 White preserves his important “Lopez” Bishop by retreating it (White didn’t want to allow 10 … Nxb3). 10 … c5 This further attacks the important “d4” square, frees Black’s Queen along the “d8-a5” diagonal and expands space on the queenside (thematic with Black’s idea to obtain counter-play on the queenside). 11 d4 White continues to build his Pawn center, attacks Black’s “e” Pawn a second time, and frees his queenside

104


pieces. Passive play with 11 d3 gives Black a comfortable game after 11 … Qc7 12 Nbd2 Bd7 13 Nf1 Rfe8 14 Ne3 Rac8. 11 … Nd7

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1w4kd} {dwdngp0p} {pdw0wdwd} {hp0w0wdw} {wdw)Pdwd} {dw)wdNdP} {P)BdW)Pd} {$NGQ$wIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 107. Position after 11 … Nd7.

This is known as the “Keres Variation.” The most common move here, 11 … Qc7, is covered in LESSON ELEVEN in Unbeatable Chess Lessons. Black uses his Knight to defend his “e” Pawn a second time and posts his Knight where it has possible uses on the queenside. This also opens “f6” for use by Black’s Bishop. 12 Nbd2 This is the most commonly played move here. White develops his Knight where it can go to either “f1” or “b3”. We will now examine some other possibilities for White: 1. 12 dxc5. This immediate exchange releases tension in the center and

gives Black easy equality after 12 … dxc5 13 Nbd2 Bb7 (this is an improvement over 13 … f6) 14 Nf1 (if 14 Qe2, then 14 … Qc7 15 Nf1 Nc4 16 b3 Nd6 17 c4 Rfe8 18 Bb2 b4 19 Rad1 Bf8 20 Ng3 a5) Nc4 15 Ng3 Nd6 16 Qe2 Qc7 with a comfortable game for Black. 2. 12 b3. This quiet move is somewhat slow. However, it eliminates the possibility of Black’s Knight entering “c4”. The game might continue 12 … exd4 13 cxd4 Nc6 14 Nc3 Bf6 15 Be3 cxd4 16 Nxd4 Nxd4 17 Bxd4 Bb7 18 Ne2 (if 18 Nd5, then 18 … Bxd5 19 exd5 Bxd4 20 Qxd4 Qg5; or if 18 Bxf6, then Qxf6 19 Re3 Rac8 20 Rd3 Rfd8) Re8 (here 18 … Rc8 is a good alternative) 19 Ng3 g6 20 Qd2 Be5 with approximate equality. 3. 12 a4. Attacking and seeking counter-play on the flank doesn’t present Black with any problems after 12 … Bb7 13 Nbd2 Re8 14 Nf1 exd4 15 cxd4 Bf6 16 axb5 axb5 17 Qd3 c4 with an equal game. 4. 12 d5. Locking up the center gives Black possibilities of the thematic break with “f5”. The game might continue 12 … Nb6 13 g4 (if 13 b3 or 13 Nbd2, then 13 … f5) h5 14 Nh2 (if 14 gxh5, then 14 …

Robert M. Snyder

105

13 … Nc6

Bxh3 with the idea of “f5”) hxg4 15 hxg4 Bg5 16 Nd2 g6 17 Ndf3 Bxc1 18 Qxc1 Kg7 and Black stands better. 5. 12 Bd3. This is a slow positional move with the ideas of hindering Black’s Knight from going to “c4” and removing the Bishop from possible attack along the “c” file. Here Black can simply develop with 12 … Bb7, or play more aggressively and open lines with 12 … exd4 13 cxd4 Nc6 14 Nc3 (if 14 Bf1, then 14 … Bf6 is strong) Bf6 15 dxc5 dxc5 16 a4 b4 17 Nd5 Nde5 18 Nxe5 Bxe5 with approximate equality.

Black continues with his plan of repositioning his Knight and applying pressure in the center on “d4” and “e5”. The Knight now also has access to “b4”.

12 … cxd4

14 Nf1

Black’s plan is to bring the Knight back to “c6” and again apply pressure in the center. If Black immediately played 12 … Nc6, then White would play 13 d5 attacking and embarrassing Black’s Knight on “c6”, which doesn’t have a good square for retreat. By first exchanging the “c” Pawns Black opens up the “b4” square for his Knight.

White continues with his thematic Knight maneuver and reopens the “d” file for his Queen that now defends his “d” Pawn. At “f1” the Knight has opportunities of being repositioned on either “e3” or “g3”. Another common line for White is 14 Nb3 with the following possible continuation 14 … a5 15 Bd3, If 15 Be3, then 15 … a4 and now: • 16 Nbd2 Bf6 17 d5 Nb4 18 Bb1 Nc5 19 Nf1 Nba6 20 Qd2 Bd7, or • 16 Nc1 Bb7 17 Bd3 exd4 18 Nxd4 Nxd4 19 Bxd4 Bf6 20 Ne2 Re8.

13 cxd4 White recovers his Pawn.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1w4kd} {dwdngp0p} {pdn0wdwd} {dpdw0wdw} {wdw)Pdwd} {dwdwdNdP} {P)BHW)Pd} {$wGQ$wIw} vllllllllV


106


Ba6 16 d5 (if 16 Be3, then 16 … a4 17 Nc1 exd4 18 Nxd4 Nxd4 19 Bxd4 Ne5 20 Bf1 Nc6 21 Be3 Bf6 22 Nd3 Bb7) Nb4 17 Bf1 a4 18 Nbd4 exd4 19 a3 Nxd5 20 exd5 d3! 21 Bxd3 Bf6 22 Rb1 Nc5 23 Bc2 Bb7 24 Nd4 Re8 25 Rxe8+ Qxe8. Another possibility for White is to close the center and attack Black’s Knight on “c6” with 14 d5. The game might continue 14 … Nb4 15 Bb1 a5 16 Nf1 (Black doesn’t mind having his Knight driven back with 16 a3 Na6 because it has possibilities of being repositioned— the Knight on “b4” ends up being nicely repositioned after 16 Qe2 Rb8 17 a3 Na6 18 Bd3 Nac5) Rb8 17 g4 (or if 17 Ng3, then 17 … Nc5 18 Be3 Nba6) Na6 18 Ng3 g6 19 Kh2 Nac5 with a comfortable game for Black. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 14 … exd4 Black is willing to accept an isolated “d” Pawn on an open file in exchange for active piece play. This move opens up the “e5” square for his Knight and will bring White’s Queen out to “d4”. On “d4” White’s Queen will become a target to some tactical possibilities by Black.

15 Nxd4 White recovers his Pawn while bringing his Knight to the center where it threatens Black’s Knight on “c6”. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 15 … Nxd4 Black gets his Knight out of attack and continues with his plan to bring White’s Queen out to “d4”. 16 Qxd4 White recovers his Knight. Although the Queen is actively posted in the center of the board and applies immediate pressure on Black’s isolated “d” Pawn, the Queen will also be a target of some nice tactical threats by Black. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 16 … Ne5 Black posts his Knight actively in the center where it attacks the critical “f3” and “c4” squares and allows Black’s Queen to aid in the defense of the isolated “d” Pawn. As a result, Black’s Bishop is free from the task of defending the “d” Pawn and can to go to “f6”. With the Bishop on “f6”, Black

Robert M. Snyder

threatens a discovered attack on White’s Queen with Nf3+.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1w4kd} {dwdwgp0p} {pdw0wdwd} {dpdwhwdw} {wdw!Pdwd} {dwdwdwdP} {P)BdW)Pd} {$wGw$NIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 109. Position after 16 … Ne5.

17 Ne3? Grandmaster (and former US Champion) Nick DeFirmian played the same move against me in a tournament many years ago. This sacrifices a Pawn, but doesn’t give White enough compensation. Black’s simple tactical threat was overlooked here and White is forced to save face by claiming it was a sacrifice. We will now examine what theory considers White’s most logical moves: 1. 17 Qd1. White removes his Queen from the center. The game might continue 17 … Bf6 18 Ne3 Be6 19 Nd5 (if 19 a4, then 19 … Nc4) Bxd5 20 exd5 (if 20 Qxd5, then 20 … Rc8 21 Bb3 Nc4 22 Re2 Rc5 23 Qd1 d5 and Black stands slightly better) Nc4 21 a4 Qa5 22 Ra2 Rfe8 23 Rf1 (if 23 Be4, then 23 … bxa4 24 Rxa4 Qb5 is equal)

107

Rac8 24 Bf5 (if 24 Bb1, then 24 … b4) Rc7 25 b3 Ne5 with an even game. 2. 17 Rd1. White increases pressure on the “d” file. The game might continue 17 … Bb7 18 Ng3 (if 18 Ne3, then 18 … Rc8) Bf6 19 Qxd6 Qc8 20 Qd2 Rd8 21 Qe2 Qc4 22 Rxd8+ Rxd8 and Black has enough play for his sacrificed Pawn. 3. 17 f4. White drives Black’s Knight from the center and claims more space. However, White weakens himself on the kingside. The game might continue 17 … Nc6 18 Qf2 (if 18 Qd1, then 18 … Bf6 19 Ne3 Be6) Bh4 19 g3 Bf6 20 Rd1 Qc7 21 Kh2 (if 21 Ne3, then 21 … Bd4) Bb7 22 Bb1 (if 22 Ne3, then 22 … Nd4 23 Bd3 Rac8) Rfe8 23 Qc2 g6 24 Ne3 Bg7 25 Nd5 Qd8, planning to meet 26 Qf2 with 26 … Na5 27 Nb6 Rb8, or 26 Be3 with 26 … Ne7 27 Bb6 Qd7 and Black stands better in both cases. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 17 … Bxh3! Black takes advantage of White’s overworked “g” Pawn to win a Pawn. White cannot play 18 gxh3?? because of 18 … Nf3+. White will obtain

108


some pressure, but not quite a Pawn’s worth. 18 Nd5 White takes the strong natural outpost for his Knight. White would obtain more compensation for his Pawn by expanding on the kingside and driving Black’s Knight out of the center with 18 f4. After 18 f4 the game might continue 18 … Nc6 (getting the Knight out of attack and threatening White’s centrally located Queen) 19 Qc3 (White now threatens 20 Qxc6 and 20 gxh3) Bd7 20 Nd5 Rc8 21 Qd3 f5 22 Be3 Bh4 23 Nb6 Bxe1 24 Nxc8 Nb4 25 Qb3+ d5 26 Rxe1 Nxc2 27 Qxc2 Bxc8 28 exd5 Qxd5 and Black stands better. 18 … Be6 Sooner or later the Pawn on “g2” was going to threaten to capture Black’s Bishop on “h3”. Since the Bishop has already performed its task by winning White’s “h” Pawn, it is repositioned on an active square. Another good move for Black would be to attack White’s Bishop on “c2” with 18 … Rc8, planning to meet 19 Bb3 with 19 … Be6.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdw1w4kd} {dwdwgp0p} {pdw0bdwd} {dpdNhwdw} {wdw!Pdwd} {dwdwdwdw} {P)BdW)Pd} {$wGw$wIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 110. Position after 18 … Be6.

19 Nxe7+? This is a bad strategic choice. White couldn’t resist the temptation to exchange a Knight for a Bishop and obtain the Bishop pair. Obtaining the Bishop pair in an open position is generally a good choice, but here there are too many drawbacks: 1. The exchange gives up a very strongly posted Knight for Black’s less active Bishop. 2. Black’s Queen is brought to a more active post and connects Black’s Rooks on his first rank. 3. White cannot afford to make exchanges when he needs to maintain pressure for his sacrificed Pawn. A logical plan would be for White to apply more pressure with a developing move such as 19 Be3 Rc8, or 19 a4 which might continue 19 … Bf6 20 Qd1 (weak would be 20 Nxf6+ Qxf6

Robert M. Snyder

21 Qxd6 Rac8 planning to meet 22 Bb1 with 23 … Nf3+! 24 gxf3 Rxc1 25 Rxc1 Qg5+ forking King and Rook, or 22 Bd1 with 22 … Rfd8 with the idea of 23 … Nd3 after White’s Queen moves) Rc8 21 Bb3 bxa4 22 Bxa4 Ng4. However, in either of these cases Black still gets a nice advantage.

109

21 Re2?

Black recovers the piece.

White uses his Rook to defend his threatened Bishop. However, the Rook itself will become a target on “e2”. There are times when crawling on your belly gives the best chance of survival and this is one of those cases! White would have done best to retreat his Bishop with 21 Bd1 even though he would be in sad shape after 21 … Qf6 22 Be3 Rfd8 23 f4 Qh4 24 Rf1 Ng4.

20 b3

21 … Qf6

White prevents the use of “c4” by Black’s pieces and opens up the “c1a3” diagonal for use by his Bishop. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

This is White’s first hint that a kingside attack is brewing. Black brings his Queen toward the kingside and threatens to win White’s Queen with 22 … Nf3+. Black could have also pursued an attack with 21 … Bg4 22 Rd2 Bf3!.

20 … Rac8

22 Bb2

19 … Qxe7

cuuuuuuuuC {wdrdw4kd} {dwdw1p0p} {pdw0bdwd} {dpdwhwdw} {wdw!Pdwd} {dPdwdwdw} {PdBdW)Pd} {$wGw$wIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 111. Position after 20 … Rac8.

Black places his Rook on the open “c” file and threatens White’s Bishop on “c2”.

White finally completes his minor piece development and defends his Queen in answer to Black’s threat. If White had played 22 Be3, Black would have won nicely after 22 … Nf3+! 23 gxf3 Qxf3 threatening to set up a forced mate with 24 … Bh3 and to capture White’s unprotected Rook on “e2”. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

110


22 … Bg4

24 Kf1

Black’s Bishop joins the attack on the kingside and threatens White’s Rook on “e2”.

White’s King makes a run for it! This will avoid mate, but not massive material loss. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

23 Rd2 White gets his Rook out of attack and maintains the protection of his Bishop on “c2”. White would continue to get chewed up after 23 f3 Bxf3!. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdrdw4kd} {dwdwdp0p} {pdw0w1wd} {dpdwhwdw} {wdw!Pdbd} {dPdwdwdw} {PGB$W)Pd} {$wdwdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 112. Position after 23 Rd2.

23 … Bf3!! Black sinks his Bishop deep into the enemy camp with devastating effect. Of course the Bishop cannot be captured with 24 gxf3 because of 24 Nxf3+ forking the King and Queen. Black’s immediate threat is to force mate with 24 … Qg5 25 g3 Qh5 followed by 26 … Qh1++.

24 … Qg5

cuuuuuuuuC {wdrdw4kd} {dwdwdp0p} {pdw0wdwd} {dpdwhw1w} {wdw!Pdwd} {dPdwdbdw} {PGB$W)Pd} {$wdwdKdw} vllllllllV

Diagram 113. Position after 24 … Qg5.

Black threatens 25 … Qxg2+ 26 Ke1 Qg1++. White has these choices: 1. If 25 gxf3, then 25 … Nxf3 forking Queen and Rook. 2. If White continues to make a run for it with 25 Ke1, then 25 … Qxg2 26 Bd3 Qh1+ 27 Bf1 Bg2 28 Ke2 (if 28 Rd3, then 28 … Rc2) Qh5+ 29 Ke1 (if 29 Ke3, then 29 … Qf3++, or if 29 f3, then 29 … Qxf3+ 30 Ke1 Qxf1++) Nf3+ 30 Kd1 Nxd4+. White resigned here.

LESSON 13

1 e4 d5

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kgn4} {0p0w0p0p} {wdwdwdwd} {dwdpdwdw} {wdwdPdwd} {dwdwdwdw} {P)P)W)P)} {$NGQIBHR} vllllllllV

Exploiting Small Advantages in Development and Space Zapata vs. Welling 2002 Opening: Scandinavian Defense White obtains a small advantage in space and a lead in development. The lesson in this game nicely demonstrates how to build on small advantages. At one point White goes astray by making a couple of inferior moves, but Black misses his opportunities to greatly reduce White’s advantage. Even these imperfections on White’s part allow for some pointers that makes this game even more instructive. White eventually gains control of an important central file with his Rook; this is then used to assist in Black’s execution. After some nice tactical threats, White’s potential use of the Philidor’s Legacy mate allows him to force a quick win.


This is known as the Scandinavian or Center Counter Defense. Black immediately strikes at the center, frees his Bishop on the “c8-h3” diagonal, opens his Queen on the “d” file, and attacks White’s “e” Pawn. The drawback is that after White captures Black’s “d” Pawn, Black (in order to recover his Pawn) must either bring his Queen out early and lose a tempo or move his Knight twice by going to “f6” and then “d5”. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 2 exd5 It is clearly best for White to eliminate Black’s “d” Pawn and force Black to use valuable time to recover it.

-111-

112


2 … Qxd5 Black immediately recovers his Pawn. Black is willing to lose a tempo in exchange for freeing his Bishop on “c8”. He plans to reposition his Queen where she will be out of the way—yet continue to exert pressure in the center. Another common move here for Black is to develop his Knight and attack White’s Pawn on “d5” with 2 … Nf6. After 2 … Nf6 White gets a good game with 3 d4 (occupying the center with a Pawn and freeing his Bishop on “c1”), which might continue 3 … Nxd5, If 3 … Bg4, then 4 f3 Bf5 5 Bb5+ Nbd7 6 c4 and now: • if 6 … e6, then 7 dxe6 Bxe6 8 d5 Bf5 9 Nc3 Bc5 10 Qe2+ Kf8 (if 10 … Qe7, then 11 Qxe7+ Bxe7 12 Nge2) 11 Be3 Qe7 12 Bf4! Re8 13 0-0-0 Qd8 14 Qf1. • if 6 … a6, then 7 Bxd7+ Qxd7 8 Ne2 e6 9 dxe6 Qxe6 10 b3 0-0-0 11 0-0 Bc5 12 Kh1 Qd7 13 Bb2 Rhe8 14 Re1. 4 Nf3 Bg4 (if 4 … g6, then 5 Be2 Bg7 6 0-0 0-0 7 c4 Nb6 8 Nc3 Nc6 9 d5 Ne5 10 Qb3) 5 Be2 Nc6 6 0-0 e6 7 c4 Nb6 8 Nc3 Bxf3 9 Bxf3 Nxc4 10 Re1 Be7 11 d5 N6e5 12 Be2 Nb6 13 Bh5. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

3 Nc3

cuuuuuuuuC {rhbdkgn4} {0p0w0p0p} {wdwdwdwd} {dwdqdwdw} {wdwdwdwd} {dwHwdwdw} {P)P)W)P)} {$wGQIBHR} vllllllllV Diagram 115. Position after 3 Nc3.

White develops his Knight toward the center and threatens Black’s Queen. 3 … Qa5 Black gets his Queen out of the center and off to the side where she is less exposed to attack. From “a5” the Queen still exerts pressure on the center and can be quickly shifted to the kingside. Moving the Queen to another location is considered inferior. We now examine other possible continuations: 1. 3 … Qe5+?. This move is not uncommon among weaker players—the saying, “patzer sees a check; patzer gives a check” applies here—therefore we shall give it a quick look. 4 Be2 Bg4 5 d4 Bxe2 6 Ngxe2 and White has a considerable lead in development. 2. 3 … Qd6 4 d4 Nf6 5 Nf3 a6, If 5 … Bg4, then 6 h3 and now:

Robert M. Snyder

• if 6 … Bh5, then 7 g4 Bg6 8 Ne5 Nbd7 8 Nxg6 hxg6 9 Qf3 c6 10 Be3, or • if 6 … Bxf3 then 7 Qxf3 c6 8 Be3 e6 9 0-0-0 Qc7 10 g4 Nbd7 11 Bd3 Be7 12 g5 Nd5 13 Nxd5 cxd5 14 h4. 6 Bd3 Bg4 (or if 6 … g6, then 7 0-0 Bg7 8 Be3 0-0 9 Re1) 7 0-0 Nbd7 8 h3 Bh5 9 Re1 c6 (if 9 … e6, then 10 g4 Bg6 11 d5 Bxd3 12 dxe6 fxe6 13 Qxd3 0-0-0 14 Qxd6 Bxd6 15 Rxe6) 10 Ne4 Qc7 (if 10 … Nxe4, then 11 Rxe4 Nf6 12 Rh4 Bxf3 13 Qxf3) 11 Bg5 e6 12 c4 and White has a nice spatial advantage. 3. 3 … Qd8. This is the second most commonly played move. 4 d4 Nf6 5 Nf3 Bg4 (if 5 … c6, then 6 Bc4 Bf5 7 Ne5 e6 8 g4 Bg6 9 h4 Bb4 10 f3 Nd5 11 Bxd5 cxd5 12 h5 f6 13 Nxg6 hxg6 14 Qd3 Bxc3+ 15 bxc3 f5 16 Bf4 Nc6 17 0-0-0 and White stands clearly better) 6 h3 Bh5 (if 6 … Bxf3, then White gets the Bishop pair and a spatial advantage after 7 Qxf3 c6 8 Be3 e6 9 Bd3 Nbd7 10 0-0) 7 g4 Bg6 8 Ne5 e6 9 Bg2 c6 10 h4 (threatening 11 h5) Bb4 11 0-0 Nd5 (if 11 … Bxc3, then 12 bxc3 Nd5 13 c4; or if 11 … Nbd7, then 12 Qe2 is strong) 12 Nxd5 exd5 13 h5 f6 14 c3 fxe5 (if 14 … Be7, then 15 Nxg6 hxg6

113

16 hxg6 with a clear advantage for White) 15 cxb4 Bf7 16 dxe5 and White is up a Pawn with a good position. 4 d4 White occupies the center with a Pawn and frees his Bishop on the “c1-h6” diagonal. 4 … Nf6 Black develops his Knight toward the center. If Black immediately strikes at the center with 4 … e5, then a possible continuation is 5 dxe5 Nc6 6 Nf3 Bb4 7 Bd2 Bg4 8 a3 Nd4 9 Bb5+ c6 10 0-0 Bxf3 11 axb4 Bxd1 12 bxa5 Bxc2 13 Ba4 with a clear advantage for White. 5 Nf3

cuuuuuuuuC {rhbdkgw4} {0p0w0p0p} {wdwdwhwd} {1wdwdwdw} {wdw)wdwd} {dwHwdNdw} {P)PdW)P)} {$wGQIBdR} vllllllllV Diagram 116. Position after 5 Nf3.

White develops his Knight toward the center. From “f3” the Knight also has access to the strong natural outpost on

114


“e5”, where it commonly goes in this opening. 5 … c6 This is the standard move here. Black opens up the “d8-a5” diagonal as a retreat for his Queen and covers the potentially important “d5” and “b5” squares. This move is an admission that his Queen still is still a possible target for White. This happens in variations where White’s Bishop is placed on “d2” or his Knight on “c4”. We will now examine some other possible continuations: 1. 5 … Bf5 (this would transpose into 5 … c6 6 Bc4 Bf5 7 Bd2) 6 Bc4 c6 7 Bd2 e6, If 7 … Qc7, then 8 Nh4 and now: • if 8 … Bg4, then 9 f3 Bh5 10 Qe2, or • if 8 … Bg6 then 9 Nxg6 hxg6 10 Qf3 e6 11 0-0-0 Nbd7 12 Bg5 0-0-0 13 Ne4. 8 Qe2 Bb4 9 0-0-0 Nbd7 10 a3 Bxc3 11 Bxc3 Qc7 12 Ne5 and White has a nice spatial advantage. 2. 5 … Nc6 6 Bb5 Bd7 (if 6 … Ne4 or 6 … Nd5, then 7 Qd3 Nxc3 8 bxc6 a6 9 Bxc6+ bxc6 10 Ne5 f6 11 Nc4 Qf5 12 Ba3 Rb8 13 h3 Kf7 14 Ne3 Qxd3 15 cxd3 e5 16 Bxf8 Rxf8 17 dxe5 fxe5 18 0-0)

7 Bd2 0-0-0 8 a4 Qb6 9 Be3 and White stands clearly better. 3. 5 … Bg4 6 h3 Bh5 7 g4 Bg6 8 Ne5 e6 9 Bg2 c6 10 h4 Be4 (if 10 … Bb4, then 11 Bd2 Qb6 12 h5 Qxd4 13 Nf3 Qxg4 14 hxg6 Qxg2 15 Rg1 Qh3 16 gxf7+ Ke7 17 Rxg7 Qh1+ 18 Rg1 Qh5 19 Qe2) 11 Bxe4 Nxe4 12 Qf3 Nd6 13 Bf4 f6 14 Nd3 Nb5 (if 14 … Nd7, then 15 0-0-0 0-0-0 16 Rhe1) 15 0-0 Nxd4 (if 15 … Nxc3, then 16 bxc3 Nd7 17 Rfe1 0-0-0 18 Rxe6 Qxc3 19 Rb1) 16 Qe4 Qd8 17 Rad1 and White’s position is worth more than a Pawn. 6 Ne5 White takes the strong and natural outpost for his Knight. A good alternative would be 6 Bc4 Bf5 7 Bd2 transposing into Variation #1 to Black’s 5th move. 6 … Be6 This is certainly not the most natural square for the Bishop. Black contests White’s Bishop’s use of the “a2-g8” diagonal. Although the Bishop on “e6” blocks the use of his “e” Pawn, Black’s plan is to use “e6” only as a temporary parking place.

Robert M. Snyder

The most common move here is the natural development of the Bishop with 6 … Bf5, which might continue 7 Bc4 e6 8 g4 Bg6 9 h4 Nbd7 10 Nxd7 Nxd7 11 h5 Be4 12 0-0 Bd5 13 Nxd5 cxd5 14 Bd3 Bd6 15 c3 and White is slightly better. If 6 … Nbd7, White is clearly better after 7 Nc4 Qc7 8 Qf3! Nb6 9 Bf4 Qd8 10 Be5. 7 Bc4 White develops his Bishop, challenges Black’s Bishop on “e6” and threatens 8 Bxe6 dxe6 to double and isolate Black’s Pawns. Even though this will allow Black to exchange his problem Bishop on “e6”, White will have a slight lead in development and an advantage in space. White would have only a slight advantage after 7 Bd3 Nbd7 8 Nxd7 Bxd7 9 0-0 Bg4 10 Qe1.

115

cuuuuuuuuC {rhwdkgw4} {0pdw0p0p} {wdpdwhwd} {1wdwdwdw} {wdN)wdwd} {dwHwdwdw} {P)PdW)P)} {$wGQIwdR} vllllllllV

Diagram 117. Position after 8 Nxc4.

8 … Qd8 Black gets his Queen out of attack and places her where she will not be easily exposed to further attack. If 8 … Qc7, then White gets a great game after 9 00 e6 10 Qf3 (with the idea of 11 Bf4) Bd6 12 Nxd6+ Qxd6 13 Rd1 Nbd7 14 a3. 9 0-0

7 … Bxc4

White removes his King from the center and activates his kingside Rook.

Black eliminates White’s threat to exchange on “e6” by exchanging Bishops first.

9 … e6

8 Nxc4 White recovers his Bishop.

Black frees his Bishop on the “f8-a3” diagonal and increases his foothold on the important “d5” square. Weaker is 9 … g6 10 Re1 Bg7 11 Bg5 (also playable for White is to apply pressure on the “e” file with 11 Qe2 and Black has a choice of giving up a Pawn for partial compensation with 11 … 0-0 12 Qxe7

116


Qxd4 13 Qxb7 Nbd7, or accepting an inferior position with 11 … b5 12 Ne5 0-0 13 Be3) 0-0 12 Ne5 Nbd7 13 Qf3 and White stands clearly better. 10 Bg5 White completes his minor piece development and pins Black’s Knight on “f6”. White’s lead in development and advantage in space give him the advantage. 10 … Be7 Black develops his Bishop, breaks the pin on his Knight and clears the way to castle on the kingside. 11 Re1

cuuuuuuuuC {rhw1kdw4} {0pdwgp0p} {wdpdphwd} {dwdwdwGw} {wdN)wdwd} {dwHwdwdw} {P)PdW)P)} {$wdQ$wIw} vllllllllV Diagram 118. Position after 11 Re1.

White places his Rook on the half open “e” file. He continues to use his spatial advantage to bring new pieces into play and apply maximum pressure on Black’s camp.

11 … Nbd7 Black completes his minor piece development by bringing his Knight toward the center. Here is where the order of moves for development is important. It would be slightly better for Black to maintain his attack on White’s “e” Pawn with his Queen and play 11 … 0-0. White could not now bring his Queen into play with 12 Qf3 because of 12 … Qxd4. Therefore, after 11 … 0-0 the game might continue 12 Ne5 Nbd7 13 Qf3 Nxe5 14 dxe5 Nd5 15 Bxe7 Nxe7 16 Ne4 and though White still stands better, the position Black achieves is preferable to the position obtained by the move in the game. 12 Qf3 White brings his Queen into play where she will apply pressure on the kingside and in the center. 12 … 0-0 Black takes the safest course and removes his King from the center. An interesting alternative is to force an exchange of Knights by challenging White’s Knight on “c4” and attacking White’s “d” Pawn with 12 … Nb6. The game might continue 13 Nxb6 Qxb6 14 Ne4! Qxd4 (slightly better is 14 … Nxe4 15 Bxe7 Nd2 16 Qf4 Kxe7 17 Qg5+ Kf8 18 Qxd2 and White is better)

Robert M. Snyder

15 Rad1 Qxb2 16 Rb1 Qa3 (here 16 … Qxa2 takes the Pawn grabbing too far after either 17 Rxb7 or 17 Bxf6 gxf6 18 Rxb7) 17 Nxf6+ gxf6 18 Qxa3 Bxa3 19 Bxf6 Rg8 20 Rxb7 and White has a substantial positional advantage. 13 Rad1 White brings his Rook to a more active central file and completes the activation of all of his pieces. White’s position certainly has all of the ingredients for what would go into completing what could be defined as the “opening.” In contrast, Black may have developed all of his minor pieces but his major pieces (Queen and Rooks) remain passively located on their original squares. The manner in which White exploits his advantages in space and development will prove instructive.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdw1w4kd} {0pdngp0p} {wdpdphwd} {dwdwdwGw} {wdN)wdwd} {dwHwdQdw} {P)PdW)P)} {dwdR$wIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 119. Position after 13 Rad1.

117

13 … Nd5 Black centralizes his Knight and seeks exchanges in an attempt, through simplification, to minimize White’s positional advantages. As a result of this discovered attack, Black now threatens White’s aggressively posted Bishop with 14 … Bxg5. 14 Bxe7 White gets rid of the threat on his Bishop by exchanging it for Black’s Bishop. Black is forced to recapture with his Knight, which still leaves him in a somewhat restricted position. 14 … Nxe7 Black recovers his Bishop. Black would lose a Pawn after 14 … Qxe7? 15 Nxd5 cxd5 16 Qxd5. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 15 Ne4 White posts his Knight on a strong square by centralizing it. This will also clear the “c3” square for possible use by White’s “c” Pawn. 15 … Nf5 If Black hopes to survive, he cannot take on a totally passive role. Therefore,

118


Black’s Knight is posted actively where it applies pressure to White’s “e” Pawn, covers the weak “d6” square and assists on the kingside. 16 c3

cuuuuuuuuC {rdw1w4kd} {0pdndp0p} {wdpdpdwd} {dwdwdndw} {wdN)Ndwd} {dw)wdQdw} {P)wdW)P)} {dwdR$wIw} vllllllllV

17 Nc5 White wants to avoid further simplifying exchanges. However, this will give Black an opportunity to post his Queen strongly in the center and challenge White’s Queen. Therefore, a better alternative for White is 17 Nxf6+ Qxf6 18 a4 planning to meet either 18 … Qg5 or 18 … Rfd8 with 19 a5 when White expands on the queenside and restrains Black’s queenside play. 17 … b6

White reinforces his “d” Pawn and strengthens his center. White is in no rush to push forward yet and takes the time afforded to him by his extra space and nicely developed pieces to continue building a stronger position.

Black gets his “b” Pawn out of attack and drives White’s Knight away from its active post on “c5”. More to the point would have been 17 … Qd5. This would nicely centralize Black’s Queen, challenge White’s Queen and attack White’s unprotected Knight on “c4”. Though, after 17 … Qd5, White would still gain the better position with 18 Ne5.

16 … Nf6

18 Na6?

Black logically brings his Knight to assist with matters on the kingside, challenges White’s active Knight on “e4” and offers further simplifying exchanges. Illogical for Black would be to move the Knight toward the wrong side of the board with 16 … Nb6, this would allow White to strengthen his position with 17 Ne5.

The Knight goes astray! It is awkwardly posted at the edge on the board. It should have kept a centralized post with 18 Ne4, planning to meet 18 … Nxe4 with 19 Rxe4 Qd5 20 Qe2. White would then still have a nice positional advantage.

Diagram 120. Position after 16 c3.

18 … Qc8? Black returns the favor by using his Queen to passively attack and drive Black’s

Robert M. Snyder

Knight to a better square! As pointed out in the analysis to Black’s 17th move, once again it is correct to centralize the Queen by 18 … Qd5 with the plan of meeting either 19 Qe2 with 19 … Nh4, or 19 Ne5 with 19 … Qxf3 resulting in a compromise of White’s advantage. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdqdw4kd} {0wdwdp0p} {N0pdphwd} {dwdwdndw} {wdN)wdwd} {dw)wdQdw} {P)wdW)P)} {dwdR$wIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 121. Position after 18 … Qc8.

19 Nb4 White gets his Knight out of attack and threatens Black’s “c” Pawn. 19 … c5 Black counter-punches by using his threatened “c” Pawn to attack White’s Knight and “d” Pawn while opening the “c” file for his Queen. However, opening up the position only makes Black’s situation worse. Black would be better off by taking care of the threat on his “c” Pawn through centralizing his

119

Knight with 19 … Nd5. After 19 … Nd5, White has the comfortable choice between allowing for a Knight exchange with 20 a3 Nxb4 21 axb4, or of avoiding the Knight exchange with 20 Nd3. In either case, White has a nice advantage. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 20 dxc5 White eliminates Black’s menacing “c” Pawn. 20 … Qxc5 Black recovers his Pawn and brings his Queen into play by threatening White’s Knight on “c4”. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 21 Ne5

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdw4kd} {0wdwdp0p} {w0wdphwd} {dw1wHndw} {wHwdwdwd} {dw)wdQdw} {P)wdW)P)} {dwdR$wIw} vllllllllV


White gets his Knight out of attack and retakes the strong central outpost.

120


21 … Rad8 Black challenges White’s Rook on the open “d” file. However, Black’s Rook on “d8” becomes a target for White. It would be better for Black to reposition his Knight with 21 … Ne7 to cover “c6” and with the eventual idea of challenging White’s active Knight on “e5”. After 21 … Ne7, the game might continue 22 h3 a5 23 Nbc6 Nxc6 24 Qxc6 with White still retaining a nice advantage. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 22 Nbc6 White sinks his Knight deep into the enemy camp where it attacks Black’s Rook on “d8” and supports White’s other Knight on “e5”. This will force Black’s Rook to move and allow White to maintain control of the important “d” file. 22 … Rxd1 Black exchanges his threatened Rook. If Black played 22 … Rd5, then White would threaten the Rook once again with 23 c4. Backing away from the “d” file and applying pressure on White’s Knight on “c6” with 22 … Rc8 would quickly end in disaster for Black after 23 b4 Qb5 24 Nxa7.

23 Rxd1

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdw4kd} {0wdwdp0p} {w0Ndphwd} {dw1wHndw} {wdwdwdwd} {dw)wdQdw} {P)wdW)P)} {dwdRdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 123. Position after 23 Rxd1.

White recovers his Rook and dominates the important open “d” file. White’s control of the open “d” file, actively situated pieces and queenside Pawn majority all add up to give White a substantial advantage. 23 … a5? This turns an inferior position into a lost game. Black completely misses White’s subtle threat, which will now be executed. Black’s move is a total waste of time and accomplishes nothing since the “a” Pawn wasn’t threatened and the move doesn’t prevent the advance of White’s “b” Pawn. It will soon become apparent that Black should have created “luft” (a breathing square) for his King with 23 … h6; the game might continue 24 b4 Qb5 25 c4 (25 g4? is weak because of 25 … Nh4 26 Qg3 Qe2!) Qa6 26 Rd2 b5 27 c5. Black would end

Robert M. Snyder

121

up with a grossly inferior position, but this is preferable to the text move. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

Black gets his Queen out of attack and tries to post her as actively as possible. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

24 b4!

26 g4!

This is the beginning of White’s plan to drive away Black’s two pieces from covering the critical “e7” square. With this move Black’s Queen is first driven away from covering “e7”.

White now threatens Black’s last remaining defender of the critical “e7” square.

24 … axb4 Black exchanges his “a” Pawn, which is attacked twice, before getting his Queen out of attack. 25 cxb4 White recovers his Pawn and continues with his threat on Black’s Queen. 25 … Qc2

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdw4kd} {dwdwdp0p} {w0Ndphwd} {dwdwHndw} {w)wdwdwd} {dwdwdQdw} {PdqdW)P)} {dwdRdwIw} vllllllllV


26 … Nxg4 Black sacrifices his Knight for the menacing “g4” Pawn with a plan to recover the piece. The point of removing Black’s pieces from covering the “e7” square can now be clarified by showing what would happen if Black attacked White’s Queen with 26 … Nh4. White would now have a forced mate after 27 Ne7+ Kh8 28 Nxf7+ Rxf7 29 Rd8+ Rf8 30 Rxf8+ Ng8 31 Rxg8++. If Black played 26 … Nh6, then 27 g5 wins. 27 Qxg4 White wins Black’s Knight.

122


27 … f6

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdw4kd} {dwdwdw0p} {w0Ndp0wd} {dwdwHndw} {w)wdwdQd} {dwdwdwdw} {PdqdW)w)} {dwdRdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 125. Position after 27 … f6.

Black hopes to recover his piece by attacking White’s Knight on “e5”, which is the only piece defending White’s attacked Knight on “c6”. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 28 Ne7+!

here without looking at the next move in the game. 29 Qxe6+ This is the point behind White’s previous move. White’s Queen can now capture a Pawn and move in to assist with final execution. 29 … Kh8

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdw4wi} {dwdwhw0p} {w0wdQ0wd} {dwdwHwdw} {w)wdwdwd} {dwdwdwdw} {PdqdW)w)} {dwdRdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 126. Position after 29 … Kh8.

This is a nice tactical shot forcing a quick win! Black has a choice of capturing the Knight, which allows the entry of Black’s Queen into the attack, or allowing a quick mate.

Black gets his King out of attack. The only other move, 29 … Rf7, allows 30 Rd8++. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

28 … Nxe7

30 Rd8!

Black has nothing better than to remove the intruder. The alternative, 28 … Kh8 allows a quick mate after 29 Nf7+! Rxf7 30 Rd8+ Rf8 31 Rxf8++. See if you can find White’s best move

The final blow! White now threatens 31 Rxf8+. Black would allow the Philidor’s Legacy mate (a type of Smothered mate) if he captures White’s Rook with 30 … Rxd8, then White plays 31 Nf7+

Robert M. Snyder

Kg8 32 Nh6+ Kh8 33 Qg8+! Rxg8 34 Nf7++. 30 … Qc1+ Black has nothing better to do than to temporarily harass White’s King. Black would also quickly run out of checks after 30 … Qb1+ 31 Kg2 Qe4+ 32 Kh3. 31 Kg2 White gets his King out of check. 31 … Qg5+ Black continues to harass White’s King as long as he can. 32 Kf1

cuuuuuuuuC {wdw$w4wi} {dwdwhw0p} {w0wdQ0wd} {dwdwHw1w} {w)wdwdwd} {dwdwdwdw} {PdwdW)w)} {dwdwdKdw} vllllllllV Diagram 127. Position after 32 Kf1.

White begins to maneuver his King to where Black will run out of checks. Black resigned here. Black realized that he will run out of checks after 32 … Qc1+ 33 Ke2 Qc2+ 34 Kf3 Qc3+ 35

123

Kg2, when White’s threat of 36 Rxf8+ cannot be adequately met—if 35 … Rg8, then 36 Nf7++, and 35 … Rxd8 allows the Philidor’s Legacy mate given after White’s 30th move.

LESSON 14

center, then strike at it with his “e” or “c” Pawn.

The Bad Bishop

2 d4 Minic vs. Hulak Yugoslavia, 1974 Opening: Pirc Defense

White occupies the center with a second Pawn and frees the Bishop on the “c1h6” diagonal. This is White’s best move.

After making a mistake in the opening, Black allows White to pile up on his pinned Knight. This results in Black being a Pawn down, having an isolated “d” Pawn on an open file, and a “Bad Bishop.” Black’s dark-square weakness on the kingside gives White additional chances for attack and allows White to polish off his opponent quickly.

2 … Bg7

1 e4 g6

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kgn4} {0p0p0pdp} {wdwdwdpd} {dwdwdwdw} {wdwdPdwd} {dwdwdwdw} {P)P)W)P)} {$NGQIBHR} vllllllllV

Black completes his fianchetto and allows the Bishop to apply pressure directly to the center on the “h8-a1” diagonal. 3 Nc3 White develops his Knight toward the center. This defends the “e” Pawn, which will be attacked when Black eventually develops his Knight to “f6”. White avoids developing his other Knight to “f3” first since White wants to retain the option of using his “f ” Pawn and/or developing that Knight to “e2”. 3 … d6

Diagram 128. Position after 1 … g6.

Black initiates the Modern Defense. It often, as in this case, transposes into the Pirc Defense. Black prepares to fianchetto his Bishop to “g7”. Black’s plan is to allow White to build a Pawn -124-

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kdn4} {0p0w0pgp} {wdw0wdpd} {dwdwdwdw} {wdw)Pdwd} {dwHwdwdw} {P)PdW)P)} {$wGQIBHR} vllllllllV


Robert M. Snyder

125

This move is thematic in the Modern and Pirc Defenses. The most obvious ideas behind this move are: 1. It frees the Bishop on the “c8-h3” diagonal. 2. It opens up “d7” for possible use by Black’s Knight. 3. It covers the important “e5” square before developing a Knight to “f6”. 4. It prepares support for a possible counter action in the center by placing a Pawn on “e5” or “c5”. If 3 … Nf6?, then 4 e5 planning to meet 4 … Ng8 (4 … Nh5?? 5 g4) with 5 Bc4.

Nf3, which might continue 4 … Nf6 5 Be2 0-0 6 0-0 c6 7 Re1 Qc7 8 e5 dxe5 9 Nxe5 Be6 10 Bf4 Qc8 11 Bc4 Bxc4 12 Nxc4 Re8 13 Qf3 Na6 14 Rad1 and White stands better.

4 Nge2

White prepares to fianchetto his Bishop to “g2”. This move will also add support for the placement of a Pawn on “f4” (common in some variations).

I often recommend this lesser known idea to my students. White plans to fianchetto his Bishop to “g2” and, as a result, doesn’t mind blocking the Bishop on the “f1-a6” diagonal. By developing the Knight to “e2”, instead of “f3”, White retains the possibility of moving his Pawn to “f4”. However, the main lines briefly examined in the next two paragraphs are good enough to give White some advantage. White could continue to build a massive center with 4 f4. After 4 f4 a possible continuation is 4 … Nf6 5 Nf3 0-0 6 Bd3 Nc6 7 0-0 and White will retain a spatial advantage with Black getting some counter-play against White’s center. Another common possibility for White is straightforward development with 4

4 … Nf6 Black develops his Knight toward the center, puts pressure on White’s Pawn on “e4” and clears the way for castling. With the Knight on “f6” we have officially transposed into the Pirc Defense. 5 g3

5 … 0-0 Black removes his King from the center. 6 Bg2

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1w4kd} {0p0w0pgp} {wdw0whpd} {dwdwdwdw} {wdw)Pdwd} {dwHwdw)w} {P)PdN)B)} {$wGQIwdR} vllllllllV Diagram 130. Position after 6 Bg2.

126


White develops his Bishop, completes his fianchetto and clears the way to castle. This position could also have arisen from 1 e4 d6 2 d4 Nf6 (the Pirc Defense) 3 Nc3 g6 4 g3 Bg7 5 Bg2 0-0 6 Nge2. 6 … e5 This is the most common move played here. Black places a Pawn in the center, blockades the possible advance of White’s “e” Pawn and creates pressure on White’s “d” Pawn. We will now examine some other possibilities for Black: 1. 6 … Nbd7 7 0-0 c5 8 dxc5 Nxc5 9 Nf4 Bg4 10 Qe1 Bd7 11 Qe2 Bc6 12 Rd1 and White stands lightly better. 2. 6 … c6 7 0-0 e5 8 h3 (also playable is 8 a4 planning to meet 8 … a5 with 9 h3 Re8 10 Bg5 Nbd7 11 Qd2) Nbd7 9 Be3 Re8 10 f4 and White stands clearly better. 3. 6 … c5 7 dxc5 dxc5 8 Qxd8 Rxd8 9 e5 Nfd7 10 f4 and White stands clearly better. 4. 6 … Nc6 7 0-0 e5 8 dxe5 transposes into the actual game. 5. 6 … Na6 7 0-0 c5 8 e5 Ne8 9 Bf4 cxd4 10 Qxd4 Nc5 11 Qe3 Ne6 12 Rad1 Nxf4 13 Nxf4 and White stands better.

7 0-0 White gets his King out of the center and activates his kingside Rook. 7 … Nc6 Black develops his Knight toward the center, reinforces his “e” Pawn and puts pressure on White’s Pawn on “d4”. 8 dxe5 White releases the tension on his “d” Pawn and opens the “d” file to his favor. 8 … dxe5 Black recovers his Pawn and maintains a Pawn in the center. If 8 … Nxe5, then White gets a good game after 9 f4 Nc6 10 h3 Re8 11 Be3 Be6 12 Qd3 a6 13 a3 h6 14 Rad1. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 9 Bg5 White completes his minor piece development and pins Black’s Knight on “f6”. White now threatens to win a Pawn with 10 Qxd8 Nxd8 (if 10 … Rxd8, then 11 Nd5) 11 Bxf6 Bxf6 12 Nd5 Bg7 13 Nxc7.

Robert M. Snyder

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1w4kd} {0p0wdpgp} {wdndwhpd} {dwdw0wGw} {wdwdPdwd} {dwHwdw)w} {P)PdN)B)} {$wdQdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 131. Position after 9 Bg5.

9 … Nd4 Black is in no mood to just sit back and watch the show. He posts his Knight aggressively and, if given the move, would drive back White’s Bishop with 10 … h6. What seems to be the natural developing move of 9 … Be6 is met by 10 Nd5 Bxd5 11 exd5 Ne7 12 c4 h6 13 Bxf6 Bxf6 14 Re1 Bg7 15 Qb3 Rb8 16 Rad1 with a clear advantage for White. Also, if Black exchanges Queens with 9 … Qxd1, then White clearly comes out on top after 10 Raxd1 h6 11 Be3 Be6 12 Nd5. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 10 Nxd4 White eliminates Black’s actively posted Knight by exchanging.

127

10 … exd4? Black recovers his Knight and threatens White’s Knight on “c3”. However, this drives White’s Knight to a stronger square. It would be better for Black to recapture with his Queen and eliminate the menacing pin on his Knight with the offer of an exchange of Queens by 10 … Qxd4. After 10 … Qxd4 White would still have the better game after 11 h3 c6 12 Qf3 Qd6 13 Rad1 Qe7 14 Qe3. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 11 Nd5 White gets his Knight out of attack and increases pressure on Black’s pinned Knight. White is now threatening to attack Black’s Knight on “f6” a third time with either 12 Qf3 or 12 e5. 11 … c6?

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1w4kd} {0pdwdpgp} {wdpdwhpd} {dwdNdwGw} {wdw0Pdwd} {dwdwdw)w} {P)Pdw)B)} {$wdQdRIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 132. Position after 11 … c6.

128


This second mistake will turn an inferior position into a lost game for Black. Black attacks White’s aggressively posted Knight and plans to meet 12 Nxf6+ with 12 … Bxf6 13 Bxf6 Qxf6 leaving White with only a slight edge. Black’s best continuation is 11 … Be6 12 Qf3 Bxd5 13 exd5 Qd6 14 Bf4 Qb6 15 c4 Nd7 16 Qb3 and White stands better. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 12 e5! White continues to pile up on Black’s pinned Knight threatening to win it with either 13 Nxf6+, 13 exf6 or 13 Bxf6. 12 … cxd5 To avoid the loss of a piece, Black had no choice but to capture White’s menacing Knight. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 13 Qxd4! White wins a Pawn and uses his Queen to continue the pile up on Black’s pinned Knight. This also begins to put pressure on Black’s weak isolated “d” Pawn.

13 … Be6 Black gets his last minor piece developed and adds protection to his weak “d” Pawn. 14 Bxf6 White recovers his Knight using his Bishop to attack Black’s Queen and challenge Black’s dark squared Bishop.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdw1w4kd} {0pdwdpgp} {wdwdbGpd} {dwdp)wdw} {wdw!wdwd} {dwdwdw)w} {P)Pdw)B)} {$wdwdRIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 133. Position after 14 Bxf6.

14 … Bxf6 Black removes White’s aggressively posted Bishop and creates an interesting situation by bringing White’s Pawn to “f6”. The resulting Pawn on “f6” is somewhat of a double edged sword. Black hopes that this Pawn, which is far removed from being protected by other Pawns, will be weak and eventually captured. However, without a Black squared Bishop on the kingside, Black is extremely weak on the dark squares

Robert M. Snyder

and the Pawn on “f6” will allow Black to have potentially dangerous threats. 15 exf6 White recovers his Bishop. Black has what is called a “Bad Bishop” because most of his Pawns are on the same color as his Bishop and this restricts its movement. Some players would jokingly call this Bishop a tall Pawn! It is stuck in a defensive role, defending Black’s weak isolated Pawn on “d4”. White’s plan should consist of applying pressure to the weak “d” Pawn and trying to capitalize on potential mate threats created by Black’s dark squared weakness on the kingside. 15 … b6? Black takes time to eliminate the attack on his “a” Pawn. This puts a pin on his “d” Pawn (along the “h1-a8” diagonal) giving White a nice opportunity to take advantage of it. Black should have played more aggressively with 15 … Rc8 planning to meet 16 c3 with 16 … b5. 16 Rad1 White continues with his plan of increasing pressure on Black’s weak “d” Pawn by bringing his Rook into play on the half open “d” file. However, even stronger is 16 c4! planning to meet 16

129

… dxc4 with 17 Qf4. After 17 Qf4 White would be threatening 18 Bxa8 and 18 Rad1 (if the Queen gets out of attack, then White would force mate with 19 Qh6). 16 … Rc8 Black brings his Rook onto the half open “c” file, threatens White’s “c” Pawn, prevents the “c” Pawn from advancing to “c4” and removes the pin on the “d” Pawn. The Rook also has possibilities of defending the “d” Pawn by going to “c5” or counter attacking by going to “c4”. 17 c3 White removes the threat on his “c” Pawn and further secures the “d4” square. The ideas of restraint and attack are in full play here against Black’s isolated “d” Pawn.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdr1w4kd} {0wdwdpdp} {w0wdb)pd} {dwdpdwdw} {wdw!wdwd} {dw)wdw)w} {P)wdw)B)} {dwdRdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 134. Position after 17 c3.

130


17 … Rc5 Black adds a third defender to his isolated “d” Pawn. 18 Qf4 White’s Queen now attacks “h6”. This ties Black’s Queen to “d8” since she must keep White’s Pawn on “f6” under attack (if White’s Queen goes to “h6” threatening mate, Black saves himself with Qxf6). This move also opens up “d4” for possible use by White’s Rook. Also good for White is 18 Qh4. This move attacks the critical hole on “h6” and keeps open the option of White’s “f ” Pawn advancing to “f4”. From “f4” the Pawn has possibilities (depending on what Black does) of going to “f5” or being used in conjunction with the advance of White’s “g” Pawn to spearhead an attack. 18 … h6 Black seeks to eliminate the hole on “h6” and relieve his Queen of the troublesome task of being tied down on “d8”. One way for a player to eliminate a hole is to occupy it with a Pawn! 19 h4 White brings his “h” Pawn into the attack on the kingside. If White played 19 Qxh6, Black would defend with 19

… Qxf6. Black would still be lost, but could offer more resistance. 19 … Kh7

cuuuuuuuuC {wdw1w4wd} {0wdwdpdk} {w0wdb)p0} {dw4pdwdw} {wdwdw!w)} {dw)wdw)w} {P)wdw)Bd} {dwdRdRIw} vllllllllV


Black uses his King to defend on “h6”. Black’s Queen has now been freed! However, White now has a variety of ways to proceed to secure victory. White’s plan now is to improve the location of his Rooks and Bishop, possibly use the “h” and “g” Pawns to spearhead the opening of lines and to provoke Black to further weaken his kingside. Black avoided weakening his kingside further with 19 … h5?. After this move, White’s plan would be to play 20 Rfe1 to be followed by an attack with the threat of sacrifices against Black’s “h” Pawn with moves like Re5 and Bf3. 20 Rd4 White prepares to double his Rooks on the “d” file and increase the pressure

Robert M. Snyder

on Black’s weak “d” Pawn. Other winning moves for White were 20 h5 (immediately using the “h” Pawn to open lines on the kingside) or 20 Rfe1 (bringing the less active Rook onto the open “e” file). 20 … Re8 Black brings his inactive Rook onto the open “e” file. Black would have lasted longer by offering a Queen trade with 20 … Qb8. After 20 … Qb8 White could play 21 Qxb8 Rxb8 22 Rfd1 and Black’s fate is sealed. 21 Rfd1 White completes his plan of doubling his Rooks on the “d” file and is now threatening to attack Black’s “d” Pawn a fourth time with 22 c4. Also winning for White is to bring a Rook into play on the open “e” file with 21 Re1.

131

22 … Qc8 Black unpins his “d” Pawn and threatens White’s Bishop with 23 … dxe4. Black at this point is willing to give up the fight for his weak “d” Pawn.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdqdrdwd} {0wdwdpdk} {wdwdb)p0} {dp4pdwdw} {wdw$B!w)} {dw)wdw)w} {P)wdw)wd} {dwdRdwIw} vllllllllV


23 Bf3

Black attacks the “c4” square to restrain the advance of White’s “c” Pawn.

Once again, White had other ways to win: 1. Winning the “d” Pawn with 23 Bxd5 would have led to a won endgame after 23 … Bxd5 24 Rxd5 Rxd5 25 Rxd5. 2. Even stronger than the text move in the game is maintaining the pin on Black’s “g” Pawn by 23 Bd3 with the plan of playing 24 h5.

22 Be4

23 … Rd8

White’s Bishop jumps right into the center, pins Black’s “g” Pawn and prepares to continue the attack with 23 h5.

It is difficult to find constructive moves for Black in this position. Therefore, it is understandable and logical that Black

21 … b5

132


now decides to reinforce his “d” Pawn since White opted not to win it. 24 g4 White brings his “g” Pawn to assist with the assault on the kingside. However, it would be stronger to immediately provoke Black to weaken on the kingside with 24 h5 g5 25 Qe3.

25 … a6? This move is too slow and does nothing to stymie White’s kingside attack. Black should have challenged White’s Rook on “d4” by 25 … Rc4 with the plan of meeting 26 Re5 with 26 … Rxd4, which would slow down White’s attack. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

24 … Qc6 Black adds another defender to his “d” Pawn. The idea is to free the Rook on “c5” from being tied down to the “d” Pawn. Then the Rook may go to “c4” challenging White’s Rook in an attempt to relieve some of the pressure. 25 Re1

cuuuuuuuuC {wdw4wdwd} {0wdwdpdk} {wdqdb)p0} {dp4pdwdw} {wdw$w!P)} {dw)wdBdw} {P)wdw)wd} {dwdw$wIw} vllllllllV Diagram 137. Position after 25 Re1.

White plans to relocate the Rook on “e5” where it will not only keep the pressure on Black’s “d” Pawn but will assist in the attack on the kingside.

26 Re5 White continues with his plan to bring his Rook to an awesome central post where it not only applies pressure to Black’s weak “d” Pawn but also assists with the kingside attack. White would like to play 27 Be4! (if 27 … dxe4, then 28 Rxd8 wins easily), threatening 28 Qxh6+! Kxh6 29 Rh5+! gxh5 30 g5++ (a problem like finish!), or 28 Rh5 also forcing mate. 26 … Qc7 Black prevents White’s threat of 27 Be4 by defending his Rook on “d8”. Black also sets up a defensive Queen exchange if White’s Rook on “e5” should move. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

Robert M. Snyder

133

27 Be2

28 Rh5!

White plans to reposition his Bishop on the “b1-h7” diagonal by going to “d3”.

Black resigned here. White’s immediate threat is 29 Qxh6+ Kg8 30 Qh8++ or 30 Qg7++. If 28 … gxh5, then 29 Bd3+ planning to meet 29 … Kg8 with 30 Qxh6 followed by 31 Qg7++.

27 … Qd7?

cuuuuuuuuC {wdw4wdwd} {dwdqdpdk} {pdwdb)p0} {dp4p$wdw} {wdw$w!P)} {dw)wdwdw} {P)wdB)wd} {dwdwdwIw} vllllllllV


It would be better for Black to retain his Queen on the “b8-h2” diagonal to allow a Queen exchange if White’s Rook on “e5” moved. However, even with better defense Black’s game would quickly collapse. If 27 … Rg8, then 28 h5 g5 29 Bd3+ Kh8 30 Qe3 and Black has no satisfactory way of defending this position. White’s plan of playing 31 Bb1 followed by 32 Qd3 and 33 Qh7++ is devastating. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

LESSON 15

2 … g6 Black transposes into the Modern Defense by preparing to fianchetto his Bishop to “g7”. If Black played 2 … d5, this would be the Caro-Kann, covered in LESSON THIRTEEN in Unbeatable Chess Lessons.

Taking Advantage of an Uncommitted King Robert Snyder vs. Sergey Kalinitchew 2001 Opening: Modern Defense

3 Nc3

White obtains an advantage in space along with the Bishop pair early in the opening. Black ends up in a situation where castling on either side is dangerous. White then takes command of the “c” file and the threat of penetration forces Black’s King from the center. White’s focus then shifts to the kingside where Black’s King is exposed to attack. After obtaining an outside passed “h” Pawn, it is advanced to assist in the final execution of Black’s King.

White develops his Knight toward the center and defends his “e” Pawn. Since there is a distinct possibility of this Pawn being attacked by either Black’s Pawn going to “d5” or Knight going to “f6” in the near future, this is White’s most logical and least committing developing move.

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kgn4} {0pdp0pdp} {wdpdwdpd} {dwdwdwdw} {wdw)Pdwd} {dwHwdwdw} {P)PdW)P)} {$wGQIBHR} vllllllllV

1 e4 c6 This starts off as a Caro-Kann Defense, but quickly transposes into the Modern Defense. 2 d4 White isn’t challenged in the center so he takes command of it with his “d” Pawn.

Diagram 139. Position after 3 Nc3.

3 … Bg7 Black completes his fianchetto and directly attacks the center with his Bishop.

-134-

Robert M. Snyder

135

4 Nf3

5 Be2

White develops his Knight toward the center. Once again this is the least committing move for White. More often than not it is easier to establish where you want to place your Knights than your Bishops. And, “f3” and “c3” (“f6” and “c6” for Black) are, more often than not, the most natural squares for development of your Knights.

White develops his Bishop and opens up the possibility of castling on the kingside. Since Black’s Bishop is likely to go to “g4” White’s Bishop will be effective on “e2”.

4 … d6 Black frees his Bishop on the “c8-h3” diagonal, opens up “d7” for his Knight and covers the important “e5” square. If Black plays more aggressively with 4 … d5, then White would prevent the pin of his Knight on “f3” with 5 h3, which might then continue 5 … dxe4 (if 5 … Nf6, then 6 e5 and now 6 … Nfd7 7 Bd3 Nf8 8 0-0 Ne6 9 Ne2, or 6 … Ne4 7 Nxe4 dxe4 8 Ng5 c5 9 e6 Bxe6 10 Nxe6 fxe6 11 dxc5 and White stands clearly better in both variations) 6 Nxe4 Nd7 (if 6 … Bf5, then 7 Ng3 Be6 8 Be2 c5 9 dxc5 Qxd1+ 10 Bxd1 Nd7 11 Be2 Nxc5 12 0-0 Nf6 13 Be3 Rc8 14 c3 0-0 15 Nd4 Bd7 16 Rfd1 and White stands better) 7 Bc4 Ngf6 8 Nxf6+ Nxf6 9 0-0 0-0 10 Re1 Bf5 11 c3 Qc7 12 Qe2 Rfe8 13 Ne5 Nd5 14 Qf3 and White is better.

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kdn4} {0pdw0pgp} {wdp0wdpd} {dwdwdwdw} {wdw)Pdwd} {dwHwdNdw} {P)PdB)P)} {$wGQIwdR} vllllllllV Diagram 140. Position after 5 Be2.

5 … Bg4 This is the only decent square for this Bishop. Therefore, Black gets the Bishop developed before blocking the “c8-h3” diagonal (when he develops his Knight to “d7”). A reasonable alternative is 5 … Nf6, which might continue 6 0-0 0-0 7 Re1 transposing into main lines of the Pirc. 6 h3 White attacks Black’s Bishop and forces it to either retreat to an inferior square or be exchanged for White’s Knight. Also good is 6 0-0 Nd7 7 Re1.

136


6 … Bxf3 Black takes care of the threat on his Bishop by exchanging it for White’s Knight. 7 Bxf3 White recovers his piece. White has a very comfortable game because he has both a spatial advantage and the Bishop pair.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdw1kdn4} {0pdn0pgp} {wdp0wdpd} {dwdwdwdw} {wdw)Pdwd} {dwHwGBdP} {P)Pdw)Pd} {$wdQIwdR} vllllllllV Diagram 141. Position after 8 Be3.

7 … Nd7

8 … e6

Black develops his queenside Knight to its most active available square. Also playable is 7 … Qb6, which might continue 8 Ne2 Nf6 9 0-0 Nbd7 10 c3 0-0 11 Qc2 and White stands better.

Black opens up the “e7” square for his Knight and adds support for the placement of a Pawn on “d5”. However, at this point there is nothing wrong with the straightforward development of the Knight with 8 … Ngf6, which might continue 9 Qd3 0-0 10 0-0 Qc7 11 Rfe1 and White stands better.

8 Be3 White develops his Bishop, completes his minor piece development and adds a second defender to his “d” Pawn. White also keeps open the choice of which side to castle. However, it would be reasonable for White to castle right away with 8 0-0, which might continue 8 … Ngf6 9 Re1 00 10 Qd3 Qa5 11 Be3 and White stands better.

9 Qd3 White’s Queen is placed on a more active post and opens up the possibility of castling queenside. 9 … Ne7 Black completes his minor piece development. If Black develops his Knight to “f6”, it is a potential target for White’s Pawns. If 9 … Ngf6, the game might continue 10 0-0-0 0-0 11 g4 d5 12 g5 dxe4 13 Nxe4 Nxe4 14 Qxe4. White would not only have a

Robert M. Snyder

nice spatial advantage and the Bishop pair but also attacking chances on the kingside. White’s plan in this instance is to advance his “h” Pawn. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 10 h4!

cuuuuuuuuC {rdw1kdw4} {0pdnhpgp} {wdp0pdpd} {dwdwdwdw} {wdw)Pdw)} {dwHQGBdw} {P)Pdw)Pd} {$wdwIwdR} vllllllllV Diagram 142. Position after 10 h4.

White takes advantage of the absence of a Black Knight at “f6” (which would cover the “h5” and “g4” squares) to expand on the kingside. Black now lacks a comfortable place to locate his King. If 10 … 0-0, White gets a strong attack after 11 h5. If Black castles queenside with 10 … Qa5 11 h5 0-0-0, then White has a good game after 12 h6. 10 … h5 Black restrains the advance of White’s “h” Pawn at the expense of weakening his kingside. After this, Black must put aside any thoughts of castling kingside

137

because White would have the natural break of moving a Pawn to “g4”. 11 0-0-0 White removes his King from the center and brings his queenside Rook into play. White is nicely situated to continue his expansion in the center and on the kingside. 11 … d5 Black finally places a Pawn in the center with the idea of restricting White’s expansion. A move to be considered here is 11 … Qa5 to bring the Queen actively into play and clear the way for queenside castling. After 11 … Qa5 the game might continue 12 Kb1 0-0-0 13 Rhe1 and White is clearly better. 12 Kb1 This consolidating move has two ideas behind it: 1. It shores-up the safety of White’s King by moving him even further away from the center and adds protection to the “a” Pawn. This is an often used idea when castling queenside. 2. It is part of a long term plan by White to open up “c1” for use by a Rook if his “c” Pawn is advanced.

138


12 … Nb6

cuuuuuuuuC {rdw1kdw4} {0pdwhpgw} {whpdpdpd} {dwdpdwdp} {wdw)Pdw)} {dwHQGBdw} {P)Pdw)Pd} {dKdRdwdR} vllllllllV

Diagram 143. Position after 12 … Nb6.

Black’s Knight heads toward the strong outpost on “c4”. Black’s idea is that White will need to weaken himself (move a Pawn to “b3”) on the queenside to prevent the Knight from staying on “c4”. However, White will later turn the Pawn on “b3” into a strong point. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 13 Bg5 White takes advantage of Black’s darksquare weaknesses by repositioning his Bishop and pinning Black’s Knight on “e7”. White is not concerned about Black driving his Bishop back with 13 … f6 because this would block out his own Bishop along the “h8-a1” diagonal and drive White’s Bishop to the “h2b8” diagonal after 14 Bf4.

13 … Qc7 Black brings his Queen to a more active square, places her on the “b8-h2” diagonal and unpins his Knight. 14 e5 The reasons behind this move are: 1. It shuts down the “b8-h2” diagonal for Black’s Queen and the “h8-a1” diagonal for Black’s Bishop. 2. It gains a strong foothold on Black’s weak “f6” square. The weak points of this move are: 1. Black now has an opportunity to prepare to strike at the base of White’s Pawn chain with his “c” Pawn. 2. Black’s Knight has the “f5” square available to it. It would be more accurate to maintain the tension in the center and increase pressure on the potentially open “e” file with 14 Rhe1. 14 … Nc4 Black immediately takes the outpost for his Knight. Instead, Black should have prepared to strike at White’s Pawn base with his “c” Pawn by playing 14 … a6, which might continue 15 Ne2 c5 16 c3 although White still stands better. It would be weak to play 14 … c5 because of 15 Nb5 Qc6 16 Nd6+.

Robert M. Snyder

15 Na4 White attacks the “c5” square. This restrains the advance of Black’s “c” Pawn and makes “c5” a potential post for White’s Knight. The move also allows for the advance of White’s “c” Pawn. However, it would be slightly stronger to drive Black’s Knight away with 15 b3 Nb6 16 g4 hxg4 17 Bxg4.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdkdw4} {0p1whpgw} {wdpdpdpd} {dwdp)wGp} {Ndn)wdw)} {dwdQdBdw} {P)Pdw)Pd} {dKdRdwdR} vllllllllV

Diagram 144. Position after 15 Na4.

139

Pawn will support the placement of a Pawn on “c4”. 16 … Na5 Black gets his Knight out of attack. White would also come out on top after 16 … Na3+ 17 Kb2 Nb5 18 c3 (18 c4? Nxd4!). See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 17 Rhe1 White brings his Rook to the active central file and reinforces the “e” Pawn. This is in anticipation of the possibility of Black trying to undermine the defense of White’s “e” Pawn by moving his Pawn to “c5”.

15 … b6

17 … Nf5

Black prevents White’s Knight from entering “c5” and supports the possible placement of a Pawn on “c5”. However, it would be better for Black to bring his other Knight into play with 15 … Nf5, which might continue 16 b3 Na3+ (if 16 … Nb6, then 17 Nc5) 17 Kc1 with White maintaining some advantage.

Black’s Knight finally comes to life and occupies the strong post on “f5”. From there it applies pressure to White’s “d” and “h” Pawns. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

16 b3 Black’s Knight is driven away from its active post on “c4” and White’s “b”

18 Nb2 White repositions his Knight to where it can support the placement of a Pawn on “c4” or possibly go to “d3”. White’s Pawn break points are on “c4” and “g4”. Often timing is important and

140


White wants to be sure that proper preparations have been made for either break. Black has the same problems as before; his King remains in the center where White is strongly situated and White has a spatial advantage as well as the Bishop pair. Currently the Bishop pair isn’t a significant advantage because of the closed position, but in the long run this position is likely to open up.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdkdw4} {0w1wdpgw} {w0pdpdpd} {hwdp)nGp} {wdw)wdw)} {dPdQdBdw} {PHPdw)Pd} {dKdR$wdw} vllllllllV

Diagram 145. Position after 18 Nb2.

18 … Nb7? This is too slow. Black should have tried to prevent White from playing “c4” with 18 … b5. The game might continue 19 g4! hxg4 (if 19 … Nxh4, then 20 Be2 hxg4 21 Rh1 Nf5 22 Rxh8+ Bxh8 23 Rh1 Bg7 24 Bxg4 and Black is in bad shape) 20 Bxg4 Nh6 21 Bh3 and White stands better. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

19 c4 White puts his plan in action. He restrains Black’s queenside Pawns, applies pressure in the center and plans to open and use the “c” file to his advantage. 19 … Rc8 Black realizes that White will have an opportunity to open the “c” file and place a Rook on it. Therefore, Black brings his Rook onto the “c” file in an attempt to contest it. However, you don’t need to look too deep to see that White will win control of the file. 20 cxd5 White continues with his plan of opening up the “c” file for his Rook. 20 … cxd5 Black recovers his Pawn and seems to dominate the recently opened “c” file. However, Black’s occupation of the “c” file will be short lived. Black is losing after 20 … exd5 21 g4 hxg4 (if 21 … Ne7, then 22 gxh5 gxh5 23 Qe2 and Black’s “h’ Pawn falls or White continues to build pressure with 23 Rg1) 22 Bxg4 Qd7 23 h5 Qe6 24 Qa6. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

Robert M. Snyder

21 Rc1

22 … Qxc8

White attacks Black’s Queen and continues with his plan to take control of the “c” file.

Black recovers his Rook.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdrdkdw4} {0n1wdpgw} {w0wdpdpd} {dwdp)nGp} {wdw)wdw)} {dPdQdBdw} {PHwdw)Pd} {dK$w$wdw} vllllllllV Diagram 146. Position after 21 Rc1.

21 … Qd7 Black gets his Queen out of attack, keeps his Rook on “c8” protected and covers the “e8-a4” diagonal. Immediate disaster would result after 21 … Qb8? 22 Qb5+ Kf8 23 Rxc8+ Qxc8 24 Rc1 Qe8 (if 24 Qb8, then 24 … Qd7) 25 Qa6 planning to meet 25 … Qb8 with 26 Qxa7!. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 22 Rxc8+ White removes Black’s Rook from the “c” file and sets up Black’s Queen as a target once again.

141

23 Rc1 White attacks Black’s Queen and takes command of the open “c” file. 23 … Qd7 Black gets his Queen out of attack and covers the “e8-a4” diagonal. Once again 23 … Qb8 would result in immediate disaster after 24 Qb5+ Kf8 25 Qd7. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdkdw4} {0ndqdpgw} {w0wdpdpd} {dwdp)nGp} {wdw)wdw)} {dPdQdBdw} {PHwdw)Pd} {dK$wdwdw} vllllllllV


24 Be2! White repositions his Bishop on the active “f1-a6” diagonal threatening 25 Qb5 followed by penetrating on the “c” file.

142


24 … 0-0 Due to White’s threat of 25 Qb5, Black is compelled to remove his King from the center. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 25 g4 Now that Black committed his King by castling, White shifts his attack to the kingside. White attacks Black’s Knight and “h” Pawn. This leads to the opening of lines against Black’s weakened castled position. 25 … hxg4 Black removes White’s menacing “g” Pawn. 26 Bxg4

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdw4kd} {0ndqdpgw} {w0wdpdpd} {dwdp)nGw} {wdw)wdB)} {dPdQdwdw} {PHwdw)sd} {dK$wdwdw} vllllllllV

Diagram 148. Position after 26 Bxg4.

White recovers his Pawn with the threat of opening more lines and further

breaking up Black’s kingside by an advance of his “h” Pawn. 26 … Rc8? The “c” file will be almost useless to Black. This gives White valuable time to shift his Rook to the attack on the kingside. Black’s only chance for survival is 26 … f6 27 exf6 Bxf6 28 Bxf6 Rxf6 29 Qe2! Nbd6 (if 29 … Nxd4? or 29 … Nxh4?, then 30 Qe5 wins) 30 Qe5 with a very difficult position for Black. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 27 Rh1 White avoids an exchange of Rooks and shifts his Rook to the attack on the kingside. White now threatens to open up more lines on the kingside with 28 h5. 27 … Qc7 Black attempts to get counter-play by applying pressure along the open “c” file and to White’s Pawn on “e5”. White must concern himself with the possibility of Black sacrificing his Knight on “d4” followed by capturing the “e” Pawn. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

Robert M. Snyder

143

28 Bxf5

29 … Kf8

White removes Black’s strongly posted Knight, which is applying pressure to White’s “d” Pawn.

Black removes his King from the attack along the “g” file. If 29 … Kh7, then White wins after 30 Qe2 Rh8 31 Bf6 Rg8 32 Qh5+ Bh6 33 Qxh6+! Kxh6 34 Rxg8 (threatening 35 Rh8+ Kg6 36 h5++) f4 (if 34 … Kh5, then 35 f3) 35 h5 (threatening 36 Rh8++) Kxh5 36 Nd3 (threatening 37 Nxf4+ Kh6 38 Rh8++) Kh6 37 Nxf4 and Black must lose his Queen to avoid 38 Rh8++ (i.e. 37 … Qd8 38 Bxd8). See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

28 … gxf5 Black recovers his piece. Recapturing with 28 … exf5 was the lesser of two evils. This would leave Black with a weak isolated “d” Pawn and White with a strong attack after 29 h5.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdrdwdkd} {0n1wdpgw} {w0wdpdwd} {dwdp)pGw} {wdw)wdw)} {dPdQdwdw} {PHwdw)sd} {dKdwdwdR} vllllllllV

30 h5 White’s outside passed Pawn is used to assist in the attack. As it gets closer to the 8th rank it will have threats of Queening.

Diagram 149. Position after 28 … gxf5.

29 Rg1 White’s Rook is placed on the open “g” file, aiming at Black’s exposed King. White threatens 30 Bf6 or 30 Bh6. Slightly more accurate for White is the zwischenzug (a German word meaning “in-between move”) 29 Rc1 to first drive Black’s Queen off the “c” file and then, after 29 … Qd7, to play 30 Rg1. In either case Black is lost at this point.

30 … Qc3 Black attempts to slow down White’s attack by challenging his Queen. Black’s situation would be hopeless after 30 … Bh8 31 h6 f6 32 Bxf6 Bxf6 33 exf6 Qh2 34 Qg3. 31 h6 White ignores Black’s Queen and threatens Black’s Bishop with the deadly advance of his “h” Pawn.

144


31 … Bh8 Black resists the loss of material for as long as possible by getting his Bishop out of attack and setting up a blockade on Black’s passed “h” Pawn. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdrdwiwg} {0ndwdpdw} {w0wdpdw)} {dwdp)pGw} {wdw)wdwd} {dP1Qdwdw} {PHwdw)sd} {dKdwdw$w} vllllllllV

Diagram 150. Position after 31 … Bh8.

32 Bf6 White attacks Black’s Bishop, which has no way of being defended, and opens the “g” file for his Rook. White plans to exchange Bishops and clear the way for the advance of his “h” Pawn.

covers the “e7” and “g7” squares. This allows White to set up mating threats against Black’s King. At this point Black is dead in the water and can do nothing except to wait for death to occur. 33 … Qxd3+ This frees Black’s Rook from being tied down to the defense of his Queen. However, the Queen exchange will do nothing to help matters on the kingside. 34 Nxd3

cuuuuuuuuC {wdrdwiwd} {0ndwdpdw} {w0wdp)w)} {dwdpdpdw} {wdw)wdwd} {dPdNdwdw} {Pdwdw)sd} {dKdwdw$w} vllllllllV

Diagram 151. Position after 34 Nxd3.

White recovers his Queen. 32 … Bxf6 Once again, Black resists the loss of material by exchanging his threatened Bishop. 33 exf6 White recovers his Bishop and brings a Pawn to “f6”. On “f6” White’s Pawn

34 … Rc3 Black tries to distract White from advancing his “h” Pawn by attacking White’s unprotected Knight on “c3”. Trying to make a run for it with 34 … Ke8 allows White’s Pawn to Queen after 35 Rg8+ Kd7 36 h7.

Robert M. Snyder

See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 35 h7 White ignores the attack on his Knight and continues with his plan to advance his “h” Pawn with the threat of 36 Rg8++. 35 … Rxd3 This is Black’s way of resigning since it would be ridiculous to play on after 35 … Ke8 36 h8=Q+. 36 Rg8++

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdwiRd} {0ndwdpdP} {w0wdp)wd} {dwdpdpdw} {wdw)wdwd} {dPdrdwdw} {Pdwdw)sd} {dKdwdwdw} vllllllllV

Diagram 152. Position after 36 Rg8.

Also 36 h8=Q++ or 36 h8=R++ would have done the trick!

145

LESSON 16

is to provoke White to overextend his Pawn center, which will then become a target. White’s plan is to obtain a strong Pawn center and a spatial advantage. White must be careful because it is easy to lose control of the Pawns and allow Black’s plan to become successful.

Position Under Siege Sax vs. Hecht Amsterdam, 1972 Opening: Alekhine’s Defense White uses his “e” Pawn to create a wedge in the enemy camp and to cramp Black’s game. White provokes Black to weaken on the kingside. After Black makes the mistake of castling on the kingside he ends up in a position where he can do little but wait for White’s assault. After a sloppy defense by Black, White delivers a devastating blow by sacrificing a piece to expose Black’s King to a deadly attack. 1 e4 Nf6

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kgw4} {0p0p0p0p} {wdwdwhwd} {dwdwdwdw} {wdwdPdwd} {dwdwdwdw} {P)P)W)P)} {$NGQIBHR} vllllllllV

2 e5 White gets his Pawn out of attack and threatens Black’s Knight on “f6”. This aggressive move is White’s only realistic attempt to get a significant advantage out of the opening. White’s only other reasonable move, 2 Nc3, allows Black to transpose into the Vienna Game with 2 … e5 or obtain approximate equality with 2 … d5. After 2 … d5 the game might continue 3 e5 (if 3 exd5, then 3 … Nxd5 4 Bc4 Nb6 5 Bb3 Nc6 6 Nf3 Bf5 7 a4 a5 8 0-0 e6 9 d4 Be7) d4 4 exf6 dxc3 5 fxg7 cxd2+ 6 Bxd2 Bxg7. 2 … Nd5

Diagram 153. Position after 1 … Nf6.

Black initiates Alekhine’s Defense. Black develops his Knight and threatens White’s “e” Pawn. Black’s idea

Black gets his Knight out of attack. This is the only good active square for the Knight. If 2 … Ne4, Black’s Knight is in danger of being trapped after 3 d4. A possible continuation might be 3 … e6 (if 3 … f6, then 4 Bd3 d5 5 Nc3 planning to meet 5 … Bf5 with 6 Qf3, or 5 … f5 with 6 Nce2 or 5 … Nxc3? with 6 Qh5+) 4 Nh3 h6 (if 4 … Nc6,

-146-

Robert M. Snyder

then 5 Bd3 is strong) 5 Qg4 d5 6 f3 h5 7 Qf4 g5 8 Nxg5 Nxg5 9 Qxg5. 3 d4 White occupies the center with another Pawn, frees his queenside pieces and provides protection to White’s advanced “e” Pawn. Black holds his own after 3 Nc3 Nxc3 and now if 4 bxc3 or 4 dxc3, then 4 … d6. 3 … d6

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kgw4} {0p0w0p0p} {wdw0wdwd} {dwdn)wdw} {wdw)wdwd} {dwdwdwdw} {P)PdW)P)} {$NGQIBHR} vllllllllV


Black applies pressure to White’s Pawn center by attacking White’s “e” Pawn and freeing his Bishop on the “c8-h3” diagonal. It would be a mistake to immediately develop the other Knight with 3 … Nc6? because 4 c4 Nb6 (better is 4 … Ndb4 5 Nf3 e6 6 Nc3 d5 7 a3 Na6 8 cxd5 exd5 9 Bd3 though White has a substantial positional advantage) 5 d5 Nxe5 6 c5 Nbc4 7 Qd4 b5 8 cxb6e.p. c5 9 Qc3 and one of the Knights must die!

147

4 Bc4 White develops his Bishop and threatens Black’s Knight on “d5”. The most common move played here is 4 Nf3, which will be covered in LESSON EIGHTEEN. White’s most aggressive move 4 c4 leads to the “Four Pawns” or “Chase” Variation after 4 … Nb6 5 f4. White obtains a massive Pawn center, which can be effectively attacked by Black. After 4 c4 Nb6 5 f4 the game might continue 5 … dxe5 6 fxe5 Nc6 7 Be3 Bf5 8 Nc3 e6 9 Nf3 Qd7 10 Be2 0-0-0 11 0-0 Bg4 12 c5 Nd5 13 Nxd5 Qxd5 14 Ng5 Bxe2 15 Qxe2 Nxd4 16 Bxd4 Qxd4+ 17 Kh1 Qd2 18 Qxd2 Rxd2 19 Rxf7 Bxc5 20 Nxe6 Bb6 with a fairly even game. 4 … Nb6 Black gets his Knight out of attack and threatens White’s Bishop on “c4”. We will examine some other possibilities for Black: 1. 4 … dxe5 5 dxe5 e6 6 Nf3 Nc6 7 0-0 Be7 8 Qe2 0-0 9 Re1 and Black has an extremely cramped and uncomfortable position. 2. 4 … e6. Blocking the “c8-h3” diagonal for the Bishop leads to a difficult game for Black after 5 Nf3 Be7 6 0-0 0-0 7 Re1 Nc6 8 c3 and White is clearly better.

148


3. 4 … c6. Of the three alternatives given to the text move, this is the strongest. The game might continue 5 Nf3 Bg4 6 h3 Bxf3 7 Qxf3 e6 8 Qg3 dxe5 9 dxe5 Nd7 10 0-0 Qc7 11 Re1 0-0-0 12 Nd2 and White stands slightly better. 5 Bb3 White gets his Bishop out of attack, keeps it on the long “a2-g8” diagonal and continues to apply pressure on Black’s “f ” Pawn. 5 … dxe5 This is Black’s most aggressive and forcing variation. He opens the “d” file for his Queen and threatens White’s “d” Pawn. Black’s less aggressive choices favor White: 1. 5 … Nc6. This allows White to make a strong Pawn sacrifice to cramp Black’s game and give Black a weak Pawn on “e6”. The game might continue 6 e6! fxe6 7 Nf3 e5 (Black is willing to return the Pawn to gain some freedom) 8 dxe5 d5 9 Nc3 e6 (if 9 … Bg4, then 10 Nxd5 e6 11 Bg5 Bxf3 12 gxf3 Qxg5 13 Nxc7+ Kf7 14 Bxe6+ Kg6 15 f4 Qg2 16 f5+ Kh6 17 Qd2+ and White is winning) 10 Ne2 Bc5 11 c3 0-0 12 Nf4 and White stands clearly better.

After 5 … Nc6 6 e6! fxe6 7 Nf3, Black’s other choices are: a. 7 … Na5 8 Ng5 Nxb3 9 axb3 Nd5 10 0-0 g6 11 Qf3 Nf6 12 Re1 Be7 13 Nc3 0-0 14 Nxe6 Bxe6 15 Rxe6 Qd7 16 Qh3 d5. b. 7 … d5 8 Nc3 g6 9 h4 Bg7 10 h5 e5 11 Nxe5 Nxe5 12 dxe5 Bxe5 13 Nxd5 Nxd5 14 Qxd5 Qxd5 15 Bxd5 c6 16 Bb3. c. 7 … g6 8 Ng5 and now: • if 8 … d5, then 9 Qf3 Nxd4 10 Qf7+ Kd7 11 c3 Nxb3 12 axb3 Bh6 13 Qxe6+ Ke8 14 Qf7+ Kd7 15 Qf3. • if 8 … Bg7 then 9 Bxe6 Rf8 10 d5 Nd4 11 0-0. 2. 5 … Bf5. This allows White to take advantage of Black’s weak points on “f7” and “b7” with 6 Qf3 Qc8 7 Bxf7+ Kxf7 8 g4 e6 9 gxf5 exf5 10 Nh3 Nc6 11 Qb3+ d5 12 Be3 a5 13 a3 and White is clearly better. 3. 5 … e6. Black blocks his Bishop on the “c8-h3” diagonal and makes it easy for White’s to get an advantage. A possible continuation is 6 Nf3 Nc6 7 Qe2 dxe5 8 dxe5 Nd4 9 Nxd4 Qxd4 10 0-0 Bd7 11 Nc3 Bc6 12 Rd1 Qc5 13 Bf4. 4. 5 … g6. This allows White to take advantage of Black’s weakness on “f7” and provoke Black to move his “d” Pawn a second time. 6 Qf3

Robert M. Snyder

d5 7 Ne2 Bg7 8 0-0 0-0 9 Re1 and White has a clear advantage. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kgw4} {0p0w0p0p} {whwdwdwd} {dwdw0wdw} {wdw)wdwd} {dBdwdwdw} {P)PdW)P)} {$NGQIwHR} vllllllllV

Diagram 155. Position after 5 … dxe5.

149

Black’s Bishop on the “c8-h3” diagonal, but this is the lesser of two evils. If 6 … g6, White would play 7 Qxe5 threatening Black’s Rook, which would give Black the unpleasant choice of either weakening his kingside with 7 … f6 8 Qe3 or losing his ability to castle on the kingside with 7 … Rg8 8 Nc3. 7 dxe5 White recovers his Pawn. White’s aggressively placed Pawn on “e5” will cramp Black’s position. Black hopes to be able to attack the Pawn on “e5” and make it a target.

6 Qh5

7 … Nc6

White removes his Queen from the “d” file before recovering his Pawn. White now threatens 7 Bxf7+ Kd7 8 Qxe5. As a general rule, bringing out the Queen aggressively this early in the game isn’t recommended. However, in this case White’s Queen isn’t an easy target for Black and she will give White some attacking chances on the kingside. Not 6 dxe5? because White would lose his ability to castle after 6 … Qxd1+ 7 Kxd1.

Black develops his Knight toward the center and applies pressure to the Pawn on “e5”. Black’s common alternative 7 … a5 (threatening to win White’s Bishop with 8 … a4) will be covered in LESSON SEVENTEEN. If 7 … c5 (threatening to win White’s Bishop with 8 … c4), then 8 c3 gives White a comfortable game.

6 … e6 Black defends against the threat on his “f ” Pawn by blocking White’s Bishop on the “a2-g8” diagonal. This also block’s

8 Nf3 White develops his Knight toward the center, reinforces the defense of his “e” Pawn, and clears the way for castling on the kingside.

150


cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kgw4} {0p0wdp0p} {whndpdwd} {dwdw)wdQ} {wdwdwdwd} {dBdwdNdw} {P)PdW)P)} {$NGwIwdR} vllllllllV Diagram 156. Position after 8 Nf3.

8 … g6 At the expense of weakening the dark squares on the kingside Black drives White’s Queen away from her strong post on “h5” and from the defense of the Pawn on “e5”. It would be better for Black to play 8 … a5, threatening 9 … a4. After 8 … a5 the game might continue 9 a4 Nd4 (if 9 … Bb4+, then 10 Nbd2 Nd4 11 Nxd4 Bxd2+ 12 Bxd2 Qxd4 13 0-0-0) 10 Nxd4 Qxd4 11 0-0 g6 12 Qg5 Bg7 13 Re1 h6 14 Qg3 Nd7 15 c3 Qc5 16 Bf4 and White has a clear advantage. White is clearly better after 8 … Nd4 9 Nc3 Nxf3+ 10 Qxf3 Qd4 11 Bf4 Bd7 12 Rd1 Qc5 13 0-0. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

9 Qg4 White gets his Queen out of attack and keeps her actively posted. On “g4” she covers the entire “4th” rank and continues to apply pressure on the kingside. 9 … h6 At the expense of further weakening his kingside, Black prevents the possible entry of White’s Bishop on “g5”. There are often trade offs and these must be carefully balanced when weakening your Pawn structure. Black’s alternative to weakening his kingside is to fianchetto and increase pressure on White’s “e” Pawn with 9 … Bg7. However, after 9 … Bg7, Black ends up weakening his kingside further anyway after 10 Bg5 Ne7 11 Nc3 h6 12 Rd1 Bd7 13 Be3. 10 Nc3 White develops his Knight toward the center where it restricts Black’s use of “d5” and has the potential of going to “e4” to increase pressure on Black’s weak dark squares. 10 … Bg7 Black completes his fianchetto with the threat of 11 … Nxe5. As mentioned previously Black’s plan is to seek counter-play by attacking White’s advanced “e” Pawn.

Robert M. Snyder

11 Bf4

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kdw4} {0p0wdpgw} {whndpdp0} {dwdw)wdw} {wdwdwGQd} {dBHwdNdw} {P)PdW)P)} {$wdwIwdR} vllllllllV Diagram 157. Position after 11 Bf4.

White develops his last minor piece and defends his threatened “e” Pawn. This also allows White to bring his Rook into play on the open “d” file at a time of his choosing. A slightly stronger alternative is to reinforce the “e” Pawn with 11 Qg3, planning to meet 11 … Qe7 with 12 Be3 Bd7 13 0-0 0-0-0 14 Rfe1 and White is clearly better. 11 … Qe7 Black brings his Queen to a more active square and removes her from the open “d” file where she is likely to be a target to a Rook. 12 0-0 White removes his King from the center and connects his Rooks on the first rank.

151

12 … 0-0? This is a real mistake! Black castles right into his weakened position on the kingside. It would be far more logical to prepare to remove the King from the center by castling on the queenside with 12 … Bd7, though White is clearly dominant in the center and kingside after 13 a4 Na5 14 Be3. As far as the queenside goes, Black does not have any advantage there as compensation. 13 Qg3 Since Black is in such a restricted position, White wants to further improve his position before tying to force matters. In anticipation of a possible build up against his Pawn on “e5”, White defends the Pawn again and removes the Queen from the “h3c8” diagonal. With White’s Queen on “g4” (along the “h3-c8” diagonal) Black has the possibility of posting his Knight on “d5” and if captured, then Black can recapture with his “e” Pawn with a discovered attack on White’s Queen. A good alternative for White is to bring his Rook to the open “d” file and attack the “d5” square a third time with 13 Rad1, which might continue 13 … a5 14 a4 Nd7 15 Rfe1.

152


13 … a5 Black tries to get counter-play on the queenside and threatens to win White’s Bishop with 14 … a4. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 14 a4

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdw4kd} {dp0w1pgw} {whndpdp0} {0wdw)wdw} {PdwdwGwd} {dBHwdN!w} {w)PdW)P)} {$wdwdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 158. Position after 14 a4.

White prevents Black from winning his Bishop by stopping Black’s “a” Pawn from advancing. Black is in a difficult situation. It is hard for him to find a constructive plan and the state of his position can best be described as “under siege.” It is in situations like this where patience, combined with a careful and stubborn defense, is required in order to have any chance of survival. 14 … Qb4? This overaggressive move misplaces the Queen. She played a better role on “e7” to defend the kingside. Black should try

to improve the location of his Knight on “b6” by attacking Black’s “e” Pawn with 14 … Nd7. After 14 … Nd7, the game might continue 15 Rfe1 Nc5 16 Bc4 Nb4 17 Re2. Though White is clearly better here, Black would be in better shape than after the move played in the game. 15 Rfe1 White activates a Rook and adds protection to his Pawn on “e5”. This move also covers the “e4” square and supports the possible centralization of White’s Knight on that square. A strong alternative for White is to attack Black’s weak Pawn on “c7” with 15 Nb5. This would force Black to either defend his “c” Pawn by retreating his Queen (and losing time) with 15 … Qe7 or to offer the Pawn as a sacrifice. 15 … Nd4? Black continues to play inaccurately. Black seeks to relieve pressure by exchanging Knights. However, this gives White an opportunity to gain more time and increase the pressure on Black. A less aggressive, but more accurate, defense by Black is 15 … Rd8. The game might continue 16 Ne4 Nd7 17 Rad1 leaving Black with a cramped position. See if you can find White’s

Robert M. Snyder

move here without looking at the next move in the game. 16 Nxd4 White removes Black’s menacing Knight and draws Black’s Queen onto the open “d” file where she will become a target. 16 … Qxd4 Black recovers his Knight. See if you can find White’s next move here without looking at the next move in the game.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdw4kd} {dp0wdpgw} {whwdpdp0} {0wdw)wdw} {Pdw1wGwd} {dBHwdw!w} {w)PdW)P)} {$wdw$wIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 159. Position after 16 … Qxd4.

17 Rad1 White brings his Rook onto the open “d” file and threatens Black’s exposed Queen. 17 … Qb4 Black gets his Queen out of attack. Weaker would be 17 … Qc5 because

153

White would have gained even more time by attacking Black’s Queen again with 18 Ne4. See if you can find White’s next move here without looking at the next move in the game. 18 Ne4! White ignores the attack on his “a” Pawn and brings his Knight to the attack on the kingside. On “e4” the Knight covers the critical “f6” and “g5” squares. White now threatens to invade with 19 Nf6+ or 19 Qh4. 18 … Nd5 Black’s Knight tries to come to the rescue of the situation on the kingside by covering the “f6” square and attacking White’s Bishop on “f4”. If Black played 18 … Nd7, White would continue with 19 Qh4 h5 (not 20 … g5? because of 21 Bxg5 hxg5 22 Qxg5 with the crushing threat of 23 Nf6+) 20 Qg5 with a devastating kingside attack. If Black went Pawn grabbing with 18 … Nxa4?, he would have been quickly punished after 19 Bd2 Qb5 20 Bxa4 Qxa4 21 Qh4 with the threats of 22 Nf6+ (winning Black’s Queen with a discovered attack) and 22 Bxh6.

154


19 Bd2

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdw4kd} {dp0wdpgw} {wdwdpdp0} {0wdn)wdw} {P1wdNdwd} {dBdwdw!w} {w)PGW)P)} {dwdR$wIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 160. Position after 19 Bd2.

White gets his Bishop out of attack and drives Black’s Queen to a less active square. 19 … Qb6 Black gets his Queen out of attack. A retreat of the Queen to “e7” would lead to a lost position after 19 … Qe7 20 Bxd5 exd5 21 Nf6+ Bxf6 22 exf6 Qxf6 23 Bxh6. 20 Qh4 White repositions his Queen and attacks Black’s dark-square weakness on the kingside. White’s immediate threat is 21 Bxh6. This threat provokes Black to further weaken the Pawn shield around his King.

20 … g5? Black would last longer after 20 … h5 21 Nf6+ Nxf6 22 exf6 Bh8 23 Bc3. Although, in the long run, Black should not survive White’s terrific bind. Black is also dying after 20 … Bxe5 21 Bxh6 Bg7 (if 21 … Re8, then 22 Bg5 is strong) 22 Be3 Nxe3 23 Ng5! Re8 24 Rxe3 with an overwhelming attack. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 21 Bxg5!

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdw4kd} {dp0wdpgw} {w1wdpdw0} {0wdn)wGw} {PdwdNdw!} {dBdwdwdw} {w)PdW)P)} {dwdR$wIw} vllllllllV


This sacrifice cracks Black’s castled position open by stripping the King of his Pawn shield. White’s biggest threat is 22 Nf6+.

Robert M. Snyder

21 … hxg5 Black had little choice but to remove Black’s Bishop before it did more damage. 22 Nxg5 White continues to strip Black’s King of his Pawn shield and brings his Knight directly into the attack. White is now threatening 23 Qh7++. 22 … Re8 Black defends against the mate threat by opening up an escape for Black’s King on “f8”. 23 Re4 White begins to maneuver his Rook toward the kingside so it can join the attack. Black is helpless against the impending disaster. At this point White has a variety of ways to win. 23 … Bd7 Black finally gets his last minor piece developed and connects his Rooks. However, it is too late to do any good. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

155

24 Rg4

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdrdkd} {dp0bdpgw} {w1wdpdwd} {0wdn)wHw} {PdwdwdR!} {dBdwdwdw} {w)PdW)P)} {dwdRdwIw} vllllllllV


White brings his Rook directly into the assault This is enough to convince Black to give up. Black resigned here. If 24 … Bc6, then 25 Qh7+ Kf8 26 Nxf7! Ke7 (if 26 … Kxf7 then 27 Qxg7++) 27 Rxg7. Or if 24 … Re7, then White wins brilliantly with 25 Qh7+ Kf8 26 Qh8+! Bxh8 27 Nh7+ Ke8 28 Rg8++.

LESSON 17

8 a4

Sacrificing on “f6” Against the Castled King Sax vs. Ghinda Bath, 1973 Opening: Alekhine’s Defense Just as in the last Lesson, White’s builds a kingside attack which is one of the ideas of this variation of Alekhine’s defense. This game is similar to LESSON FIFTEEEN in Unbeatable Chess Lessons. White offers a Knight sacrifice on “f6” against the castled King. 1 e4 Nf6 2 e5 Nd5 3 d4 d6 4 Bc4 Nb6 5 Bb3 dxe5 6 Qh5 e6 7 dxe5 a5

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kgw4} {dp0wdp0p} {whwdpdwd} {0wdw)wdQ} {wdwdwdwd} {dBdwdwdw} {P)PdW)P)} {$NGwIwHR} vllllllllV

White blocks the advance of Black’s “a” Pawn. Playing 8 c3 to open a retreat for White’s Bishop on “b3” is weak because of 8 … Qd3. A good alternative for White is to open the “a2” square as a retreat for the Bishop with 8 a3. After 8 a3 the game might continue 8 … a4 (if 8 … Nc6, then 9 Nc3 g6 10 Qe2 Nd4 11 Qe4) 9 Ba2 Nc6 10 Nc3 Ra5 11 f4 Bc5 (if 11 … Nd4, then 12 Qd1 is strong) 12 Nf3 Nd4 (if 12 … Nd5, then 13 Nxd5 exd5 14 Bd2 Rb5 15 Bc3 0-0 16 0-0-0 gives White a clear advantage) 13 Nxd4 Qxd4 14 Qf3 0-0 15 Ne2 Qd7 16 Bd2 Ra8 17 Nc3 with the idea of 18 0-0-0 and White stands clearly better. 8 … Na6 Black develops his Knight to a temporary location at the edge of the board with the idea of moving it to “c5” where it will attack White’s Bishop on “b3” and Pawn on “a4”. Here 8 … Nc6 9 Nf3 would transpose into the analysis to Black’s 8th move in LESSON SIXTEEN. 9 Nf3

Diagram 163. Position after 7 … a5.

Up to this point the moves were the same as in LESSON SIXTEEN. Black plays aggressively on the queenside and threatens to win White’s Bishop with 8 … a4.

White develops his Knight, defends his “e” Pawn and prepares the possibility of castling kingside.

-156-

Robert M. Snyder

9 … Nc5 Black follows through with his plan to bring his Knight into play with an attack on Black’s Bishop at “b3” and Pawn on “a4”. Black would only weaken the dark squares on his kingside after 9 … g6 10 Qh3.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kgw4} {dp0wdp0p} {whwdpdwd} {0whw)wdQ} {Pdwdwdwd} {dBdwdNdw} {w)PdW)P)} {$NGwIwdR} vllllllllV


10 Ba2 White preserves his Bishop pair and prevents Black from doubling his Pawns by 10 … Nxb3. This is done at the cost of losing a tempo and White must be willing to sacrifice his “a” Pawn. A superior alternative for White is to continue to develop with 10 0-0 and allow Black to capture on “b3”. After 10 0-0 the game might continue 10 … Nxb3 11 cxb3 Bd7 (if 11 … Qd3, then 12 Nc3 Qg6 13 Qxg6 hxg6 14 Nb5 Nd5 15 Rd1 threatening 16 Rxd5 exd5 17 Nxc7+) 12 Nc3 Be7 13 Rd1. White’s spatial advantage more

157

than compensates him for the doubled Pawns and for having a Knight versus a Bishop. 10 … Bd7 Black develops his Bishop and attacks White’s “a” Pawn with a third piece. Immediately going Pawn grabbing with 10 … Nbxa4, or 10 … Ncxa4, gives White more than enough play for his Pawn after 11 0-0. 11 Nc3 White develops his Knight toward the center and continues to ignore the attack on his “a” Pawn. Taking the time to defend it with 11 b3? blocks White’s Bishop on the “a2-g8” diagonal and gives Black a good game after 11 … Bc6. 11 … Nbxa4

cuuuuuuuuC {rdw1kgw4} {dp0bdp0p} {wdwdpdwd} {0whw)wdQ} {ndwdwdwd} {dwHwdNdw} {B)PdW)P)} {$wGwIwdR} vllllllllV

Diagram 165. Position after 11 … Nbxa4.

158


Black accepts the Pawn sacrifice and threatens to double and isolate White’s Pawns with 12 … Nxc3 13 bxc3. 12 Bg5 White develops his Bishop and threatens Black’s Queen. Also playable is 12 Ng5, which might continue 12 … g6 (if 12 … Qe7, then 13 Nxa4 g6 14 Qe2 Bxa4 15 0-0) 13 Qf3 Qe7 14 Nge4 and White has sufficient compensation for his sacrificed Pawn. 12 … Be7 Black defends against the threat on his Queen while getting his last minor piece developed. If 12 … Qc8, then the game might continue 13 Nxa4 Nxa4 14 Rb1 Bc6 15 0-0 and White’s position is worth a Pawn. 13 Nxa4 White initiates the exchange of Knights to avoid having Black capture on “c3” (which would give White doubled, isolated “c” Pawns).

13 … Nxa4

cuuuuuuuuC {rdw1kdw4} {dp0bgp0p} {wdwdpdwd} {0wdw)wGQ} {ndwdwdwd} {dwdwdNdw} {B)PdW)P)} {$wdwIwdR} vllllllllV

Diagram 166. Position after 13 … Nxa4.

Black recovers his Knight and attacks White’s unprotected “b” Pawn. 14 Rd1? White could recover his Pawn with an even game after 14 Bxe6 Bxe6 15 Rxa4 c5 16 Bxe7 Qxe7. Instead, White attempts to keep the pressure in return for his sacrificed material by pinning Black’s Bishop on “d7” with the threat of 15 Bxe6. 14 … Nc5? The idea of this move is to return the Knight to its more active post and defend the “e6” square. However, this is too slow and will give White more than enough compensation for his sacrificed Pawn. If Black tried to grab another Pawn with 14 … Nxb2?, then White would have the strong reply 14 Bxe6! attacking Black’s pinned Bishop

Robert M. Snyder

on “d7” and threatening mate with 15 Qxf7++. Black should have played 14 … Bxg5 15 Nxg5 Qe7 and White doesn’t have enough compensation for his Pawn. White could initiate a series of exchanges to recover his Pawn after 15 … Qe7 by 16 Qxf7+ Qxf7 17 Nxf7 Nxb2 18 Rd4 (if 18 Nxh8, then 18 … Nxd1 19 Kxd1 Ke7 20 Ng6+ hxg6 and Black is a Pawn up—Black’s outside passed “a” Pawn compensates for his doubled, isolated “g” Pawns) Rf8 19 Ng5 Rd8 20 Bxe6 h6 21 Bxd7+ Rxd7 22 Nf3 Rxd4 23 Nxd4 Ke7 23 Ke2 Nc4 gives Black a clear advantage in the endgame due to his queenside Pawn majority, more active pieces and White’s “e” Pawn being overextended. 15 Be3 White doesn’t give Black any opportunity to try to simply by exchanging Bishops on “g5”. He threatens 16 Bxc5 Bxc5 17 Bxe6. 15 … 0-0 Black eliminates the threat created by the pin on his “f ” Pawn by removing his King from the center. 16 c3 This opens the “b1-h7” diagonal for White’s Bishop.

159

16 … Qe8 Black places his Queen on the same diagonal (“e8-h5”) as White’s Queen to meet 17 Bb1 (threatening 18 Qxh7++) with 17 … f5. See if you can find White’s best move without looking at the next move in the game.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdq4kd} {dp0bgp0p} {wdwdpdwd} {0whw)wdQ} {wdwdwdwd} {dw)wGNdw} {B)wdW)P)} {dwdRIwdR} vllllllllV

Diagram 167. Position after 16 … Qe8.

17 Bxc5 White plans to maneuver his Knight to the strong central post on “e4”. White first removes Black’s Knight from its attack on “e4” and draws Black’s Bishop from away from its attack on “g5” (where the Bishop could be exchanged for White’s Knight when it goes there). If White immediately plays 17 Ng5, Black would play 17 … Bxg5 18 Qxg5 (if 18 Bxg5, then 18 … Ba4 19 Rd4 Bc2) Ba4 19 Rd4 Rd8 and White’s advantage is minimal.

160


17 … Bxc5 Black recovers his piece. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 18 Ng5 White threatens 19 Qxh7++, which forces Black to weaken on the kingside.

Black gets his Bishop out of attack and covers the critical “f6” square. If 19 … Bb6?, then 20 Nf6+! gxf6 21 exf6 and Black is defenseless against the impending mate. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 20 Nf6+!

18 … h6 Black prevents 19 Qxh7++ and attacks White’s Knight.

Even with Black’s Bishop covering “f6” White penetrates on “f6” and offers the Knight sacrifice.

19 Ne4

20 … Bxf6

White gets his Knight out of attack, centralizes it and attacks Black’s unprotected Bishop on “c5”. From “e4” the Knight attacks Black’s weak “f6” square.

The Knight had to be eliminated. Black’s game would quickly collapse after 20 … gxf6 as White’s Rook would swing into the attack after 21 Rd3 planning to meet 21 … f5 with 22 Qxh6 threatening mate in 2 with 23 Rg3+ or mate in 3 with 23 Rh3.

19 … Be7

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdq4kd} {dp0bgp0w} {wdwdpdw0} {0wdw)wdQ} {wdwdNdwd} {dw)wdwdw} {B)wdW)P)} {dwdRIwdR} vllllllllV


21 exf6 White recovers his piece and brings his Pawn to “f6” to assist in the kingside attack. White now threatens to continue his attack by bringing his Rook to the kingside with 22 Rd3 followed by 23 Rg3. White also has a secondary threat, which is to open up Black’s King and recover his sacrificed Pawn with 22 fxg7 Kxg7 23 Qe5+ f6 24 Qxc7.

Robert M. Snyder

21 … Ra6

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdq4kd} {dp0bdp0w} {rdwdp)w0} {0wdwdwdQ} {wdwdwdwd} {dw)wdwdw} {B)wdW)P)} {dwdRIwdR} vllllllllV

Diagram 169. Position after 21 … Ra6.

Black’s plan is to bring his inactive Rook into play to defend on the kingside with 22 … e5. Black is willing to return White’s sacrificed Pawn with hopes of improving his position. Being able to defend properly in a difficult position is just as important as being able to conduct a good attack. In practice most successful attacks don’t force a mate before winning material. In most cases the defender surrenders material to stop or slow down the opponent’s attack. This should be resisted unless giving up material is absolutely necessary. However, it will be shown that other attempts to defend this position satisfactorily would not be successful. Evaluations like this certainly require sound judgment that can be learned only through practice and the study of complete games such as those provided in this book and in Unbeatable Chess Lessons. We will now

161

examine other possible defenses for Black. One possibility for Black would be to relieve his “g” Pawn of the task of defending his Pawn on “h6” with 21 … Kh7. The idea here is to meet 22 fxg7 with 22 … Rg8 followed by recovery of the “g” Pawn by 23 … Rxg7. Therefore, after 21 … Kh7 White should keep up the pressure with 22 Bb1+ g6 23 Rd4 Rg8 24 0-0 Bc6 25 Rh4 Qf8 26 Re1. Black ends up in bad shape here. Another attempt to defend this position would be for Black to get his Bishop into play along the “h7-b1” diagonal where it could defend on the kingside while gaining time by attacking White’s Rook with 21 … Ba4. After 21 … Ba4 Black would plan to meet 22 Rd4 with 22 … Bc2 23 fxg7 Kxg7 24 Rh4 Rh8 and Black is holding the fort. Therefore, after 21 … Ba4 White should provoke Black to further weaken himself with 22 Qg4 (threatening 23 Qxg7++) g6 23 Rd4 Bc2 (if 23 … Bb5?, then 24 Qh3 h5 25 Qe3 Kh7 26 Rh4 with threats of 27 Qg5 and 27 Rxh5+ gxh5 28 Qg5) 24 Qe2 Bf5 25 Qe3 g5 (if 25 … Kh7, then 26 Rh4 h5 28 Qg5) 26 Rh4! Qc6 27 f3 with a strong attack. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

162


22 fxg7 White opens up Black’s castled position and sets up a Queen fork. 22 … Kxg7 Black recovers the Pawn and removes the threat to his Rook. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 23 Qe5+ White forks Black’s King and unprotected “c” Pawn. 23 … Kh7 Black gets his King out of check and removes him from the open “g” file. Black hopes to be able to use the open “g” file for his Rook in the future. 24 Qxc7

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdq4wd} {dp!bdpdk} {rdwdpdw0} {0wdwdwdw} {wdwdwdwd} {dw)wdwdw} {B)wdW)P)} {dwdRIwdR} vllllllllV


White recovers his Pawn and threatens Black’s Bishop and unprotected ‘b” Pawn. 24 … Bc8? Black gets his Bishop out of attack with a passive retreat and defends his “b” Pawn. Black should have played more aggressively and prevented White from castling with 24 … Bb5. If White wins a Pawn with 25 Qxb7 Qc6 26 Qxc6 Bxc6, Black’s active pieces gives him survival chances in the endgame. Therefore, after 24 … Bb5, White should avoid Pawn grabbing and continue with 25 Bb1+ Kh8 26 c4 Bc6 27 Qf4 Kg7 28 Rd3 f5 29 0-0 with a considerable positional advantage for White due to his more active pieces and the somewhat exposed condition of Black’s King. 25 0-0 White removes his King from the center and activates his kingside Rook. 25 … Rg8 Black activates his Rook by placing it on the half open “g” file. 26 Bb1+ White attacks Black’s King and places his Bishop on the open “b1-h7” diagonal. The Bishop will be very effective on this

Robert M. Snyder

163

diagonal to take advantage of Black’s somewhat exposed King.

pin on Black’s Rook when it interposes and leave Black’s first rank exposed.

26 … Kh8

27 … Rg7

Black gets his King out of check. He, understandably, doesn’t want to block the “g” file, but this will allow White to set up a pin on Black’s Rook and gain time to force Black to further weaken his position. Black should have chosen the lesser of two evils and gone ahead and blocked his Rook on the “g” file with 26 … Kg7 planning to meet 27 Qe5+ with 27 … f6. Though after 28 Qg3+ Black should not survive. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

This is Black’s only decent move. Not 27 … f6?? because of 28 Qxf6+ Rg7 29 Rd8. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

27 Qe5+

cuuuuuuuuC {wdbdqdri} {dpdwdpdw} {rdwdpdw0} {0wdw!wdw} {wdwdwdwd} {dw)wdwdw} {w)wdW)P)} {dBdRdRIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 171. Position after 27 Qe5.

White’s Queen swings into the attack against Black’s King. This will place a

28 Rd4! Black must realize that the end is near. White brings his Rook into play with two ideas: 1. White wants to double his Rooks with 29 Rfd1 and then play either 30 Rg4 or 30 Rd8. 2. White is threatening to attack Black’s “h” Pawn with 29 Rh4. 28 … f6 Black attacks White’s Queen with the idea of removing the menacing pin on his Rook. If Black plays 28 … f5 (trying to block White’s Bishop on the “b1-h7” diagonal and covering the “g4” square), White wins easily after 29 Bxf5. 29 Qf4 Simple and good! White takes care of the threat to his Queen, threatens Black’s unprotected “h” Pawn and threatens to

164


double Rooks with 30 Rfd1. This is stronger than 29 Qxf6 e5 30 Rd8. 29 … e5 Black chose the most aggressive way to die. He attacks White’s Queen and Rook and opens the “c8-h3” diagonal for his Bishop. White would be winning easily after 29 … f5 30 Qxh6+ Kg8 31 Rfd1 Bd7 32 Ba2. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 30 Qxh6+ White gets his Queen out of attack, attacks Black’s King, wins a Pawn and opens the “h” file. Quite a lot for one simple move!

cuuuuuuuuC {wdbdqdwi} {dpdwdw4w} {rdwdw0w!} {0wdw0wdw} {wdw$wdwd} {dw)wdwdw} {w)wdW)P)} {dBdwdRIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 172. Position after 30 Qxh6.

30 … Kg8 Black gets his King out of check. Not 30 … Rh7? because of 31 Qxh7++.

31 Rd2 White gets his Rook out of attack and retains the possibility of doubling Rooks on the “d” file. However, a more aggressive (and faster) way to win is 31 Rh4 threatening 32 Qh8+ Kf7 33 Bg6+ Rxg6 (if 33 … Kxg6?, then 34 Qh5++) 34 Rh7+. After 31 Rh4 the game might continue 31 … Kf8 (if 31 … Bd7, then 32 Rd1 Kf7 33 Qxg7+! Kxg7 34 Rxd7+ Qxd7 35 Rh7+ followed by 36 Rxd7) 32 Ba2 with the following possibilities: 1. 32 … Qg6 33 Qxg6 Rxg6 34 Rh8+ Ke7 35 Rxc8. 2. 32 … Be6 33 Rg4! Qf7 (if 33 … Bxg4, then 34 Qh8+) 34 Bxe6 Rxe6 35 Rd1 Re8 36 Rd7! Qxd7 37 Qh8+. 31 … f5 This is Black’s best attempt to defend. The Rook is opened on the 6th rank with a discovered attack on White’s Queen and White’s Bishop is blocked on the “b1-h7” diagonal. 32 Qh4 White controls the “d8” square. This threatens to win Black’s Queen with a pin by 32 … Rd8.

Robert M. Snyder

32 … Kf7

cuuuuuuuuC {wdbdqdwd} {dpdwdk4w} {rdwdwdwd} {0wdw0pdw} {wdwdwdw!} {dw)wdwdw} {w)w$W)P)} {dBdwdRIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 173. Position after 32 … Kf7.

Black could have offered more resistance and prevented the penetration of White’s Rook on the “d” file with 32 … Rd7. The game might continue 33 Rxd7 Bxd7 (if 33 … Qxd7, then 34 Ba2+ Kg7 35 Qg3+ Kf6 36 f4 exf4 37 Qg8 Rd6 38 h4 Rd1 39 Qf8+ Kg6 40 Bf7+) 34 Rd1 Kg7 35 Qc4 Rc6 36 Qd5. 33 f3 There is no need to take time and make this passive move. White should have just barreled forward with 33 Rd8 Qc6 34 g3 Be6 35 Qh5+ Ke7 36 Qh8 Rf7 37 Rfd1. 33 … Rag6 Black brings his queenside Rook to aid on the kingside where it applies pressure on the “g” file and on White’s “g” Pawn. If 33 … Qe7, a possible continuation

165

might be 34 Qh5+ Kf6 35 f4 exf4 36 Qh8 Bd7 37 Rd4 Rd6 38 Qh6+ Rg6 39 Qxf4 and White is winning. 34 Re1 White brings his Rook into play by tying down Black’s Queen to the defense of his “e” Pawn and threatens 35 Ba2+ Be6 36 Rxe5. 34 … Qe6 Black brings his Queen to a more active location and prevents White from playing 35 Ba2+. 35 Qd8 White’s Queen penetrates deep into Black’s camp. White is a Pawn ahead, Black’s pieces are poorly coordinated, and Black’s King is relatively exposed to attack. White threatens to win Black’s Queen with 36 Rd6 Qxd6 (if 36 … Qe8, then 37 Ba2+ Kf8 38 Rf6+ Rxf6 39 Qxf6+ Rf7 40 Qh8+ Ke7 41 Rxe5+) 37 Ba2+. 35 … Rg8? This results in massive material loss. Black would last longer with 35 … Qb6+ 36 Qxb6 Rxb6 37 Rxe5. However, allowing White to obtain an easily won endgame without attempting to put up a fight probably didn’t appeal to Black.

166



cuuuuuuuuC {wdb!wdrd} {dpdwdkdw} {wdwdqdrd} {0wdw0pdw} {wdwdwdwd} {dw)wdPdw} {w)w$WdP)} {dBdw$wIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 174. Position after 35 … Rg8.

36 Qc7+ White attacks Black’s King. Black is left with no satisfactory way of meeting this assault on his King and must lose material. 36 … Kf6 Black gets his King out of attack. Interposing with 36 … Qe7 allows 37 Ba2+ Re6 (if 37 … Be6, then 38 Rd7!) 38 Qxe5 winning easily. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 37 Rd6 White pins and wins Black’s Queen. Black really has nothing to show for his material loss.

37 … Rxg2+ Black wins a Pawn and attacks White’s King. Black must hope for White to blunder. 38 Kh1 White safely tucks his King away in the corner. However, even if White blundered and played 38 Kf1?, White would still be winning after 38 … Rg1+ 39 Ke2 (Black would get the miracle he wanted after 39 Kf2?? R8g2+ 40 Ke3 Rxe1+ 41 Kd3 Rd1+ 42 Ke3 f4+ 43 Ke4 Re2++) Rxe1+ 40 Kxe1 Rg1+ 41 Ke2 Rxb1 42 Rxe6+ Bxe6 43 Qxb7. 38 … Rxb2

cuuuuuuuuC {wdbdwdrd} {dp!wdwdw} {wdw$qiwd} {0wdw0pdw} {wdwdwdwd} {dw)wdPdw} {w4wdWdw)} {dBdw$wdK} vllllllllV

Diagram 175. Position after 38 … Rxb2.

Black grabs a Pawn and hopes to have time to double Rooks on White’s 2nd rank. Of course, there will be no time for this to happen.

Robert M. Snyder

39 Rxe6+ White wins Black’s Queen. 39 … Bxe6 Black gets White’s Rook in return for the loss of his Queen. 40 Qxe5+ White gives Black no time to breathe and now wins Black’s Bishop. Black resigned here.

167

LESSON 18

played line. The natural development of this Knight reinforces White’s “d” and “e” Pawns.

Junior Champion Kasparov in Action

4 … g6

Kasparov vs. Palatnik 1978 Opening: Alekhine’s Defense Garry Kasparov was only 15 years old when this game was played. He became USSR Junior Champion in 1976 and World Junior Champion in 1980. He went on to become the World Champion in 1985. In this game Kasparov gains control of the center and provokes Black to weaken on the kingside. He then sacrifices two Bishops to expose Black’s King to a deadly attack. 1 e4 Nf6 2 e5 Nd5 3 d4 d6 4 Nf3

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kgw4} {0p0w0p0p} {wdw0wdwd} {dwdn)wdw} {wdw)wdwd} {dwdwdNdw} {P)PdW)P)} {$NGQIBdR} vllllllllV

Black prepares to fianchetto his Bishop to “g7” and apply pressure directly to White’s Pawn chain in the center. Black’s most common move here is to pin White’s Knight on “f3” with 4 … Bg4, which might continue 5 Be2 e6 (or if 5 … c6, then 6 c4 Nb6 7 Nbd2 dxe5 8 Nxe5 Bxe2 9 Qxe2 N8d7 10 Ndf3) 6 0-0 Be7 7 c4 Nb6 8 Nc3 0-0 9 Be3 N8d7 10 exd6 cxd6 11 Nd2 Bxe2 12 Qxe2 and White stands slightly better. 5 Bc4 White develops his Bishop and attacks Black’s Knight on “d5”. The idea behind this move is not much different from White’s fourth move in LESSON SIXTEEN AND SEVENTEEN. 5 … Nb6

Diagram 176. Position after 4 Nf3.

This move initiates the “Modern Variation”, which is the most commonly

Black gets his Knight out of attack while threatening White’s Bishop on “c4”. Black could also maintain the Knight on “d5” by protecting it with 5 … c6, which might continue 6 0-0 Bg7 7 exd6 Qxd6 8 Re1 0-0 (or if 8 … Bg4, then 9 Nbd2 0-0 10 h3 Bxf3 11 Nxf3 Nd7 12 Bb3 e6 13 Bg5) 9

-168-

Robert M. Snyder

Bg5 Re8 10 Nbd2 Bg4 11 h3 Bxf3 12 Nxf3 Nd7 13 Bh4 and White stands better. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 6 Bb3 White gets his Bishop out of attack and retains it on the “a2-g8” diagonal with pressure on the weak “f7” square.

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kgw4} {0p0w0pdp} {whw0wdpd} {dwdw)wdw} {wdw)wdwd} {dBdwdNdw} {P)PdW)P)} {$NGQIwdR} vllllllllV Diagram 177. Position after 6 Bb3.

6 … a5 Black plays aggressively on the queenside and threatens to win White’s Bishop with 7 … a4. The most common move played here is for Black to complete his fianchetto and apply pressure on White’s “e” Pawn with 6 … Bg7. This would transpose back into this game after 7 a4 a5 8 Ng5, or White might continue with 7 Ng5 e6 8 Qf3 Qe7 9 Ne4 dxe5 10 Bg5 Qb4+ 11 c3 Qa5 12 Bf6 Bxf6

169

13 Qxf6 0-0 14 Qxe5 Qxe5 15 dxe5 and White stands slightly better. 7 a4 White blocks the advance of Black’s “a” Pawn. 7 … Bg7 Black completes his fianchetto, applies pressure to White’s “e” Pawn and clears the way to castle. Black now threatens to play 8 … dxe5 9 Nxe5 Bxe5 10 dxe5 Qxd1+ 11 Kxd1 Nc6. 8 Ng5 White threatens Black’s “f ” Pawn with the idea of provoking Black to move his “e” Pawn, which weakens Black’s dark squares on the kingside and blocks his Bishop on the “c8-h3” diagonal. This also opens up “f3” for possible use by White’s Queen. White would have a slight edge after 8 Qe2, removing the Queen from the “d” file and reinforcing the Pawn on “e5”. However, White prefers to play more aggressively.

170


8 … e6

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kdw4} {dp0wdpgp} {whw0pdpd} {0wdw)wHw} {Pdw)wdwd} {dBdwdwdw} {w)PdW)P)} {$NGQIwdR} vllllllllV

Diagram 178. Position after 8 … e6.

Black defends against the threat on his “f ” Pawn by blocking White’s Bishop on the “a2-g8” diagonal. Black is again threatening to play 9 … dxe5. If 8 … d5, then 9 0-0 0-0 10 Re1 Nc6 11 c3 and White stands better. Immediately castling might look tempting. However, White would have obtained a clear advantage after 8 … 00 with 9 e6!. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 9 f4 White defends and strengthens his Pawn on “e5”. Maintaining the Pawn on “e5” is important since it blocks Black’s Bishop on “g7”, attacks “d6” and attacks the hole on “f6”.

9 … dxe5 Black opens the “d” file with the idea of obtaining pressure on White’s “d” Pawn. If 9 … 0-0, then 10 0-0 Nc6 11 c3 and White stands clearly better. 10 fxe5 White recovers the Pawn and opens the “f ” file to apply pressure on Black’s backward “f ” Pawn. Certainly not 10 dxe5? because of 10 … Qxd1+ 11 Kxd1 Nc6 and White has lost his ability to castle and the initiative. 10 … c5 Black attacks the base of White’s center Pawn chain with the idea of undermining White’s protection of his “e” Pawn. Other moves here also give White the better game: 1. 10 … 0-0 11 Nf3 planning to meet 11 … c5 with 12 Bg5. 2. 10 … f6 11 exf6 Bxf6 12 Nf3. 3. 10 … h6 11 Nf3 c5 12 c3 Nc6 13 0-0 0-0 14 Be3 cxd4 15 cxd4 Nd5 16 Bf2 b6 17 Bc4. 11 0-0? White removes his King from the center while threatening Black’s Pawn on “f7”. This very natural looking move has been considered best by theory. However, this is not White’s strongest move here. White should play 11 Qf3,

Robert M. Snyder

removing the Queen from the “d” file (this allows a possible dxc5 without a Queen exchange) and threatening 12 Qxf7++. White gets a clear advantage after 11 Qf3 0-0 12 dxc5 N6d7 13 Qh3 h6 (or if 13 … h5, then 14 g4 Qc7 15 gxh5 Qxe5+ 16 Be3 gxh5 17 c3 Nxc5 18 Bc2) 14 Ne4 Qc7 15 Be3 Qxe5 16 Nbd2.

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kdw4} {dpdwdpgp} {whwdpdpd} {0w0w)wHw} {Pdw)wdwd} {dBdwdwdw} {w)PdWdP)} {$NGQdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 179. Position after 11 0-0.

In the book Gary Kasparov’s Fighting Chess (Henry Holt, 1995) Kasparov gives, as being “more precise,” the moves “11 c3 cxd4 12 0-0! etc.” After 12 … 0-0 13 cxd4 Nc6 14 Nf3 f6 15 Nc3 (15 exf6 Qxf6 16 Be3 Nd5 17 Bf2 Qf4 with approximate equality) fxe5 16 Bg5 Qd7 17 dxe5 Qxd1 18 Raxd1 Nxe5 19 Nxe5 Rxf1+ 20 Kxf1 Bxe5 21 Be3 (if 21 Bd8, then 21 … Bxc3 22 bxc3 Nd5 23 Bxd5 exd5 24 Rxd5 b5!) Bxc3 22 Rd8+ Kf7 23 bxc3 Nd7 a position is reached where White has the Bishop pair and a good position in return for his sacrificed Pawn. A possible continuation might be 24 Ke1

171

b6 25 Bd1 (if 25 Rh8, then 25 … Nf8 26 Bxb6 Rb8 27 Bc5 Nd7 28 Bd4 Rxb3 29 Rxh7+ Ke8 30 Rh8+ Nf8 31 Bg7 Bb7 32 Rxf8+ Ke7 reaching a drawn Bishops of opposite color endgame) Ke7 26 Bg5+ Kd6 27 Bf3 Rb8 28 Bg4 Kc7 29 Rh8 Bb7 30 Rxh7 Re8 31 Bf4+ Kc8 32 g3 Bc6 33 Bd1 e5 34 Be3 b5 and though White stands better, even with correct play Black’s chances of survival are excellent. White may still hold the advantage, but Kasparov’s short analytical comment does not begin to examine the problems arising after 12 0-0. The majority of opening books contain lines and analysis based mostly on games played by strong players. Far too often these games are simply quoted without a serious move-by-move analysis being made by the author. This results in many errors in opening books (not to mention the analysis found in many game collections). The point is that you shouldn’t take the written word as gospel. Though no one is perfect, as author of this book and Unbeatable Chess Lessons, I have gone over every single move carefully to assure my readers of the highest quality of analysis possible. 11 … 0-0? Black takes care of the threat to his “f ” Pawn and removes his King from

172


the center. However, Black missed his opportunity to exchange down into and endgame with likely prospects of a draw with 11 … Qxd4+ 12 Qxd4 cxd4 13 Rxf7 (if 13 Nxf7, then 13 … 0-0) Bxe5 14 Rf1 Nc6. 12 c3 White defends his “d” Pawn creating a long Pawn chain from b2 to e5. White wanted to exploit his advantage in space and avoid the Pawn imbalance that would result after 12 dxc5 Qxd1 13 Rxd1 N6d7 14 Ne4 Nxe5. However, White would still stand better. 12 … Nc6? Black develops his Knight and applies pressure on White’s “d” Pawn. However, this is too slow and will give White valuable time to reposition his Knight. Black should play 12 … cxd4 13 cxd4 Nc6 and transpose into the analysis given after White’s 11th move in this game (with 11 c3). See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

This move also opens up “g5” and “h6” for White’s dark squared Bishop. 13 … Nd7 Black repositions his Knight, defends his Pawn on “c5” and increases pressure on White’s Pawn on “e5”. If 13 … cxd4, then 14 Bg5! Qc7 15 cxd4 and White has a tremendous bind on Black’s dark squared weaknesses. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 14 Be3 Simplicity at its best! White continues with straightforward development and reinforces the defense of his “d” Pawn.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1w4kd} {dpdndpgp} {wdndpdpd} {0w0w)wdw} {Pdw)Ndwd} {dB)wGwdw} {w)wdWdP)} {$NdQdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 180. Position after 14 Be3.

13 Ne4! This is an awesome post for the Knight! From “e4” it threatens Black’s Pawn on “c5” and takes advantage of Black’s dark squared weaknesses on “f6” and “d6”.

14 … Ne7 Black’s position is somewhat restricted and it isn’t easy for him to find a constructive plan. Black decides to try

Robert M. Snyder

to take advantage of his strong points— the White squares on “f5” and “d5”— and repositions his Knight accordingly. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 15 Bg5! In chess the pin is mightier than the sword! White doesn’t mind moving the same piece twice in a row—the situation has changed! White pins Black’s Knight and ties down Black’s Queen to its defense. Furthermore, White increases his foothold on Black’s weak “f6” square and, if given the time, will bring his Queen into play on the kingside. 15 … cxd4 This exchange brings the base of White’s center Pawn chain to “d4”. This makes it easier to apply pressure on White’s “d” Pawn. 16 cxd4 White recovers his Pawn while keeping his Pawn on “e5” sufficiently protected. 16 … h6 Black, at the expense of weakening himself on the kingside, begins to drive White’s Bishop off of the “h4-d8”

173

diagonal to remove the menacing pin. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 17 Bh4

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1w4kd} {dpdnhpgw} {wdwdpdp0} {0wdw)wdw} {Pdw)NdwG} {dBdwdwdw} {w)wdWdP)} {$NdQdRIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 181. Position after 17 Bh4.

White maintains the pin on Black’s Knight. This will force Black to weaken himself even further to drive the Bishop off of the “h4-d8” diagonal. 17 … g5 Black continues with his plan of driving White’s Bishop off of the “h4-d8” diagonal. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 18 Bf2 White gets his Bishop out of attack. On “f2” the Bishop defends White’s backward “d” Pawn and can be

174


repositioned on the “c1-h6” diagonal by going to “e3”. It would be premature to sacrifice the Bishop with 18 Bxg5? because of 18 … hxg5 19 Nxg5 Bh6 20 Qh5 Bxg5 21 Qxg5+ Ng6. 18 … Ng6 At a glance it may appear that it is a good idea to post the Knight on “g6” because Black has weakened himself on the kingside. However, the Knight is misplaced. From “g6” the Knight doesn’t cover Black’s weak dark squares. Correct is 18 … Nb6 19 Nbc3 Nbd5. This hardly comes close to resolving Black’s problems, but the central post on “d5” allows the Knight to reach its potential in this situation. 19 Nbc3 White completes his minor piece deve lopment by moving the Knight toward the center. This also releases White’s queenside Rook along the first rank. 19 … Qe7 Black places his Queen on a more active post where she covers “d6” (a square where White’s Knight has potential to invade) and two good diagonals. On “e7” she also covers Black’s second rank, which might be useful in the defense of the kingside.

20 Bc2

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdw4kd} {dpdn1pgw} {wdwdpdn0} {0wdw)w0w} {Pdw)Ndwd} {dwHwdwdw} {w)BdWGP)} {$wdQdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 182. Position after 20 Bc2.

White moves his Bishop from one good diagonal (“a2-g8”) to another (“b1h7”). Although both of these diagonals are excellent for the Bishop it would be logical to delay relocating the Bishop. A more accurate move would be to improve the location of the Bishop on “f2” by putting pressure on Black’s “g” Pawn and opening up the “f ” file with 20 Be3. White would have had a substantial positional advantage after 20 Be3 b6 21 Nd6 Ba6 22 Rf2 Rad8 23 Nce4. 20 … b6 Black frees his Bishop along the “c8-a6” diagonal. 21 Be3 White opens the “f ” file for his Rook and applies pressure to Black’s “g” Pawn.

Robert M. Snyder

21 … Ba6 Black develops his Bishop to the “a6f1” diagonal and threatens White’s Rook on “f1”. Developing the Bishop to “b7” would have made it a target for White’s Knight after 22 Nd6. 22 Rf2 White gets his Rook out of attack and maintains it on the half-open “f ” file. Much weaker is 22 Rf3, since the Rook would be a possible target for Black’s Knight going to “h4” and block White’s Queen on the “d1-h5” diagonal. White now threatens to invade with 23 Qh5 followed by 24 Bxg5. 22 … Nh8?

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdw4kh} {dwdn1pgw} {b0wdpdw0} {0wdw)w0w} {Pdw)Ndwd} {dwHwGwdw} {w)BdW$P)} {$wdQdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 183. Position after 22 … Nh8.

Black anticipates that White will place his Queen on “h5”. In order to meet 24 Qh5 with 24 … f5, without hanging the Knight on “g6”, he hides it in the corner! This passive retreat will lose

175

valuable time. Stronger is 23 … f5 24 Nd6 Rad8. In some variations it now becomes clear that when Black advances his “f ” Pawn White’s Bishop at “c2” should have been left on the “a2-g8” diagonal. 23 Bxg5 White sacrifices his Bishop to open lines and expose Black’s King to attack. Why no exclamation point to White’s 23rd move? This is because this wasn’t White’s only clear way to win. White could have used a Pawn to open up the position with 23 h4 gxh4 (if 23 … f5, then 24 exf6e.p and now 24 … Nxf6 25 hxg5 Nxe4 26 Bxe4, or 24 … Bxf6 25 Qh5) 24 Qh5 (White is threatening win with 25 Bxh6 or 25 Bg5) f5 25 exf6e.p. Nxf6 26 Nxf6+ Bxf6 (if 26 … Rxf6, then 27 Nd5! exd5 28 Qxd5+ followed by 29 Qxa8+) and now the subtle move 27 Rf4! with decisive threats such as 28 Rg4+ or the simple 28 Qxh6. 23 … hxg5 Black accepts the Bishop sacrifice. Not accepting the sacrifice with 23 … f6 allows White to win easily with 24 Bh4. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

176


24 Qh5 White’s Queen swings into the attack on the kingside and attacks Black’s Pawn on “g5” a second time as well as the critical “h7” square. White’s immediate threat is 25 Nf6+ Nxf6 26 exf6 and Black must lose his Queen due to White’s threats of mate on “h7” and 27 fxe7. 24 … f5

25 … Rf7

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdwdkh} {dwdn1rgw} {b0wdpdwd} {0wdw)pHQ} {Pdw)wdwd} {dwHwdwdw} {w)BdW$P)} {$wdwdwIw} vllllllllV


On “f7” Black’s backward Pawn was very cramping. Therefore, Black aggressively advances the Pawn in an attempt to relieve the pressure. This allows Black’s Queen to defend the kingside along his second rank while opening up “f7” for possible use by his Rook. If 24 … f6, White obtains a winning position after 25 Nxg5 Rf7 26 Nxf7 Nxf7 27 Bh7+ Kf8 28 Ne4 Rd8 29 g4 Bd3 30 Rc1. Also, if 24 … Rfc8, then 25 Nxg5 Ra7 (or 25 … Nf8 26 Nce4 is strong) 26 Bh7+ Kf8 27 Bg6 and Black will not survive.

This defends against White’s mate threat by opening up the “f8” square as an escape for Black’s King. Black isn’t worried about White exchanging his Knight for the Rook with 26 Nxf7? Nxf7 as White would lose most of his initiative. If 25 … Nf6, then White could have won brilliantly with 26 Nd5! with the following possible continuation 26 … exd5 27 Bxf5 Rf7 28 Qh3 Ra7 29 Be6. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

25 Nxg5

26 Bxf5!

White wins Black’s “g” Pawn and continues the attack on the kingside with the threat of 26 Qh7++.

This second Bishop sacrifice cracks open Black’s position and takes advantage of Black’s “e” Pawn being an overworked defender (Black’s “e” Pawn was defending his Pawn on “f5” and preventing the entry of White’s Knight into “d5”). White now threatens 27

Robert M. Snyder

Bxe6 as well as 27 Qh7+ Kf8 28 Nxe6+ Kf8 29 Nd5 and Black is crushed. 26 … Rxf5 Black has nothing better than to accept the sacrifice and remove White’s menacing Bishop. Capturing the Bishop with 26 … exf5 allows the entry of White’s Knight after 27 Nd5. If 26 … Nf8, then White is winning after 27 Bh7+ Nxh7 28 Qxh7+ Kf8 29 Nxf7 Nxf7 30 Ne4.

177

Black’s Queen with devastating effect. Black is crushed.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdwdkh} {dwdn1wgw} {b0wdwdwd} {0wdN)pHQ} {Pdw)wdwd} {dwdwdwdw} {w)wdWdP)} {$wdwdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 185. Position after 28 Nd5.

27 Rxf5

28 … Qe8

White continues to open lines for his pieces. This exchange will remove Black’s “e” Pawn from covering the important “d5” square. White is now threatening 28 Qh7++.

There is no other good square for Black’s Queen to get out of attack. If 28 … Qf8, then 29 Qh7++. If 28 … Qd8, then 29 Qh7+ Kf8 30 Ne6+ wins. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

27 … exf5 Black recovers the Rook. If 27 … Nf8, then 28 Rxf8+ Bxf8 (28 … Kxf8 29 Qf3+ forking King and Rook) 29 Nce4 threatening 30 Nf6+. See if you can find White’s best move without looking at the next move in the game. 28 Nd5 This is the point behind White’s sacrifice on move 26. White’s Knight now comes into play and threatens

29 Qh7+ White gets his Queen out of attack and attacks Black’s King. 29 … Kf8 This is Black’s only legal move to get his King out of check. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

178


30 Qxf5+ White continues his attack on Black’s King, wins a Pawn and opens up the “f ” file for use by his Rook. This is stronger than 30 Nc7 Qg6 31 Qxg6 Nxg6 32 Nge6+ Kf7 33 Nxg7 Rd8 34 Nxf5 and White has four Pawns against Black’s Bishop. 30 … Kg8 Black does his best to hide his King. White would have won quickly after 30 … Nf7 31 Ne6+ Kg8 32 Qg6. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 31 Qh7+

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdqdkh} {dwdndwgQ} {b0wdwdwd} {0wdN)wHw} {Pdw)wdwd} {dwdwdwdw} {w)wdWdP)} {$wdwdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 186. Position after 31 Qh7

White forces Black’s King right back onto the open “f ” file (which he opened on move 30). Pursuing the attack on the King is stronger than the fork with 31 Nc7 that still leads to a won game

for White after 31 … Qg6 32 Qxd7 Qxg5 33 Nxa8. 31 … Kf8 Again Black is left with only one legal move to get his King out of check. White now has a choice of two moves that force a quick win. See if you can find one of these moves without looking at the next move in the game. 32 Ra3 White plans to attack Black’s King along the “f ” file. Immediately playing 32 Rf1+?? allows 32 … Bxf1. White can now shift his Rook to “f3”. The other move that wins quickly for White is 32 Nf4 threatening 33 Nge6+. After 32 Nf4, if Black plays 32 … Bc4 to cover “e6”, then White has the killer reply 33 Rf1! and it’s curtains for Black. 32 … Rc8 Black is resourceful and gives himself the best practical chance in a lost position. Black brings his Rook onto the open “c” file and threatens to convert a lost game into a won game with 33 … Rc1+ 34 Kf2 Rf1+ 35 Kg3 (if 35 Ke3, then 35 … Nxe5!) Nf7.

Robert M. Snyder

See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 33 Rf3+ White follows through with his plan to attack Black’s King on the “f ” file.

179

34 … Qg6 Black attempts get White to exchange Queens to stop some of the threats on the kingside. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 35 Rxf6+

33 … Nf6 Black gets his King out of check and threatens 34 … Rc1+ 35 Kf2 Rf1+ 36 Kg3 (or 36 Ke3) Rxf3+ 37 gxf3 Nxh7.

This is White’s most efficient method of execution. White opens up Black’s King to further attack. Certainly moves like 35 Ne6+ or 35 exf6 would have also won.

34 h3 White takes time out from his attack to open up “h2” as an escape square for his King (if Black now plays 34 … Rc8+, White can safely tuck his King away with 35 Kh2). There is no serious way for Black to defend this position.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdrdqiwh} {dwdwdwgQ} {b0wdwhwd} {0wdN)wHw} {Pdw)wdwd} {dwdwdRdP} {w)wdWdPd} {dwdwdwIw} vllllllllV Diagram 187. Position after 34 h3.

35 … Bxf6 Black captures White’s Rook which was attacking Black’s King and Queen. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 36 Ne6+ This is the key move behind White’s 35th move. White’s Knights jump in for the kill by attacking Black’s King! 36 … Ke8 This is Black’s only legal move to get his King out of check.

180


37 Nxf6+

cuuuuuuuuC {wdrdkdwh} {dwdwdwdQ} {b0wdNHqd} {0wdw)wdw} {Pdw)wdwd} {dwdwdwdP} {w)wdWdPd} {dwdwdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 188. Position after 37 Nxf6.

Black must lose his Queen with 37 … Qxf6 38 exf6. Black resigned here.

LESSON 19 Fighting the Sicilian Gross vs. Zrzavy Czechoslovakia, 1980 Opening: Sicilian Defense The Sicilian Defense is one of the most popular and analyzed replies to 1 e4. The usual variations that result after 1 e4 c5 2 Nf3 followed by 3 d4 provide White with many deep and complex lines to learn that do not give White any clear advantage. The downside is that the average player doesn’t have unlimited time to study just one opening. Therefore, it makes sense for you to study one or two specialized variations that are sound and likely to take your opponents into lines that they aren’t well prepared for. This is why I start most of my beginning and intermediate students with 1 e4 c5 2 f4 and later introduce them to what is called the Snyder Sicilian with 1 e4 c5 2 b3. Due to the popularity and success created by my use of this line in tournament play I was asked to write a book on it, the latest edition of which was published in 1984. In this game I will provide analysis of the most important lines in the Snyder defense to the Sicilian. The Snyder defense has been used by International Masters Moshe

Czerniak of Poland and Doug Root (a former student of mine) of the United States, by Grandmasters Nigel Short of England and Heikki Westerinen of Finland and by World Champion Boris Spassky. I selected the following game because it contains important themes found in the Snyder Sicilian as well as an instructive execution of a kingside attack. 1 e4 c5 By placing his Pawn on “c5” Black initiates the Sicilian Defense. One of Black’s plans is to exchange his “c” Pawn for White’s center Pawn on “d4” thereby opening his “c” file. This Pawn advance will also give Black a choice of placing his Queen on “c7”, “b6” or “a5” depending on how the game progresses. White, typically, will get most of his play on the kingside and Black’s play will be on the queenside. White usually has a spatial advantage in the center where a lively fight takes place, which often tips the balance.

-181-

182


2 b3

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kgn4} {0pdp0p0p} {wdwdwdwd} {dw0wdwdw} {wdwdPdwd} {dPdwdwdw} {PdP)W)P)} {$NGQIBHR} vllllllllV Diagram 189. Position after 2 b3

“Warum?” This is a German word I often say to my students when a move is made with an important idea behind it—why? It sounds, in the German pronunciation, like a car roaring (“varummm!”), but the point is well made. Ninety-nine percent of players preparing to play the Sicilian as Black look first at 2 Nf3 and never analyze 2 b3. This makes 2 b3 a good idea with which to surprise an opponent. In my book Winning Chess Tournaments, I make it clear that your first priority is to play against the board and not the player. Using this system is still in keeping with my dictum. The move is both sound and takes advantage of the typical lack of preparation by many opponents you will encounter. I might restate my advice as, “play against the board first and play against the opponent second.”

Now let’s get an understanding of what’s going on here. With 2 b3 White prepares to fianchetto his Bishop to “b2”. This immediately counters your typical Dragon Sicilian player, who exchanges Pawns in the center and uses a fianchetto of his Bishop to “g7” (1 e4 c5 2 Nf3 d6 3 d4 dxe4 4 Nxd4 Nf6 5 Nc3 g6 followed by 6 … Bg7), by preparing to bring White’s Bishop to the long diagonal “a1-a8”. Additionally, White’s Pawn on “b3” interferes with Black’s typical counterplay on the queenside. 2 … Nf6 Black develops his Knight toward the center and threatens White’s “e” Pawn. This line is similar to Alekhine’s Defense in that it provokes the advance of White’s “e” Pawn, which will drive Black’s Knight to “d5”. Typically, White’s Pawn on “e5” will be well supported by White’s Bishop on “b2” and a Knight on “f3”. Furthermore, the Pawn on “e5” will have a cramping effect on Black’s position. We will now examine some other possible lines (note: some of these lines may transpose into one another): 1. 2 … d6. Black frees his Bishop on the “c8-h3” diagonal, defends his “c” Pawn, and covers the “e5” square. 3 Bb2 Nf6,

Robert M. Snyder

• 3 … Nc6 is most likely to transpose into variation #2 (see below). • 3 … Nd7 might continue 4 f4 e6 5 Nf3 b6 6 Bd3 Bb7 7 0-0 Ngf6 8 e5 planning to meet 8 … Nd5 with 9 Be4, or 8 … dxe5 with 9 fxe5 Nd5 10 Qe1 Be7 11 Nc3. 4 Bb5+ Nbd7, • if 4 … Nc6, then 5 Bxc6+ bxc6 6 d3. • if 4 … Bd7, then 5 Bxd7+ planning to meet 5 … Nbxd7 with 6 Nc3 e6 7 f4 Be7 8 Qf3 0-0 9 Nge2, or 5 … Qxd7 with 6 Bxf6 gxf6 7 Qh5 Nc6 8 Nc3. 5 Qe2 (also playable is 5 Bxf6 gxf6 6 Nc3 a6 7 Bxd7+ Bxd7 8 Qf3 b5 9 a3 e6 10 Nge2) a6 6 Bxd7+ Bxd7 7 f4 e6 (if 7 … Bc6, then 8 d3 planning to meet 8 … d5 with 9 e5 Nd7 10 e6 fxe6 11 Nf3 d4 12 Ng5) 8 Nf3 Bc6 9 d3 Be7 10 Nbd2 0-0 11 0-0 b5 12 Rae1 a5 13 e5 Nd5 14 exd6 Nxf4 15 Qe5 Bf6 16 Qxc5 Bxb2 17 Qxc6 Rc8 18 Qxb5 Rxc2 19 g3 Nd5 20 Ne4 h6 (if 20 … Ba3, then 21 Nd4) 21 d4 Ba3 22 Qa6 Qc8 23 Qxc8 Rfxc8 24 Rf2 Rxf2 25 Kxf2 Rd8 26 Ne5 Bxd6 27 Nxd6 Rxd6 28 Rc1 and White stands better.

183

2. 2 … Nc6. Black develops his Knight toward the center covering the important “d4” and “e5” squares. 3 Bb2 d6 (if 3 … d5, then 4 exd5 Qxd5 5 Nc3 Qe5+ 6 Qe2 Qxe2+ 7 Ngxe2 Bf5 8 Nd5 0-0-0 9 Ne3 planning to meet 9 … Bg6 with 10 Nf4, or 9 … Bd7 with 10 d4 cxd4 11 Nxd4) 4 f4 Nf6 5 Nc3 e6, • if 5 … Bg4, then 6 Be2 Bxe2 7 Qxe2 planning to meet 7 … Nd4 with 8 Qd3 e6 9 Nf3 Nxf3+ 10 Qxf3 Be7 11 0-0. • if 5 … a6, then 6 Nf3 e6 7 Bd3 d5 8 a3 Be7 9 0-0 0-0 10 e5. • if 5 … g6, then 6 Bb5 Bg7 7 Nd5 0-0 8 Bxc6 bxc6 9 Nxf6+ exf6 10 d3 Re8 11 Ne2 d5 12 0-0. 6 Nf3 Be7 (if 6 … Bd7, then 7 Bb5 a6 8 Bxc6 Bxc6 9 d3) 7 Bb5 Bd7 (if 7 … 0-0, then 8 Bxc6 bxc6 9 d3) 8 0-0 a6 9 Bxc6 Bxc6 10 d3 0-0 11 Qe2 with a slight edge for White. 3. 2 … e6. Black frees his Bishop on the “f8-a3” diagonal and gives support for an early Pawn strike at the center on “d5”. 3 Bb2 d5 4 exd5 exd5 5 Nf3 Nc6, • If 5 … Nf6, then White has a choice: a. if 6 Bb5+, then 6 … Bd7 7 Qe2+ Qe7 8 0-0 Qxe2 9 Bxe2 planning to meet

184


9 … Ba7 with 10 d4 cxd4 11 Nxd4 0-0 12 Nd2 or 9 … Nc6 with 10 Re1 Be7 11 d4 0-0 12 Nbd2. b. if 6 d4, then 6 … Nc6 7 Bd3 Be7 8 0-0. 6 Bb5 Nf6 (if 6 … Qe7+, then 7 Be2 d4 8 0-0 with moves like c3, Re1, and Bb5 coming in; if 6 … Bd7, then 7 0-0 Nf6 8 Re1+ Be7 9 Bxf6 gxf6 10 d4; if 6 … f6, then 7 0-0 Bd6 8 d4 Nge7 9 c4 dxc4 10 Bxc4; and finally if 6 … Be6, then 7 0-0 Nge7 8 d4) 7 Qe2+ Be7 (if 7 … Qe7, then 8 Ne5 Bd7 9 Bxc6 Bxc6 10 Nxc6 bxc6 11 Bxf6 gxf6 12 Nc3 Kd7 13 f4; or if 7 … Be6, then 8 Ng5 Qd7 9 Nxe6 Qxe6 10 Bxc6+ bxc6 11 Bxf6 gxf6 12 Nc3 with a superior endgame for White) 8 Bxf6 gxf6 9 0-0 0-0 10 Re1 and White stands slightly better. 4. 2 … e5. Black blocks the “a1h8” diagonal and gains a strong foothold on the “d4” square. This leaves Black with a weakness on “d5”. 3 Bb2 Nc6 4 Nc3 Nf6 (if 4 … d6, then 5 Bc4 Nf6 6 Nge2 Be7 7 0-0 0-0 8 d3 Nd4 9 a4 with the idea of the thematic f4 Pawn break) 5 Bc4 Nxe4 6 Nxe4 d5 7 Bd3 dxe4 8 Bxe4 Nd4 9 Qh5 Qf6 10 Nf3 Bd6 11 Nxd4 exd4 (if 11 … cxd4, then 12 c3) 12 c3 g6 13 Qf3 Qxf3 14 Bxf3 d3 15 c4 0-0 16 0-0-0 and White stands better.

5. 2 … d5. This immediate Pawn break will either lead Black into playing an inferior gambit or give White a comfortable lead in development. This idea doesn’t have the same impact as it does in the Scandinavian (1 e4 d5) or Sicilian Grand Prix (1 e4 c5 2 f4 d5). 3 exd5 Qxd5, White gets a good game if Black attempts to make this into a gambit after 3 … Nf6 4 Bb5+: • if 4 … Nbd7, then 5 c4 a6 6 Bxd7+ Bxd7 7 Nf3 e6 8 dxe6 Bxe6 9 d4. • if 4 … Bd7, then 5 Bxd7+ Qxd7 6 c4 e6 7 Qe2 Be7 8 dxe6 Qxe6 9 Qxe6 fxe6 10 Nf3 Nc6 11 0-0 Nh5 12 Nc3 Nf4 13 Ba3 Rf8 14 Rae1. 4 Nc3 Qd8, • if 4 … Qe5+, then 5 Qe2 Qxe2+ 6 Bxe2 Nf6 7 Nb5 Na6 Bb2 and White stands better. • if 4 … Qd6, then 5 Bb2 Nc6 6 Ne4 Qd5 and White comes out with the better game after either 7 f3 Nf6 8 Bc4, or 7 Qf3 Bf5 8 Ng3. • if 4 … Qe6+, then 5 Be2 Nf6 6 Nf3 Nc6 7 0-0 Qd6 8 d3 planning to meet 8 … Bf5 with 9 Be3 e5 10 Nd2 0-0-0 11 Nc4 Qe6 12 Re1, or 8 … Nd4 with 9 Ne4 Nxe4 10 dxe4

Robert M. Snyder

e5 11 Bc4 Be6 12 Be6 Qxe6 13 c3 Nxf3+ 14 Qxf3 and White stands better in both lines. 5 Nf3 Nf6 6 Bb5+ Bd7 7 0-0 e6 8 Bb2 Nc6 9 Re1 Bd6 (if 9 … Be7, then 10 Bxc6 Bxc6 11 Ne5) 10 Ne4 Nxe4 11 Rxe4 0-0 12 Qe2 and White stands better. 6. 2 … b6. Black says, “two can play at this game!” and also prepares to fianchetto his Queen’s Bishop. Black’s attack on White’s “e” Pawn will be defended by constructive development and lead to an advantage for White. 3 Bb2 Bb7 4 Nc3 e6, • if 4 … d6, then 5 Nf3 Nf6 6 d4 planning to meet 6 … cxd4 with 7 Qxd4 Nc6 8 Qe3, or 6 … Nxe4? with 7 Nxe4 Bxe4 8 Ng5 Bb7 9 dxc5 bxc5 10 Bc4 d5 11 Qh5 g6 12 Qf3 f6 13 Rd1. • if 4 … Nc6, then 5 Nf3 e6 6 d4 cxd4 7 Nxd4 planning to meet 7 … Bc5 with 8 Nf3 Qb8 9 Qd2 Nf6 10 Qg5, or 7 … Nf6 with 8 Nxc6 Bxc6 (if 8 … dxc6, then 9 e5) 9 e5. 5 Nf3 a6, • if 5 … Nf6, then 6 e5 Ne4 7 Nxe4 Bxe4 8 Bc4. • if 5 … d6, then 6 d4 cxd4 7 Qxd4 Nc6 8 Qe3. 6 d4 cxd4 7 Qxd4 Qc7 and White gets an edge after either 8 Be2 Nc6

185

9 Qe3 Nf6 10 0-0, or 8 Rd1 Nf6 9 a3. 7. 2 … a6. Black commits early to prevent the placement of White’s Bishop on “b5” and prepares for queenside expansion. White stands better after 3 Bb2 Nc6 4 Nf3 e6 5 a3 d5 6 exd5 exd5 7 d4 Nf6 8 Be2 cxd4 9 Nxd4 Bc5 10 Nxc6 bxc6 11 0-0 0-0 12 Nd2 Re8 13 Bd3 Rb8 14 Qf3. 3 e5 White gets his “e” Pawn out of attack by advancing it and threatening Black’s Knight on “f6”. 3 … Nd5 This is the only good square to get the Knight out of attack and still keep it in play. Black would lose his Knight after 3 … Ne4?? 4 d3 Qa5+ 5 c3 Nxc3 6 Qd2. 4 Bb2

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kgw4} {0pdp0p0p} {wdwdwdwd} {dw0n)wdw} {wdwdwdwd} {dPdwdwdw} {PGP)W)P)} {$NdQIBHR} vllllllllV Diagram 190. Position after 4 Bb2.

186


Bg2 Nxd6 14 Nc3 and White stands clearly better.

White completes his fianchetto and reinforces his advanced Pawn on “e5”. 4 … Nc6

5 Nf3

Black develops his Knight toward the center and applies pressure to the important “d4” square and White’s Pawn on “e5”. Other possibilities for Black are: 1. 4 … d6 5 Nf3 Nc6 6 Bb5 Bd7 (or if 6 … Nc7, then 7 Bxc6+ bxc6 8 exd6 exd6 9 0-0 Ne6 10 d4 planning to meet 10 … Be7 with 11 dxc5 d5 12 b4 a5 12 a3) 7 exd6 exd6 (if 7 … e6, then 8 Nc3 Bxd6 9 Ne4 Be7 10 Bxc6 Bxc6 11 Ne5 with an edge for White) 8 0-0 Be7 9 d4 Nc7 10 c4! Nxb5 11 cxb5 Nxd4 12 Nxd4 cxd4 13 Qxd4 Bf6 14 Qe4+ Be6 15 Bxf6 Qxf6 16 Qxb7 0-0 17 Nd2 and White has an extra Pawn. 2. 4 … e6 5 Nf3 and Black has a choice: a. 5 … Be7 6 c4 Nf4 (if 6 … Nc7, then 7 d4 cxd4 8 Qxd4 Nc6 9 Qe3 and White stands clearly better) 7 h4 d6 8 g3 Ng6 9 exd6 Bf6 10 Bxf6 Qxf6 11 Nc3 with a clear advantage for White. b. 5 … b6 6 d4 Bb7 7 c4 Nf4 8 h4 d6 9 g3 Ng6 10 h5 Ne7 11 dxc5 bxc6 12 exd6 Nf5 13

White develops his Knight toward the center, defends his “e” Pawn, and covers the important “d4” square. 5 … e6 Black frees his Bishop on the “f8-a3” diagonal and protects the “d5” square. Black’s other possibilities are: 1. If 5 … Nf4, then 6 g3 Ne6 7 Bg2 g6 8 c3 Bg7 9 d4 cxd4 10 cxd4 d5 11 0-0 0-0 12 Nc3 Nc7 13 Qd2 Bg4 14 Rac1 and White has a nice spatial advantage. 2. If Black immediately prepares to fianchetto his Bishop with 5 … g6, then the game might continue 6 Ng5 (threatening 7 e6) with plans to meet: a. 6 … f6? with 7 Bc4!. b. 6 … f5 with 7 c4 Nf4 8 g3 Ne6 9 Nxe6 dxe6 10 Bg2. c. 6 … Bg7 with 7 Qf3 0-0 8 Qxd5 e6 9 Qxc5 Qxg5 10 Qe3 Qxe3+ 11 dxe3 Nxe5 12 Bd4 d5 13 Nd2.

Robert M. Snyder

6 Bb5

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1kgw4} {0pdpdp0p} {wdndpdwd} {dB0n)wdw} {wdwdwdwd} {dPdwdNdw} {PGP)W)P)} {$NdQIwdR} vllllllllV Diagram 191. Position after 6 Bb5.

White develops his Bishop to its most effective square and clears the way for castling. Often the Bishop will be exchanged for Black’s Knight on “c6” thereby doubling Black’s Pawns while relieving the pressure on White’s “e” Pawn and “d4” square. 6 … Be7 Black develops his Bishop to its only good available square and prepares to castle. Black’s other choices are: 1. If 6 … Qc7, then 7 0-0 Be7 (7 … a6 8 Bxc6 Qxc6 9 d4 b5 10 c4 bxc4 11 bxc4 Ne7 12 Qd3 Bb7 13 Nbd2 clearly favors White) 8 d4 cxd4 9 Bxc6 dxc6 10 Qxd4 0-0 11 Qg4 and White stands clearly better. 2. If 6 … Qb6, then 7 Bxc6 Qxc6 8 0-0 b5 9 d3 Bb7 10 Qd2 d6 11 Re1 Rd8 12 Qg5 and White stands slightly better.

187

7 0-0 White removes his King from the center and activates his kingside Rook. 7 … 0-0 Black also removes his King from the center and brings his Rook to a more active location. 8 Nc3 White develops his Knight toward the center, challenges Black’s Knight on “d5” and completes his minor piece development. From “c3” the Knight has a potential strong post on “e4”. Also playable is 8 Bxc6 dxc6 (if 8 … bxc6, then 9 c4 Nf4 10 d4 cxd4 11 Qd2 Ng6 12 Qxd4) 9 d3 b5 10 Nbd2 a5 11 Ne4 and White stands slightly better. 8 … Nxc3 By exchanging Knights Black prevents White from favorably exchanging Knights on “d5” (with 9 Nxd5 exd5 10 d4) and prevents the Knight from entering the strong post on “e4”. 9 Bxc3 White recovers his Knight. White avoids 9 dxc6, which would give White doubled Pawns and block White’s Bishop on the “a1-h8” diagonal.

188


cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1w4kd} {0pdpgp0p} {wdndpdwd} {dB0w)wdw} {wdwdwdwd} {dPGwdNdw} {PdP)W)P)} {$wdQdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 192. Position after 9 Bxc3.

Black’s Queen is now far removed from assisting with matters on the kingside. More accurate would be 10 … Nb4 11 d4 Nd5 12 Bb2 cxd4 13 Bxd4 fxe5 14 Qxe5 Bf6 15 Qg3 Qc7 16 Qxc7 Nxc7 17 Bd3 though White stands better due to his spatial advantage and lead in development. If 10 … d5, then 11 Bxc6 bxc6 12 d3 and White is clearly better. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

9 … f6 Black plans to exchange his “f ” Pawn for White’s Pawn on “e5” (which cramps Black’s game) and then bring his Bishop to “f6” (challenging White’s Bishop on the “a1-h8” diagonal). If 9 … d5, then 10 Bxc6 bxc6 11 d3 a5 12 a4 Qc7 13 Qd2 and White stands better. 10 Qe2 White brings his Queen to a more active location, provides further protection to his Pawn on “e5” and connects his Rooks on the first rank. 10 … Qb6? Black’s idea is to tie down White’s Queen to the defense of his Bishop on “b5” and allow his Queen to recapture on “c6” to avoid doubled Pawns should White exchange his Bishop on “c6”. The drawback of this move is that

11 Bd3 The Bishop is relocated to apply pressure on Black’s kingside and to relieve White’s Queen of its defense. However, it is more accurate to first prevent the entry of Black’s Knight to “b4” with 11 a3. After 11 a3, the game might continue 11 … fxe5 12 Nxe5 Nxe5 13 Bxe5 d6 14 Bg3 Bg6 15 Rae1 and White stands clearly better. 11 … Nb4

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdw4kd} {0pdpgw0p} {w1wdp0wd} {dw0w)wdw} {whwdwdwd} {dPGBdNdw} {PdP)Q)P)} {$wdwdRIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 193. Position after 11 … Nb4.

Robert M. Snyder

Black seeks to reduce White’s positional advantage by exchanging his Knight for White’s Bishop on “d3”. Closing off the kingside with 11 … f5 would give White a great position after 12 Bc4 Qc7 13 a4 b6 14 d4. 12 exf6 White favorably opens up lines on the kingside. 12 … Bxf6 Black recovers his Pawn. If 12 … gxf6, then White would play 13 Ne5! planning to meet 13 … fxe5?? with 14 Qg4+ Kh8 (if 14 … Kf7, then 15 Qh5+ leads to a quick mate) 15 Bxe5+ Bf6 16 Qh4. Therefore, after 13 Ne5! Black does best to play 13 … Nxd3 14 Nxd3 with approximate equality. 13 Bxf6 White removes Black’s good defensive Bishop on the kingside. Otherwise, Black threatens to defend with 13 … Nxd3 14 Qxd3 Be7. 13 … gxf6 Black opens up his kingside but keeps White’s Knight out of “g5”. If 12 … Rxf6, then White would play 13 Ng5 (threatening 14 Qh5 and 14 Bxh7+) Nxd3 14 Qxd3 with a clear advantage.

189

14 Nh4

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdw4kd} {0pdpdwdp} {w1wdp0wd} {dw0wdwdw} {whwdwdwH} {dPdBdwdw} {PdP)Q)P)} {$wdwdRIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 194. Position after 14 Nh4.

White opens the “d1-h5” diagonal for his Queen and threatens to win quickly with 15 Bxh7+ Kxh7 16 Qh5+ Kg8 (or 16 … Kg7) 17 Qg6+ Kh8 18 Rae1 Nd5 19 Re4 leading to mate, or 15 Qg4+ Kh8 16 Qh5 Nxd3 17 Ng6+ Kg7 18 Nxf8. 14 … Nxd3 Black removes the immediate threats on his kingside by exchanging his Knight for White’s Bishop. 15 Qxd3 White recovers his piece and avoids getting doubled isolated Pawns, which would have occurred had he played 15 cxd3. 15 … d5 Black increases his foothold in the center and opens “d7” for his undeveloped

190


Bishop. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 16 Rae1

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdw4kd} {0pdwdwdp} {w1wdp0wd} {dw0pdwdw} {wdwdwdwH} {dPdQdwdw} {PdP)w)P)} {dwdw$RIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 195. Position after 16 Rae1.

White brings his inactive Rook on the queenside into play on the half open “e” file with the plan of using it to assist on the kingside. This is rather an interesting position. The question may be “Pawn mass or Pawn mess?” Black has a lot of Pawns massed in and around the center. However, these Pawns can easily become targets of attack. With Black’s King being open and exposed to attack, White is clearly better here. 16 … Bd7? Black develops his Bishop and connects his Rooks. However, this is too slow. Black could have offered more resistance by using his Rook actively to defend on the kingside with 16 …

Rf7, planning to meet 17 Re3 with 17 … Rg7 (though White still has a nice advantage after 18 Rg3), or 17 Nf5 with 17 … Kh8 (Black would lose quickly after 17 … exf5? because of 18 Re8+ and now if 18 … Rf8, then 19 Qxd5+ Kg7 20 Rfe1, or if 18 … Kg7, then 19 Qg3+ Kh6 20 Rg8) 18 Qxd5! Qc7 19 Rxe6 Bxe6 20 Qxe6 Qd7 21 Qc4 Rd8 22 d3. 17 Re3 White continues with his plan of bringing his Rook to the third rank with the idea of using it to attack on the kingside. However, even stronger is a direct assault on Black’s King with 17 Qg3+ Kf7 (if 17 … Kh8, then White wins quickly with 18 Ng6+! hxg6 19 Qxg6 e5 20 Re3 threatening 21 Qh5+ Kg7 22 Rg3+ Bg4 23 Rxg4++) 18 Qf3 Rae8 19 Qh5+ Kg8 20 Re3 Rf7 21 Qh6 (threatening 22 Rg3+ Kh8 23 Ng6+ Kg8 24 Ne5+ Kh8 25 Nxf7++) Rg7 22 Qxf6. 17 … Rf7 Black brings his Rook into play to help shield his King against the impending attack. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

Robert M. Snyder

18 Rg3+

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdwdkd} {0pdbdrdp} {w1wdp0wd} {dw0pdwdw} {wdwdwdwH} {dPdQdw$w} {PdP)w)P)} {dwdwdRIw} vllllllllV

191

19 … Rf8?

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdw4kd} {0pdbdw4p} {w1wdp0wd} {dw0pdwdw} {wdwdwdwH} {dPdQdw$w} {PdP)w)P)} {dwdw$wIw} vllllllllV



White brings his Rook into the attack against Black’s King.

Black brings his other Rook to the kingside in an attempt to help matters there. However, Black completely overlooked White’s threat, which now becomes an execution. Black should have defended against White’s threat by bringing his Queen toward the kingside and defending the Pawn on “d5” with 19 … Qd6. However, even after 19 … Qd6 White has a powerful attack after 20 Ree3 Be8 21 Rxg7+ Kxg7 22 Qf5! Bf7 23 f4 Qd8 24 Qg4+ Kh8 25 f5. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

18 … Rg7 Black continues with his plan of using his Rook to shield his King. If 18 … Kh8? then 19 Ng6+ planning to meet 19 … hxg6 with 20 Qxg6 and mate follows. Black gets into trouble if his King tries to make a run for it with 18 … Kf8. After 18 … Kf8 White quickly penetrates with 19 Qe3 Re8 20 Qh6+ Ke7 21 Rg7. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 19 Re1 White brings his inactive Rook into play on the half-open “e” file. Black never suspected that this subtle looking move had a devastating threat behind it!

20 Nf5! Suddenly White’s Knight comes to life! White’s immediate threat is 21 Rxg7+ Kh8 22 Qh3 followed by 23 Qxh7++.

192


20 … exf5 Black had no choice but to accept the sacrifice and remove White’s menacing Knight. If 20 … Rxg3?, then 21 Qxg3+ Kf7 22 Qg7+ Ke8 23 Qe7++. If 20 … Rg5, then 21 h4 will polish Black off. 21 Qxd5+ White wins Black’s “d” Pawn and attacks Black’s King and loosely defended Bishop. It is now clear why Black should have defended his “d” Pawn earlier with 19 … Qd6. 21 … Kh8?

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdw4wi} {0pdbdw4p} {w1wdw0wd} {dw0Qdpdw} {wdwdwdwd} {dPdwdw$w} {PdP)w)P)} {dwdw$wIw} vllllllllV


Black gets his King out of check and attempts to hide his King in the corner. However, this will result in immediate collapse. Black’s best defense is 21 … Rff7 22 Re7 Kf8 23 Rxg7 Rxg7 24 Rxd7 Rxd7 25 Qxd7. This would result in a lost

endgame for Black, but it is his best practical chance. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 22 Rxg7 White removes the defender of Black’s Bishop. 22 … Bc6 Black attempts to save his Bishop by using it to attack Black’s Queen. If 22 … Kxg7, then 23 Re7+ and after Black’s King moves White plays 24 Qxd7 winning easily. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 23 Ree7!

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdw4wi} {0pdw$w$p} {w1bdw0wd} {dw0Qdpdw} {wdwdwdwd} {dPdwdwdw} {PdP)w)P)} {dwdwdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 199. Position after 23 Ree7.

Robert M. Snyder

White has a forced mate in two moves! Black resigned here. If 23 … Bxd5, then 24 Rxh7+ Kg8 25 Reg7++.

193

LESSON 20

Knight toward the center and prevents White from moving his Pawn to “e4”.

Sacrifice on “f2”

2 c4 Bukhuti Gurgenidze vs Mikhail Tal USSR Championship, 1961 Opening: Benoni Defense Mikhail Tal was one of the best known attacking players of all time. Tal was born in Riga, Latvia in 1936 and was World Champion from 1960 to 1961. Bukhuti Gurgenidze was a Grandmaster. He was born in Surami, Georgia (USSR) in 1933. Tal sacrifices a Knight on “f2” to expose Black’s King to attack. Tal’s pieces then immediately move in for the kill. 1 d4 This is the second most popular first move for White. In addition to occupying the center with a Pawn White frees his Bishop on the “c1-h6” diagonal, opens “d2” for possible use by his Knight and allows his Queen to exert pressure in the center along the “d” file. 1 … Nf6 This is Black’s most flexible move giving him a variety of reasonable continuations. Black develops his

White continues to build a Pawn center and opens the “d1-a4” diagonal for use by his Queen. This move is consistent with the concept of not blocking the “c” Pawn in a “d” Pawn opening. Other possible lines at move two: 1. White lacks enough compensation for his Pawn in the BlackmarDiemer Gambit after 2 Nc3 d5 3 e4 dxe4 4 f3 c5 5 d5 (if 5 dxc5, then 5 … Qxd1+ 6 Kxd1 Bf5) exf3 6 Nxf3 a6 7 Bg5 Qb6. 2. Black gets a comfortable game in the Torre Attack after 2 Bg5 Ne4 3 Bf4 (if 3 Bh4, then 3 … c5 4 f3 g5 5 fxe4 hxg4 6 e3 Bh6) d5 4 e3 (or if 4 f3, then 4 … Nf6 5 Nc3 e6 6 e4 Bb4 7 e5 Nfd7 8 a3 Bxc3+ 9 bxc3 c5) Bf5 5 Bd3 e6 6 Nd2 Nxd2 7 Qxd2 Bxd3 8 Qxd3 Bd6. 3. The Colle System with 2 Nf3 b6 3 e3 Bb7 4 Bd3 doesn’t present Black with any problems after 4 … e6 5 0-0 c5 6 Nbd2 Nc6 7 c3 d5 8 Re1 Be7 9 dxc5 bxc5 10 e4 0-0 11 exd5 Qxd5! and now if 12 Bb1 (or 12 Bc2), then 12 … Rfd8 with an equal game.

-194-

Robert M. Snyder

2 … c5

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kgw4} {0pdp0p0p} {wdwdwhwd} {dw0wdwdw} {wdP)wdwd} {dwdwdwdw} {P)wdP)P)} {$NGQIBHR} vllllllllV

Diagram 200. Position after 2 … c5.

Black initiates the Benoni Defense by using his “c” Pawn to strike at White’s Pawn center. Black provokes the advance of White’s “d” Pawn. With White’s Pawns stationed on “c4” and “d5” Black’s thematic Pawn breaks will be on “b5” and “e6”. The Benoni is a dynamic defense where a good understanding of positional concepts is important. I usually recommend to my students that they use the Nimzo-Indian (1 d4 Nf6 2 c4 e6 3 Nc3 Bb4) and Queen’s Indian (1 d4 Nf6 2 c4 e6 3 Nf3 b6) Defenses, which complement each other. These will be covered in the next few chapters. 3 d5 White eliminates the attack on his “d” Pawn while using it to cramp Black’s position in the center. Another reasonable line for White is 3 Nf3 cxd4

195

4 Nxd4 e6 5 Nc3 Nc6 and White can now either play 6 g3 Qb6 or 6 Ndb5 d5. If White played 3 dxc5, then Black can immediately attack White’s weak Pawn on “c5” and get a comfortable game with 3 … e6. 3 … e6 Black applies pressure to White’s “d” Pawn and frees his Bishop on the “a3-f8” diagonal. Black can also play the Volga Gambit (also known as the Benko Gambit) by sacrificing a Pawn to get pressure on the queenside with 3 … b5. After 3 … b5, the game might continue 4 cxb5 a6 5 bxa6 g6 6 Nc3 Bxa6 7 e4 Bxf1 8 Kxf1 d6 9 Nf3 Bg7 10 h3 0-0 11 Kg1 Nbd7 12 Kh2, and now Black can either play 12 … Qa5 13 Re1 Rfb8 14 Qc2 Ne8 15 Bd2, or 12 … Qb6 13 Re1 Rfb8 14 Kg1 Ne8 15 Re2. Although Black succeeds in getting pressure on queenside in these lines, it isn’t enough compensation for the sacrificed Pawn. If Black decides to immediately fianchetto his Bishop with 3 … g6, then the game might continue 4 Nc3 d6 5 e4 Bg7 6 Bd3 0-0 7 Nf3 e6 8 0-0 exd5 9 exd5 Bg4 10 h3 Bxf3 11 Qxf3 Nbd7 12 Qd1 Re8 11 Bd2 Ne5 12 Be2 a6 13 Qc2 and White stands better.

196


4 Nc3 White develops his Knight toward the center, adds protection to his Pawn on “d5”, and covers the important “e4” square. 4 … exd5 Black opens the “e” file for future use by his Rook. 5 cxd5

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kgw4} {0pdpdp0p} {wdwdwhwd} {dw0Pdwdw} {wdwdwdwd} {dwHwdwdw} {P)wdP)P)} {$wGQIBHR} vllllllllV Diagram 201. Position after 5 cxd5.

White recovers his Pawn. Recapturing with the Knight would allow Black to achieve a more simplified game by exchanging Knights after 5 Nxd5 Nxd5 with the plan of meeting 6 Qxd5 or 6 cxd5 with 6 … d6. 5 … d6 Black blocks the possible advance of White’s “d” Pawn, frees his Bishop on

the “h3-c8” diagonal and opens “d7” for possible use by his Knight. 6 Nf3 White begins to mobilize his kingside pieces by developing his Knight toward the center. 6 … g6 Black prepares to fianchetto his Bishop to “g7” and castle on the kingside. The long “h8-a1” diagonal certainly provides a better home for the Bishop than posting it with 6 … Be7. After 6 … Be7 the game might continue 7 e4 0-0 8 Be2 Nbd7 9 0-0 a6 10 a4 and White stands better. 7 e4 White occupies the center with a second Pawn, frees his Bishop on the “f1-a6” diagonal and adds further protection to his Pawn on “d5”. 7 … Bg7 Black completes his fianchetto and clears the way to castle on the kingside.

Robert M. Snyder

8 Be2

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kdw4} {0pdwdpgp} {wdw0whpd} {dw0Pdwdw} {wdwdPdwd} {dwHwdNdw} {P)wdB)P)} {$wGQIwdR} vllllllllV Diagram 202. Position after 8 Be2.

White develops his Bishop and prepares to castle. A reasonable alternative for White is to develop his Bishop more aggressively with 8 Bd3 0-0 9 0-0 a6 10 a4. There are advantages and disadvantages to placing the Bishop on “d3” instead of “e2”. A good reason behind having the Bishop on “d3” is that it would provide additional protection to White’s “e” Pawn, which is soon to be placed under further attack when Black places his Rook on the “e” file. A disadvantage of having the Bishop on “d3” is that the Bishop might become a target if Black maneuvers a Knight to “e5”. Furthermore, it is a common idea in this opening for Black to try to expand on the queenside with his Pawns. In such a case the Bishop is also more likely to be a target for Black on “d3”.

197

8 … 0-0 Black removes his King from the center and brings his Rook into play so it can go to the half open “e” file. 9 0-0 White also removes his King from the center and activates his kingside Rook. 9 … Re8 Black places his Rook on the half open “e” file and threatens to win Black’s “e” Pawn with 10 … Nxe4. 10 Nd2 White uses his Knight to defend against the threat on his “e” Pawn. This also frees White’s “f ” Pawn and gives White the possibility of posting his Knight on “c4” (a potentially very strong post, which puts pressure on Black’s Pawn on “d6” and covers the “e5” square once again). 10 … Na6 The placement of the Knight on the edge of the board is temporary. Black plans to reposition it on “c7” where it can support the advance of his “b” Pawn. However, developing the Knight with 10 … Nbd7 is the logical alternative (a drawback being that it blocks Black’s Bishop on “c8”). After 10 … Nbd7 the

198


game might continue 11 a4 a6 12 Qc2 Rb8 13 a5 b6 14 axb6 Nxb6 15 Nb3 and White stands better. 11 Re1

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1rdkd} {0pdwdpgp} {ndw0whpd} {dw0Pdwdw} {wdwdPdwd} {dwHwdwdw} {P)wHB)P)} {$wGQ$wIw} vllllllllV Diagram 203. Position after 11 Re1.

White brings his Rook to a more active location on a center file where it can potentially add protection to White’s “e” Pawn. Also playable is 11 Bb5 Bd7 12 Bxa6 bxa6 13 Qc2 and White stands better. 11 … Nc7 Black removes his Knight from the edge of the board and begins to prepare for the possible advance of his “b” Pawn. 12 a4 White immediately takes action to restrain Black’s queenside expansion.

12 … b6 Black opens the “c8-a6” diagonal for his Bishop. Since White’s last move weakened his “b4” square, Black’s strongest plan is to maneuver the Knight to “b4” via “a6”. Black’s move permits his Knight to be moved to “a6” without allowing doubled isolated “a” Pawns (if 12 … Na6?, then 13 Bb5 Re7 14 Bxa6 bxa6 15 Nc4). The other important point behind Black’s last move is to be able to meet 13 a5? with 13 … bxa5. After 13 … bxa5 White cannot immediately recover his Pawn with 14 Rxa5? because of 14 … Ncxd5 with a discovered attack on White’s Rook by Black’s Queen. 13 Qc2 White brings his Queen to a more active post where she defends the “e” Pawn. This will free White’s Knight on “d2” of the burden of defending the “e” Pawn, which gives it the possibility of going to the strong “c4” post. 13 … Ng4? The ideas behind this move are to open Black’s Bishop on the long “h8-a1” diagonal and to attack White’s weak “f2” square. However, it would be much stronger to maneuver the other Knight to take advantage of the weak “b4” square with 13 … Na6 14 Bb5

Robert M. Snyder

Nb4 15 Qd1 Re7 16 a5 and White still stands better. 14 h3?

cuuuuuuuuC {rdb1rdkd} {0whwdpgp} {w0w0wdpd} {dw0Pdwdw} {PdwdPdnd} {dwHwdwdP} {w)QHB)Pd} {$wGw$wIw} vllllllllV Diagram 204. Position after 14 h3.

White only forces Black to do what he was already planning! White misses his opportunity to neutralize Black’s plan and get a great game with 14 Bxg4! Bxg4 15 Nc4 Qf6 16 Qd2 Rad8 17 Qf4. However, 14 f3?? allows Black to win quickly with either 14 … Qh4 or 14 … Bd4+ 15 Kh1 Nf2+ 16 Kg1 Qh4. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 14 … Nxf2! Black sacrifices his Knight to expose White’s King to attack. Knight sacrifices on “f2”, after the King has castled and the White Rook has left the “f ” file, can also be found in LESSONS SEVENTEEN and TWENTY-THREE in Unbeatable Chess Lessons.

199

15 Kxf2 White accepts the sacrifice by removing the menacing Knight. Declining the sacrifice with 15 Nb5 would leave White in serious trouble after 15 … Nxb5 16 Bxb5 Bd4. However, White’s best move here is to decline Black’s sacrifice and get some compensation for his Pawn with 15 Nf3. After 15 Nf3 the game might continue 15 … Bxc3 16 bxc3 Nxe4 17 Bd3 Ng3 18 Bf4 Nf5 and White is still very much in the game. Psychologically, it would be wise to disrupt Black’s plans of being the aggressor by making him the defender! 15 … Qh4+ Black brings his Queen into the attack on White’s King. 16 Kf1 White gets his King out of check while using his King to protect his Rook on “e1”. White would get checkmated quickly after 16 g3? Bd4+ 17 Kg2 (if 17 Kf1, then 17 … Qxh3++, or if 17 Kf3, then 17 … Qh5+ and now if 18 Kg2, then 18 … Bxh3+ 19 Kh1 Bg4+ 20 Kg2 Qh3++, or if 18 g4, then 18 … Qxh3+ 19 Kf4 Be3++) Qxh3+ 18 Kf3 Re5! 19 Nb5 (if 19 Kf4, then 19 … g5+ 20 Kf3 Bg4++) Bg4+ 20 Kf4 g5++.

200


See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 16 … Bd4 Black brings his Bishop to the assault on White’s King and threatens 17 … Qf2++. 17 Nd1

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdrdkd} {0whwdpdp} {w0w0wdpd} {dw0Pdwdw} {PdwgPdw1} {dwdwdwdP} {w)QHBdPd} {$wGN$Kdw} vllllllllV

Diagram 205. Position after 17 Nd1.

White defends against the mate by covering the “f2” square with his Knight. This is White’s only move to prevent a mate in one. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 17 … Qxh3! White wins a second Pawn for his sacrificed piece and penetrates White’s kingside position with his Queen with the threat of 18 … Qh1++. White

cannot capture Black’s Queen with 18 hxg3?? because of 18 … Bxh3++. This is certainly more energetic than 17 … Bxh3, which would have also left White in a bad way. 18 Bf3 White defends against Black’s mate threat by opening “e2” as an escape square for his King. The Bishop also defends the “e” and “g” Pawns. White is now threatening to win Black’s Queen with 19 gxh3. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 18 … Qh2!

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdrdkd} {0whwdpdp} {w0w0wdpd} {dw0Pdwdw} {PdwgPdwd} {dwdwdBdw} {w)QHwdP1} {$wGN$Kdw} vllllllllV


Black gets his Queen out of attack and keeps her actively positioned in the attack against White’s King. Many players would be temped to directly attack White’s King with 18 … Qh1+. However, after White’s King moves

Robert M. Snyder

with 19 Ke2 Black’s Queen is attacked by the Rook on “e1”, which buys White valuable time to defend. After 19 Ke2 the game might continue 19 … Ba6+ (if 19 … Qh4, then 20 Nc3 planning to meet 20 … Bf2 with 21 g3 Qxg3 22 Rh1) 20 Nc4 Qh4 21 Ne3 f5 (if 21 … Bxe3, then 22 Bxe3 Nxd5 23 Rh1) 22 Kd1 fxe4 23 Be2 Rad8. Black still would have the better game, but White is better off in this line than after the actual move played in the game.

201

Nd3 wins) Be6 24 Bc4 Nd3 and Black has a won game. If White immediately takes the “c4” post for his Knight with 19 Nc4, Black wins after 19 … f5 20 Nf2 Ba6 21 a5 fxe4 22 Rxe4 Rxe4 23 Nxe4 g5 (also 23 … b5 24 Ncxd6 Ne8! wins) 24 Ke1 Rf8 25 Qe2 (if 25 axb6, then 25 … Rxf3! 26 Qe2 Qg1+ 27 Kd2 Re3 does the trick) g4 26 Bxg4 Bxc4 27 Qxc4 Qh4+ 28 Kd2 Qxg4. 19 … f5

19 Ne3 White gets his Knight off of the first rank and back into play. White hopes that the Knight will help shield his King on the “e” file if the King must flee via “e2”. White anticipates that Black will post his Bishop on “a6” and attack on the “a6-f1” diagonal. Therefore, White further secures the “c4” square for his Knight to block the “a6-f1” diagonal. Here 19 Nf2 (shielding the King, covering the “h1” square, blocking Black’s Bishop from attacking “g1” and adding further protection to White’s “e” Pawn) looks much better on the surface than it is. Black would continue with 19 … Nxd5 20 Nc4 (if 20 exd5, then 20 … Rxe1+ 21 Kxe1 Qg1+ 22 Nf1 Ba6 23 Nd3 Re8+ 24 Be2 Bc8! with the idea of 25 … Bg4 and Black wins) Nb4 21 Qb3 d5 22 Ne3 dxe4 23 Be2 (if 23 Bg4, then 23 … Ba6+ 24 Be2

Black seeks to open lines in the center to take advantage of Black’s exposed King. A good alternative is for Black to use his Bishop on the “a6-f1” diagonal to attack White’s King with 19 … Ba6+ 20 Kf2 (if 20 Ndc4, then 20 … f5 21 exf5 gxf5 with the idea of 22 … f4) f5 21 Ndf1 Bxf1 planning to meet 22 Rxf1 with 22 … f4, or 22 Kxf1 with 22 … fxe4 23 Bxe4 Qf4+ 24 Bf3 Bxe3 and Black is two Pawns ahead. 20 Ndc4 White posts his Knight actively on “c4” to block the “f1-a6” diagonal, adds additional protection to his Knight on “e3” and puts pressure on Black’s “d” Pawn. White’s King is exposed to attack on the kingside. Therefore, an interesting idea for White is 20 Ke2, threatening to move his King to a safer location with

202


21 Kd1 (Black sacrificed a piece for two Pawns and cannot afford to allow White to consolidate his position). Therefore, after 20 Ke2 Black needs to exchange his Bishop for White’s Knight on “e3” to keep White’s King exposed to attack with 20 … Bxe3 21 Kxe3 Nxd5+ 22 Kf2 Qh4+ 23 g3 Qh2+ 24 Bg2 Nf6. This is a nice try, but White would still be in trouble. 20 … fxe4 Black opens lines against White’s exposed King. 21 Bxe4

cuuuuuuuuC {rdbdrdkd} {0whwdwdp} {w0w0wdpd} {dw0Pdwdw} {PdNgBdwd} {dwdwHwdw} {w)QdwdP1} {$wGw$Kdw} vllllllllV

Diagram 207. Position after 21 Bxe4.

White recovers the Pawn. 21 … Ba6 Black completes the development of his minor pieces and increases the pressure by pinning White’s Knight on “c4” and freeing his queenside Rook on the

eighth rank. Black’s primary threat is to polish White off quickly with 22 … Rxe4! 23 Qxe4 Re8 planning to meet 24 Qd3 or 24 Qc2 with 24 … Nxd5 and White is crushed. 22 Bf3 White does his best to try to consolidate his position by removing his Bishop from the attack along the “e” file. 22 … Re5 This move gives Black the option of either doubling his Rooks on the “e” file or shifting the queenside Rook to the “f ” file. Additionally, it attacks White’s weak “d” Pawn with a second piece. At this point, Black has a variety of winning continuations. Another good choice would be to pin and attack White’s Bishop with 22 … Rf8 (with the threats of 23 … Nxd5 and 23 … Rf4 with the idea of winning White’s Knight on “c4” by 24 … Bxe3) and plan to meet 23 Ke2 with 23 … Rxf3! 24 Kxf3 Rf8+ 25 Ke2 (if 25 Ke4, then 25 … Qh4+ forking the King and Rook on “e1”) Bxe3 26 Bxe3 Qxg2+ 27 Kd1 Qxc2+ 28 Kxc2 Bxc4. 23 Ra3 White brings his inactive Rook into play to help defend in the center along the third rank.

Robert M. Snyder

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdwdkd} {0whwdwdp} {b0w0wdpd} {dw0P4wdw} {PdNgwdwd} {$wdwHBdw} {w)QdwdP1} {dwGw$Kdw} vllllllllV

Diagram 208. Position after 23 Ra3.

203

threat on his “d” Pawn. This leads to a quick downfall. There are moves that offer more resistance, but still result in a lost game: 1. 24 Ke2 Bxe3 25 Rxe3 Rxe3+ 26 Bxe3 Qf4. 2. 24 b4 cxb4 25 Rd3 Bc3. 3. 24 Rd3 Rf5 25 Ke2 Rxf3 26 Kxf3 Nxd5. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

23 … Rae8 Black continues with his plan of doubling his Rooks on the “e” file. Black is now threatening 24 … Nxd5 planning to meet 25 Bxd5+ with 25 … Rxd5 and if 26 Nxd5?, then 26 … Qg1++. Once again a strong alternative for Black is to place his Rook on the “f ” file with 23 … Rf8 and threaten 24 … Rxf3+ with the plan of meeting 25 gxf3 with 25 … Bxc4+ 26 Qxc4 Rg5 27 Ng4 Rxg4!. After 23 … Rf8 the game might continue 24 Ke2 Rxf3 25 Kxf3 Qh5+ 26 g4 (if 26 Kf2, then 26 … Rf5+ 27 Kg1 Qh4 28 Rf1 Bxc4 29 Rxf5 gxf5) Qh3+ 27 Ke2 (if 27 Kf2, then 27 … Rxe3 28 Nxe3 Bxe3+ 29 Raxe3 Qh2+ 30 Kf3 Qxc2) Bxe3 28 Bxe3 Qxg4+ 29 Kd2 Bxc4. 24 Bd2? White gets his last minor piece developed while totally ignoring the

24 … Nxd5 Black wins White’s “d” Pawn and brings his Knight into the attack. Black now threatens 25 … Nxe3+. 25 Bxd5+ White tries to relieve some of the pressure by exchanging his Bishop for Black’s Knight. 25 … Rxd5

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdrdkd} {0wdwdwdp} {b0w0wdpd} {dw0rdwdw} {PdNgwdwd} {$wdwHwdw} {w)QGwdP1} {dwdw$Kdw} vllllllllV

Diagram 209. Position after 25 … Rxd5.

204


Black recovers his piece. There is no way for White to defend against the attack on his King. Among Black’s many possible continuations is the threat 26 … Bc8! to cut off White’s King from escaping on the White squares. 26 Ke2 White’s King tries to make a run for it. White would like to hide his King on “d1”. Not 26 Nxd5? because of 26 … Qg1++. 26 … Bxe3 Black opens up the position around White’s King and forces the win of material. 27 Rxe3 White recovers the piece. Not 27 Bxe3? because of 27 … Qxg2++. 27 … Bxc4+

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdrdkd} {0wdwdwdp} {w0w0wdpd} {dw0rdwdw} {Pdbdwdwd} {dwdw$wdw} {w)QGKdP1} {dwdw$wdw} vllllllllV

Diagram 210. Position after 27 … Bxc4+.

Black wins White’s Knight and continues his assault on White’s King. White resigned here. White cannot recover his piece with 28 Qxc4 because of 28 … Qxg2+ 29 Kd1 Qxd2++. And, if 28 Kd1, then Black wins efficiently with 28 … Rxe3 29 Rxe3 Qg1+ 30 Re1 Qf2 (threatening 31 … Bb3!) 31 Kc1 Bb3! planning to meet 32 Qxb3 with 32 … Qxd2+ Kb1 33 Qxe1+.

LESSON 21

Black frees his Bishop on the “f8-a3” diagonal and prepares support for the possible placement of a Pawn on “d5”.

Sacrifice on “h7” Anatoly Karpov vs Victor Korchnoi Moscow, 1974 Opening: Queen’s Indian Defense

3 Nf3 White develops a Knight toward the center.

In the last lesson we looked at a Knight sacrifice against an “f” Pawn to expose the enemy King to attack. In this lesson we will examine a Knight sacrifice against an “h” Pawn to expose the enemy King to attack. This is one of the shortest wins at the World Championship level. Note: For instructional purposes the most common order of moves played in this opening are given, instead of the transposed order played in the game. The actual move order in the game was 1 d4 Nf6 2 Nf3 e6 3 g3 b6 4 Bg2 Bb7 5 c4 resulting in the same position after White’s fifth move. 1 d4 Nf6 2 c4 e6

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kgw4} {0p0pdp0p} {wdwdphwd} {dwdwdwdw} {wdP)wdwd} {dwdwdwdw} {P)wdP)P)} {$NGQIBHR} vllllllllV

3 … b6 This move initiates the Queen’s Indian Defense. Black prepares to fianchetto his Bishop to “b7” where it will be placed on the long “a1-h8” diagonal, or place the Bishop on “a6” where it will attack White’s “c” Pawn. One of the main ideas behind the Queen’s Indian Defense is to control the important “e4” square and prevent White from occupying that square with a Pawn. 4 g3 This is White’s most commonly played move. White intends to contest Black’s control of the “a8-h1” diagonal by using a fianchetto on the same diagonal. Though the Queen’s Indian is generally considered a positional opening there can be some interesting tactics. We will now examine some other possible fourth moves for White:

Diagram 211. Position after 2 … e6. -205-

206


1. 4 e3. White adds protection to his “d” Pawn and frees his Bishop on the “f1-a6” diagonal. This move doesn’t have much bite to it and gives Black a comfortable game after 4 … Bb7 5 Bd3 d5 6 0-0 Bd6 7 b3 0-0 8 Bb2 Nbd7 9 Nc3 and now Black can equalize with either 9 … a6, or 9 … dxc4 10 bxc4 e5. 2. 4 a3. White prevents Black’s Bishop from being able to go to “b4” and prepares for the possible advance of his “b” Pawn. 4 … Bb7 (for 4 … Be7 see LESSON NINETEEN in Unbeatable Chess Lessons) 5 Nc3 d5 6 cxd5 (if 6 Bg5, then 6 … Be7 8 e3 0-0 9 Rc1 Ne4 9 Bxe7 Qxe7 10 cxd5 exd5 11 Nxe4 dxe4 12 Nd2 Rc8 13 Be2 Nd7 14 0-0 c5) Nxd5 7 Qc2 Nxc3 8 bxc3 c5 9 e4 Nd7 10 Bf4 cxd4 11 cxd4 Rc8 with an equal game. 3. 4 Nc3. White offers Black the choice of transposing into the Nimzo-Indian with 4 … Bb4 or going into an independent variation such as 4 … Bb7 5 Bg5 Be7 6 Qc2 c5 7 dxc5 (if 7 e4, then 7 … cxd4 8 Nxd4 Nc6 9 Nxc6 Bxc6 with approximate equality) bxc5 8 Rd1 (if 8 e3, then 8 … d6 9 Be2 h6 10 Bxf6 Bxf6 11 0-0 00) Nc6 9 e4 (if 9 e3, then 9 … h6 10 Bf4 0-0 is equal) 0-0 10

Be2 d6 11 0-0 Qb6 with an equal game. 4. 4 Nbd2. This develops the Knight to an inferior post and blocks White’s Bishop on “c1”. Black gets a comfortable game after 4 … Bb7 5 e3 c5 6 Bd3 cxd4 7 exd4 d5 8 b3 Bd6 9 0-0 0-0. 4 … Bb7 Black completes his fianchetto. A good alternative here for Black is to attack White’s “c” Pawn with 4 … Ba6, which might continue 5 b3 (or 5 Nbd2 d5 6 Bg2 Be7 7 0-0 0-0 8 Ne5 Bb7 is about equal) Bb4+ 6 Bd2 Be7 7 Bg2 c6 8 Bc3 Ne4 9 Bb2 d5 10 00 Nd7 11 Nbd2 f5 12 Qc2 0-0 with approximate equality. 5 Bg2 White completes his fianchetto. 5 … Be7 Black develops his Bishop to a flexible square and prepares to castle. Black could also play the aggressive 5 … Bb4+. However, this line allows White to develop his more awkward Bishop and challenge Black’s Bishop with 6 Bd2.

Robert M. Snyder

cuuuuuuuuC {rhw1kdw4} {0b0pgp0p} {w0wdphwd} {dwdwdwdw} {wdP)wdwd} {dwdwdN)w} {P)wdP)B)} {$NGQIwdR} vllllllllV


6 Nc3 White develops his Knight toward the center and attacks the critical “e4” square. The most common sequence of moves is 6 0-0 0-0 7 Nc3 Ne4 8 Qc2 Nxc3 9 Qxc3, which will be covered in LESSON TWENTY-TWO.

207

“e4”. Black must now find an aggressive way to offset White’s increased pressure on “e4”.

cuuuuuuuuC {rhw1w4kd} {0b0pgp0p} {w0wdphwd} {dwdwdwdw} {wdP)wdwd} {dwHwdN)w} {P)QdP)B)} {$wGwIwdR} vllllllllV Diagram 213. Position after 7 Qc2.

7 … c5 Black finally uses a Pawn to attack White’s Pawn center. Black is threatening to win a Pawn with 8 … cxd4.

6 … 0-0

8 d5

Black gets his King out of the center and behind a protective wall of Pawns. The recommended alternative here is 6 … Ne4 7 Qc2 Nxc3 8 Qxc3 0-0 9 0-0 transposing into the game in LESSON TWENTY-TWO.

White takes care of the threat on his “d” Pawn by advancing it with the idea of cramping Black’s game.

7 Qc2 White brings his Queen to a more active post where she attacks the important “e4” square. This prevents Black’s Knight from entering “e4” and gives support to the placement of a Pawn on

8 … exd5 Black removes White’s aggressively posted “d” Pawn and forces White to play actively with threats in order to recover it. 9 Ng5 White opens up the “h1-a8” diagonal for his Bishop; this pins and attacks Black’s

208


Pawn on “d5” Pawn a third time. The move also sets up tactical possibilities by attacking Black’s “h” Pawn with a second piece (Black’s Knight on “f6” is tied down to the defense of the Pawn on “h7”). Also playable is 9 Nh4. White not only pins and attacks Black’s Pawn on “d5” a third time, but also gives his Knight the possibility of going to “f5”. After 9 Nh4 the game might continue 9 … b5 (if 9 … Nc6, then 10 cxd5 Nd4 11 Qd3) 10 Nxd5 Nxd5 11 cxd5 Bxh4 12 gxh4 planning to meet either 12 … Na6 or 12 … d6 with 13 Bg5, and White stands slightly better. 9 … Nc6

cuuuuuuuuC {rdw1w4kd} {0bdpgp0p} {w0ndwhwd} {dw0pdwHw} {wdPdwdwd} {dwHwdw)w} {P)QdP)B)} {$wGwIwdR} vllllllllV


Black develops his Knight toward the center and completes his minor piece development. Another common move here is to immediately attack Black’s aggressively posted Knight with 9 … h6, which might continue 10 Nxd5 Bxd5 11 cxd5 (Black stands slightly better

after 11 Bxd5 Nc6 because now if 12 Nf3, then 12 … Nb4 13 Qf5 Nbxd5 14 cxd5 Re8; or if 12 Bxc6, then 12 … dxc6 13 Nf3 Qd7 14 0-0 Rfe8) hxg5 12 d6 Nc6 13 dxe7 Qxe7 14 Bxg5 Qe5 with approximate equality. 10 Nxd5 White recovers his Pawn and takes the strong outpost for his Knight. White is now threatening 11 Nxf6+ Bxf6 12 Qxh7++. Capturing with the Pawn gives Black a superior endgame after 10 cxd5 Nb4 11 Qd2 Nfxd5 12 Nxd5 Bxg5 13 Qxg5 Qxg5 14 Bxg5 Bxd5 15 Bxd5 Nxd5. 10 … g6 Black defends against White’s mate threat by blocking White’s Queen on the “b1-h7” diagonal. See if you can find White’s best move without looking at the next move in the game. 11 Qd2 This move has good ideas behind it: 1. White places his Queen on the “c1-h6” diagonal where she may possibly penetrate on the kingside. 2. From “d2” the Queen applies pressure on the “d” file, where Black has a backward Pawn. 3. From “d2” the Queen adds extra protection to both Knights.

Robert M. Snyder

4. The Queen is no longer a potential target if Black’s Knight goes to “b4” or “d4”. The one drawback for White is that the Queen blocks his Bishop on the “c1-h6” diagonal, but White looks at this as a temporary problem of minor consequence compared to the benefits of the move. 11 … Nxd5? At this point this exchange only strengthens White’s position by allowing White’s Bishop to take command of the strong “d5” post. The best move for Black is to defend his Bishop with 11 … Rb8. After 11 … Rb8 the game might continue 12 h4 (if 12 0-0, then 12 … Nxd5 13 cxd5 Nd4, or if 12 Nf3, then 12 … Ba6 13 Qc2 Nb4 14 Nxb4 cxb4) Nxd5 (it would be a mistake to play 12 … Ne5? because of 13 Nxf6+ Bxf6 14 Bxb7 Rxb7 15 Qd5 Nc6 16 Ne4 and White stands considerably better) 13 cxd5 Nd4 14 0-0 Bf6 with approximate equality. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 12 Bxd5 White recovers his Knight and brings his Bishop to a very strong post on “d5” where it applies strong pressure along

209

the “a2-g8” diagonal. White is now threatening a winning sacrifice. 12 … Rb8?

cuuuuuuuuC {w4w1w4kd} {0bdpgpdp} {w0ndwdpd} {dw0BdwHw} {wdPdwdwd} {dwdwdw)w} {P)w!P)w)} {$wGwIwdR} vllllllllV

Diagram 215. Position after 12 … Rb8.

Black takes time to defend his Bishop on “b7”. However, this is too slow and allows Black to follow through with his sacrifice. Black should remove White’s active Knight with 12 … Bxg5 13 Qxg5. Though White would stand clearly better after this exchange, Black needed to prevent White’s next move. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 13 Nxh7! White wins Black’s “h” Pawn, attacks Black’s Rook on “f8” and opens up the “c1-h6” diagonal for his Queen. The Knight is immune from capture. If Black now plays 13 … Kxh7?, then White forces mate with 14 Qh6+ Kg8 15 Qxg6+ Kh8 16 Qh5+ Kg8 (if 16 …

210


Kg7, then 17 Bh6+ Kh7 18 Bxf8+ Kg8 19 Qxf7+ Kh8 20 Qg8++) 17 Be4! f5 18 Bd5+ Rf7 19 Qxf7+ Kh8 20 Qh5+ Kg7 21 Qh6++. 13 … Re8 Black gets his Rook out of attack. Giving up the exchange with 13 … Nd4 13 Nxf8 Bxd5 14 cxd5 Bxf8 would have stopped White’s attack, but would have lost the game. 14 Qh6

cuuuuuuuuC {w4w1rdkd} {0bdpgpdN} {w0ndwdp!} {dw0Bdwdw} {wdPdwdwd} {dwdwdw)w} {P)wdP)w)} {$wGwIwdR} vllllllllV

Diagram 216. Position after 14 Qh6.

White’s Queen penetrates Black’s kingside. White is now threatening 15 … Qxg6+. Another winning move is 14 Qf4 (threatening 15 Qxf7+), which might continue 14 … Ne5 15 Qxe5 Kxh7 16 Bxb7 Rxb7 17 Qd5 Rc7 18 Qxf7+ Kh8 19 Qxg6.

14 … Ne5 Black defends his “g” Pawn and opens up the “a8-h1” diagonal for his Bishop. If given the opportunity, Black would like to trade off the white squared Bishops to slow down White’s attack. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 15 Ng5 White gives Black no time to breathe. This move opens up the “h7” square for White’s Queen with the threat of 16 Qh7+ Kf8 17 Qh8++. 15 … Bxg5 Black had no choice but to remove White’s Knight. Otherwise White’s Queen would penetrate to “h7”. 16 Bxg5

cuuuuuuuuC {w4w1rdkd} {0bdpdpdw} {w0wdwdp!} {dw0BhwGw} {wdPdwdwd} {dwdwdw)w} {P)wdP)w)} {$wdwIwdR} vllllllllV


Robert M. Snyder

White recovers his Knight and attacks Black’s Queen. White’s dark squared Bishop joins the attack on the kingside and takes advantage of Black’s dark squared weaknesses. 16 … Qxg5 Black had nothing better than to give up his Queen. If 16 … Qc7 (or 16 … Qc8), then 17 Bf6 forces mate. 17 Qxg5 White wins Black’s Queen, 17 … Bxd5 This wins White’s Bishop because of the threat of 18 … Nf3+ (forking White’s King and Queen). See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 18 0-0 White eliminates the threat of 18 … Nf3+, gets his Rook out of attack by Black’s Bishop, and places his Rook effectively on the “f ” file. White now threatens 19 cxd5. 18 … Bxc4 Black gets his Bishop out of attack and wins White’s “c” Pawn. See of you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

211

19 f4

cuuuuuuuuC {w4wdrdkd} {0wdpdpdw} {w0wdwdpd} {dw0whw!w} {wdbdw)wd} {dwdwdw)w} {P)wdPdw)} {$wdwdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 218. Position after 19 f4.

White uses his “f ” Pawn to drive Black’s Knight out of the center and spearhead a winning attack. Black resigned here. Black’s two minor pieces are no match for White’s Queen. If 19 … Nc6, then 20 f5 is strong.

LESSON 22

This is the most common move played here. White removes his King from the center.

The Desperado

6 … 0-0

James Tarjan versus Robert Snyder Palo Alto, 1981 Opening: Queen’s Indian Defense

Black also removes his King from the center.

In this game we will expand on our study of the most common line of the Queen’s Indian Defense. James Tarjan, who is a Grandmaster of chess, gets an edge out of the opening. Both sides end up getting a Rook on their seventh ranks and reach an interesting position with numerous pieces hanging. White sacrifices a Pawn to go into an endgame with more active pieces and the better Pawn structure. However, the final result is a drawn endgame. 1 d4 Nf6 2 c4 e6 3 Nf3 b6 4 g3 Bb7 5 Bg2 Be7 6 0-0

cuuuuuuuuC {rhw1kdw4} {0b0pgp0p} {w0wdphwd} {dwdwdwdw} {wdP)wdwd} {dwdwdN)w} {P)wdP)B)} {$NGQdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 219. Position after 6 0-0.

7 Nc3 White develops his Knight toward the center and attacks the important “e4” square. If given the opportunity, White would like to move his Queen to “c2” and then his Pawn to “e4” thereby obtaining a powerful Pawn center. An equal game is reached after 7 d5 exd5 8 Nh4 (if 8 Nd4, then 8 … Bc6 planning to meet 9 Nxc6 with 9 … dxc6 10 Nc3 dxc4 11 Qa4 b5, or 9 cxd5 with 9 … Bxd5 10 Bxd5 Nxd5 11 e4 Nb4 12 Nc3 N8c6 13 Nf5 Bf6 14 a3 Na6 15 Nd5 Nc5 16 Re1 Re8) c6 9 cxd5 Nxd5 10 Nf5 Nc7 11 Nc3 d5 12 e4 Bf6 13 exd5 Nxd5 14 Nxd5 cxd5 15 Ne3 Nd7 16 Nxd5 Nc5 17 Re1 (if 17 Rb1, then 17 … Re8 18 Be3 Ne4 19 Nxf6+ Qxf6) Rc8 18 Rb1 Bxd5 19 Bxd5 Qd7 20 Qf3 Rcd8. 7 … Ne4 This move has an important idea behind it. Black sets up a blockade on the “e4” square by occupying it with his Knight. This disrupts White’s plan

-212-

Robert M. Snyder

to occupy “e4” with a Pawn. Black is now threatening to exchange Knights on “c3” and double White’s Pawns. 8 Qc2 White brings his Queen to a more active post where she attacks White’s Knight on “e4” and avoids getting doubled Pawns on “c3” by defending the Knight. A less common and passive move for White is to defend the Knight on “c3” with 8 Bd2.

cuuuuuuuuC {rhw1w4kd} {0b0pgp0p} {w0wdpdwd} {dwdwdwdw} {wdP)ndwd} {dwHwdN)w} {P)QdP)B)} {$wGwdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 220. Position after 8 Qc2.

After 8 Bd2 the game might continue 8 … f5 and now: 1. if 9 Qc2, then 9 … Bf6 10 Rad1 Nxc3 11 Bxc3 Be4 12 Qc1 d6 13 Ne1 Bxg2 14 Nxg2 Nd7. 2. if 9 d5, then 9 … Bf6 10 Rc1 Na6 11 Ne1, • if 11 Be1, then 11 … Nd6 12 b3 Nc5 13 Nd4 a5 gives Black a nice game.

213

• if 11 a3, then 11 … c6 12 dxe6 dxe6 13 Qc2 Nxd2 14 Nxd2 Qc7 with a comfortable game for Black. 11 … Nac5 12 Nd3 (after 12 b4 Nxc3 13 Bxc3 Ne4 14 Bxf6 Qxf6 15 Nd3 a5 16 b5 exd5 17 cxd5 Bxd5, Black stands clearly better) Nxd3 13 exd3 Nxd2 14 Qxd2 c6 15 d4 Qc7 with a slight edge for Black. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 8 … Nxc3 White takes care of the threat on his Knight by exchanging it for White’s Knight. Two other possibilities are less effective: 1. Defending the Knight with 8 … d5 is inferior because of 9 cxd5 Nxc3 (if 9 … exd5, then 10 Bf4 is strong) 10 bxc3 exd5 11 Bf4 planning to meet 11 … Nd7 with 12 Rad1 c5 13 a4, and 11 … Re8 with 12 Ne5 Bf6 13 Rad1. White stands better in these variations. 2. If 8 … f5, then White can pin Black’s Knight on “e4” with 9 Ne1 (slightly better than 9 Ne5 Nd6! when Black is close to equal), planning to meet 9 … Nd6 with 10 c5!, and 9 … d5 with 10 Bf4 Bd6 11 Bxd6 Qxd6 12 Rc1 Nc6

214


13 cxd5 exd5 14 Nf3 Rac8 15 Rfd1 and White stands slightly better. 9 Qxc3 White recovers his Knight. 9 … c5 Black strikes at the center and attacks White’s “d” Pawn. Black’s plan is to increase the pressure on White’s “d” Pawn by placing his Bishop on “f6” and possibly his Knight on “c6”. A good alternative and the move I usually recommend to my students here is 9 … f5 (gaining a further foothold on “e4”). After 9 … f5 the game might continue 10 b3, • if 10 d5, then 10 … exd5 11 Ne1 d4 12 Qxd4 Bxg2 13 Nxg2 Nc6 is equal. • if 10 Rd1, then 10 … Bf6 11 Bf4 d6 12 Qe3 Qe7 13 Bg5 Nd7 with approximate equality. 10 … Bf6 11 Bb2 (if 11 Ba3, then 11 … d6 12 Rad1 and the game is even after 12 … Qe7, or 12 … Qe8 13 Qe3 Be4) d6 12 Rad1 (if 12 Qd2, then 12 … Qe7 13 Ne1 Bxg2 14 Nxg2 Nd7 with a comfortable game for Black) Qe7 (also good is 12 … Qe8 13 Ne1 Bxg2 14 Nxg2 Nd7 with an equal game) 13 Ne1 Bxg2 14 Nxg2 Nd7 with an equal game.

10 Rd1

cuuuuuuuuC {rhw1w4kd} {0bdpgp0p} {w0wdpdwd} {dw0wdwdw} {wdP)wdwd} {dw!wdN)w} {P)wdP)B)} {$wGRdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 221. Position after 10 Rd1.

White places his Rook on the potentially open “d” file and reinforces his “d” Pawn. 10 … d6 Black reinforces his “c” Pawn, covers his “e5” square, and opens “d7” for possible use by his Knight. 11 b3 White prepares to fianchetto his Bishop to “b2”; this will counter Black’s Bishop when it moves to “f6” and attacks along the “a1-h8” diagonal. Furthermore, White reinforces his “c” Pawn, which down the line could come under attack on the potentially open “c” file. 11 … Bf6 Black repositions his Bishop on the long “h8-a1” diagonal and puts pressure on White’s “d” Pawn.

Robert M. Snyder

12 Bb2 White continues with his plan to fianchetto his Bishop. 12 … Nc6? Black develops his Knight toward the center and increases pressure on White’s “d” Pawn. At a glance this appears to be a natural move. However, the immediate placement of the Knight on “c6” makes it a target for White’s “d” Pawn. It is more accurate to remove Black’s Queen from the “d” file with 12 … Qe7. After 12 … Qe7 the game might continue 13 Qc2 (if 13 Qd2, then Black has the choice of equalizing with 13 … Rd8 14 dxc5 bxc5 15 Bxf6 Qxf6, or 13 … Nd7 14 dxc5 Bxb2 15 Qxb2 dxc5) Nc6 14 e4 e5 15 d5 Nd4 limiting White’s advantage to a slight edge. 13 Qd2

cuuuuuuuuC {rdw1w4kd} {0bdwdp0p} {w0n0pgwd} {dw0wdwdw} {wdP)wdwd} {dPdwdN)w} {PGw!P)B)} {$wdRdwIw} vllllllllV


215

White removes the pin on his “d” Pawn and increases pressure on the “d” file. 13 … Qe7 Black connects his Rooks, gets his Queen off of the potentially open “d” file, and places his Queen on a more active post covering Black’s 2nd rank and defending the Bishop on “b7”. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 14 d5 White aggressively advances his “d” Pawn and threatens Black’s Knight on “c6”. This is White’s only attempt to obtain an advantage. 14 … exd5 Black seeks counter-play against White’s “e” Pawn by opening the “e” file. White obtains a dangerous passed Pawn and stands clearly better after 14 … Ne5 15 Nxe5 Bxe5 16 Bxe5 dxe5 17 d6 Qd7 18 Bxb7 Qxb7 19 d7. 15 Bxf6 This exchange frees White’s Queen from the defense of his Bishop and will allow him to recapture the Pawn on “d5” with his Queen (keeping the “d” file open). The game would be even if

216


White closed the “d” file with 15 cxd5 Ne5. 15 … Qxf6 Black recovers his Bishop. 16 Qxd5 White recovers his Pawn, keeps the “d” file open, and threatens Black’s weak “d” Pawn.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdw4kd} {0bdwdp0p} {w0n0w1wd} {dw0Qdwdw} {wdPdwdwd} {dPdwdN)w} {PdwdP)B)} {$wdRdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 223. Position after 16 Qxd5.

16 … Rfe8 Black takes the most aggressive course by placing a Rook on the open “e” file and threatening White’s “e” Pawn. Accepting a more passive role and defending the “d” Pawn with 16 … Rad8 is reasonable. But, White would stand better after either 17 Qg5 or 17 e3.

Pawn in order to obtain superior piece play. White now threatens to exchange Queens and give Black doubled, isolated Pawns on the “f ” file. White could have also maintained an advantage by avoiding exchanges with 17 e3 Rad8 18 Qg5 Qe6 19 Nh4. 17 … Qxd6 Before recovering his Pawn, Black removes White’s threat to exchange Queens and ruin Black’s kingside Pawns. 18 Rxd6 White recovers his Queen. 18 … Rxe2 Black recovers his Pawn and posts his Rook actively on the second rank.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdwdkd} {0bdwdp0p} {w0n$wdwd} {dw0wdwdw} {wdPdwdwd} {dPdwdN)w} {Pdwdr)B)} {$wdwdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 224. Position after 18 … Rxe2.

17 Qxd6

19 Rd7

White decides to allow the exchange of his “e” Pawn for Black’s weak “d”

White posts his Rook on the seventh rank, threatens Black’s Bishop on “b7”

Robert M. Snyder

and puts pressure on Black’s Pawn on “f7”. However, it would be stronger to immediately open the “a8-h1” diagonal for White’s Bishop, threaten Black’s Knight on “c6”, and put pressure on Black’s “f ” Pawn with 19 Ng5. After 19 Ng5 the game might continue 19 … Na5 (if 19 … h6, then 20 Nxf7 Kxf7 21 Rd7+ Kg6 22 Rxb7) 20 Bxb7 Nxb7 21 Rd7 and White stands clearly better. 19 … Na5 Black defends his Bishop on “b7” and opens the “a8-h1” diagonal for it. Slightly more accurate for Black is to neutralize White’s active Rook on “d7” by challenging it with 19 … Re7, which might continue 20 Rxe7 Nxe7 21 Rd1 Bc6 22 Ng5 Re8 with approximate equality. 20 Nh4 White challenges and threatens Black’s active Bishop by opening the “h1a8” diagonal for his Bishop and gives his Knight the possibility of heading toward an aggressive post on “f5”. A reasonable alternative for White is 20 Re1 Rxa2 21 Rxb7 Nxb7 22 Nh4 Rd8 23 Bxb7 Kf8 24 Bd5 and White’s active minor pieces give him a slight advantage.

217

I remember this position well. The game was being played at board two on a stage during the US Open, and it was being shown on a demonstration board. I got up to get a glass of water when a rather obnoxious Master approached me and said, “this is just the type of position that Tarjan does so well in.” Of course, I just ignored this person! 20 … Bxg2 Black takes care of the threat on his Bishop by exchanging it for White’s Bishop. 21 Kxg2 White recovers his Bishop and brings his King to a potentially more active post for the endgame. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdwdkd} {0wdRdp0p} {w0wdwdwd} {hw0wdwdw} {wdPdwdwH} {dPdwdw)w} {Pdwdr)K)} {$wdwdwdw} vllllllllV

Diagram 225. Position after 21 Kxg2.

218


21 … Nc6 Black’s Knight is out of play on “a5”. Therefore, it is brought back into play. 22 Nf5 White also removes his Knight from the edge of the board and brings it to a more active post. 22 … Kf8 Since the endgame is approaching Black begins to activate his King and reduces the possibility of a back-rank mate. This move also allows Black’s Pawn to move to “g6” without allowing White’s Knight to fork his King and “f ” Pawn with Nh6+. However, a good alternative for Black is to create luft for his King with 22 … h5 23 Kf1 Rae8 with approximate equality. 23 Rad1 White brings a second Rook into play while doubling on the open “d” file. If 23 Kf1 then 23 … Re5 with approximate equality. 23 … g6 Black plans to dislodge White’s aggres sively posted Knight by threatening it with his “g” Pawn.

24 Rc7

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdwiwd} {0w$wdpdp} {w0ndwdpd} {dw0wdNdw} {wdPdwdwd} {dPdwdw)w} {Pdwdr)K)} {dwdRdwdw} vllllllllV Diagram 226. Position after 24 Rc7.

White attacks Black’s Knight and opens up the “d7” square for the possibility of doubling Rooks on the seventh rank (with Rdd7). Though White is more aggressively situated, Black has enough resources to maintain the balance. White must deal with his unprotected “a” Pawn being under attack, the possibility of Black’s Knight becoming more active, and Black’s Rook hiding on “a8” coming into play. On the other hand Black needs to deal with White’s possible back-rankmate threats, White’s doubled Rooks on the “d” file, and the possibility of White doubling his Rooks on the seventh rank. If White moved his Knight with either 24 Nd6 or 24 Nh6, then Black gets a good game after 24 … Ne5. Worthy of examination is 24 R1d6 attacking Black’s Knight on “c6”. After 24 R1d6 Black holds the fort nicely with 24 … Nb4 25 Ne3 Re8 26 Ng4 R8e7 (if 26 … Rxa2?, then 27 Rc7 is strong) 27 a3

Robert M. Snyder

Rxd7 28 Rxd7 Nc6 29 Rc7 h5 30 Ne3 (or if 30 Nf6, then 31 … Ne5 32 Rxa7 Rb2) Ne5 planning to meet 31 Rxa7 with 31 … Rb2. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 24 … Rd8! Black challenges and threatens White’s Rook on the “d” file. Black didn’t have time to go Pawn grabbing with 24 … Rxa2?. This would allow White to double his Rooks on the 7th rank after 25 Rxc6 gxf5 26 Rd7 with the idea of 27 Rcc7 leaving White with a superior endgame. 25 Kf3 An interesting position with numerous pieces hanging! White uses his King as an active fighting piece to attack White’s unprotected Rook on “e2”. At a glance this move may appear to be a blunder that loses a Pawn. However, it quickly becomes clear that White intended to sacrifice a Pawn to go into an endgame with more active pieces and the better Pawn structure. White gets nowhere fast after 25 Rxd8+ Nxd8 26 Nd6 Rxa2 27 Rd7 Nc6 28 Rxf7+ Kg8 29 Rc7 Nd4. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

219

25 … Rxf2+ Black uses a “desperado” to win a Pawn. This is a term applied when a situation exists where two or more pieces of equal value are threatened on both sides, and one of the pieces can make a forced sacrifice that ends up winning material. Therefore, Black’s Rook on “f2” is considered the desperado piece. If Black doesn’t accept White’s Pawn offer and retreats with 25 … Ree8, then White gets a good game after 26 Rxd8 Nxd8 27 Ne3 (or 27 Nd6 Re6 28 Ne4 gives White a nice advantage) Re7 28 Rc8 Rd7 29 Nd5. 26 Kxf2 White gets his King out of check by capturing White’s Rook. 26 … Rxd1 Black recovers his Rook. See if you can find White’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdwiwd} {0w$wdpdp} {w0ndwdpd} {dw0wdNdw} {wdPdwdwd} {dPdwdw)w} {PdwdwIw)} {dwdrdwdw} vllllllllV

Diagram 227. Position after 26 … Rxd1.

220


27 Ke2! This is an important zwischenzug (inbetween move). White first drives Black’s Rook back to a less active position on its first rank before capturing Black’s Knight. White would not have enough compensation for his sacrificed Pawn if he immediately captures White’s Knight with 27 Rxc6. After 27 Rxc6 the game might continue 27 … gxf5 28 Ke3 Ra1 29 a4 Ra3 30 Kf4 Rxb3 31 a5 Rb4 32 Kxf5 Kg7. 27 … Rd8 Black must move his Rook and cover his first rank to avoid a back-rank mate. 28 Rxc6 This is a necessary part of White’s plan to get compensation for his sacrificed Pawn. The exchange of Knights results in Black getting doubled, isolated “f ” Pawns. 28 … gxf5 Black recovers his Knight.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdw4wiwd} {0wdwdpdp} {w0Rdwdwd} {dw0wdpdw} {wdPdwdwd} {dPdwdw)w} {PdwdKdw)} {dwdwdwdw} vllllllllV

Diagram 228. Position after 28 … gxf5.

29 a4 White’s “a” Pawn is advanced for possible use to attack and break-up Black’s queenside Pawns by going to “a5”. Alternatives that also eventually lead to a draw are: 1. Posting the Rook actively on the seventh rank with 29 Rc7. 2. Attacking Black’s weak Pawn on “f5” with 29 Rf6. Now 29 … Re8+ 30 Kf2 leads to a draw after 30 … Rd8 31 Ke2 Re8+, or 30 … Re5 31 Rd6. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 29 … Re8+ Black shifts his Rook to the “e” file where it can be used to challenge White’s Rook from either “e7” or “e6”. See if you can find White’s best move

Robert M. Snyder

here without looking at the next move in the game. 30 Kf2 White gets his King out of check and prevents Black’s Rook from penetrating to “e1”, “e2” and “e3”. Furthermore, White keeps his King stationed on the kingside where Black has his weak extra Pawn. White’s King would be cut off from the kingside after 30 Kd2?. This would be met by 30 … Re6. 30 … Re6 Black challenges White’s actively posted Rook.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdwiwd} {0wdwdpdp} {w0Rdrdwd} {dw0wdpdw} {PdPdwdwd} {dPdwdw)w} {wdwdwIw)} {dwdwdwdw} vllllllllV


31 Rc8+ White avoids exchanging Rooks, which would lead to a lost endgame after 31 Rxe6?? fxe6.

221

31 … Re8 Black challenges White’s Rook again and offers to trade Rooks. The game would also be a draw after 31 … Kg7 32 a5. 32 Rc6 White again avoids exchanging Rooks. The exchange would lose after 32 Rxe8+ Kxe8 33 Ke3 Ke7 34 Kf4 Kf6 35 h3 h6 36 h4 h5 37 Kf3 Ke5 38 Ke3 f4+ 39 gxf4 Kf5 40 Kf3 f6 (White is in zugzwang), and now if 41 Kg3, then 41 … Ke4, or if 41 Ke3, then 41 … Kg4. 32 … Re6 Both sides recognized after the second repetition of position that there were no winning prospects. Therefore, both players agreed to a draw.

LESSON 23

3 … Bb4

Breaking a Pin

Black initiates the Nimzo-Indian Defense. This develops his Bishop aggressively and pins White’s Knight on “c3” while preventing White from occupying “e4” with a Pawn.

Laurence Newton vs Robert Snyder Los Angeles, 1973 Opening: Nimzo-Indian Defense

4 Bg5 White immediately pins Black’s Knight on “f6” with his Bishop and then declines Black’s flank gambit. Black uses a unique way of removing a troublesome pin, which allows him to spring into action in the center. 1 d4 Nf6 2 c4 e6 3 Nc3

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kgw4} {0p0pdp0p} {wdwdphwd} {dwdwdwdw} {wdP)wdwd} {dwHwdwdw} {P)wdP)P)} {$wGQIBHR} vllllllllV Diagram 230. Position after 3 Nc3.

White develops his Knight toward the center and prepares support for the placement of a Pawn on “e4”, which would give him dominating control of the center.

This is known as the Leningrad (or Spassky) variation. White counters Black’s pin with a pin of his own on the opposite side of the board. Typically, in most of the variations of the NimzoIndian, White’s dark square Bishop plays a passive role early in the opening. However, here White immediately brings this Bishop into play. White’s aggressive use of this Bishop does have a drawback; Black’s opportunities on the queenside are increased because of the absence of the Bishop on that side of the board. Other variations of the Nimzo-Indian with 4 a3, 4 Qc2 and 4 e3 are covered in LESSONS TWENTY, TWENTYONE, andTWENTY-TWO respectively in Unbeatable Chess Lessons. 4 … h6 Black attacks White’s aggressively posted Bishop forcing the Bishop to either retreat or make an unfavorable exchange on “f6”. After White retreats his Bishop to “h4”, Black then has the

-222-

Robert M. Snyder

223

option, at the time of his choosing and at the expense of weakening his kingside, to remove the pin with “g5”.

a5” diagonal for his Queen. Black’s immediate threat is to get a great position with 6 … Qa5.

5 Bh4

6 d5

Logically, White gets his Bishop out of attack and maintains the pin on Black’s Knight. This further removes the Bishop’s influence on the queenside. However, a retreat with 5 Bd2 is inconsistent and Black gets a comfortable game after 5 … 0-0. If he gives up the Bishop pair by 5 Bxf6, Black gets a comfortable game after 5 … Qxf6 6 Rc1 (if 6 e4, then 6 … e5 7 Nf3 Nc6; or if 6 e3, then 6 … Bxc3+ 7 bxc3 b6 8 Ne2 Bb7 9 Nf4 d6 10 Bd3 0-0) c5 7 dxc5 Na6 8 g3 Nxc5 9 Bg2 a5 10 Nh3 a4 11 a3 Bxc3+ 12 Rxc3 Ra6 13 0-0 Rb6.

This is White’s best way to release the pressure on his “d” Pawn. White intends to use his Pawn on “d5” to cramp Black’s game and to restrict Black from using “c6” and “e6” as possible posts for his pieces. White’s other, less desirable, possibilities are: 1. If White adds protection to his Pawn on “d4” with 6 e3, then Black would play 6 … cxd4 7 exd4 Qa5 with a nice game. 2. If 6 dxc5, then 6 … Bxc3+ 7 bxc3 Qa5 8 Bxf6 gxf6 9 Qd4 e5 10 Qe3 Na6 11 Nf3 Qxc5 and Black stands better. 3. If 6 Rc1, then 6 … g5 7 Bg3 Ne4 is equal.

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kdw4} {0p0pdp0w} {wdwdphw0} {dwdwdwdw} {wgP)wdwG} {dwHwdwdw} {P)wdP)P)} {$wdQIBHR} vllllllllV Diagram 231. Position after 5 Bh4.

5 … c5 Black uses his “c” Pawn to attack White’s “d” Pawn and open the “d8-

6 … b5 Black offers his “b” Pawn as a Gambit to gain more control of the center. Black’s idea is to undermine the most important defender of White’s Pawn on “d5”—by attacking the “c” Pawn. Gambits are not on the high end of my list of recommendations to my students. However, when I consider such a sacrifice as the best move, then I don’t hesitate in recommending it. I

224


look at its soundness for undermining the enemy position as a key factor in determining its value. A reasonable alternative for Black is 6 … d6, which might continue 7 e3 00 8 Bd3 Bxc3+ 9 bxc3 Nbd7 10 Ne2 Ne5 11 0-0 Re8 12 Re1 Qe7 with an equal game. 7 e4

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kdw4} {0wdpdp0w} {wdwdphw0} {dp0Pdwdw} {wgPdPdwG} {dwHwdwdw} {P)wdw)P)} {$wdQIBHR} vllllllllV Diagram 232. Position after 7 e4.

White reinforces his “e” Pawn while releasing his Bishop on “f1”, which defends his “c” Pawn. We will now examine some other possible lines for White: 1. 7 cxb5. Immediately grabbing Black’s “b” Pawn leads to approximate equality after 7 … g5 8 Bg3 Nxd5 9 Rc1 Bb7 10 Nf3 (if 10 h4, then 10 … Qf6 11 Qd2 Nxc3 12 bxc3 Ba3 13 Rd1 d5 14 e4 Nd7 15 Be2 0-0-0 16 Nf3 c4) Nf6 11 a3 Bxc3+ 12 bxc3 d5 13 e3

Ne4 14 Be5 Rg8 15 Bxb5 Qxb8 16 Bd3 Nf6. 2. 7 dxe6. This is the most common way for White to accept the Gambit. White first exchanges his Pawn on “d5”, which is weakened when he captures on b5 first. 7 … fxe6 8 cxb5. Now Black gets enough compensation for his Pawn with his superior control of the center after 8 … d5 (or 8 … 0-0 9 e3 d5 transposes) 9 e3 (if 9 a3, then 9 … Bxc3+ 10 bxc3 0-0) 0-0 10 Bd3 (if 10 Nf3, then 10 … Qa5 11 Bxf6 Rxf6 12 Qd2 a6 13 bxa6 Nc6 and Black’s position is worth more than his sacrificed Pawn) a6 11 Nge2 c4 12 Bc2 axb5 13 0-0 Ra5 14 e4 (if 14 Nd4, then 14 … Bxc3 15 bxc3 e5 16 Ne2 Nc6 and Black stands better) Be7 15 exd5 (if 15 a3, then 15 … b4 16 axb4 Rxa1 17 Qxa1 d4) b4 16 d6 Qxd6 17 Ne4 Qxd1 18 Rfxd1 Nc6 19 f3 and Black is clearly better. 3. 7 e3. With this conservative move, White avoids placing his “e” Pawn under attack on “e4” and frees his Bishop on the “f1-a6” diagonal. Black obtains good play for his Pawn with 7 … Bb7 8 dxe6 fxe6 9 cxb5 0-0 10 a3 (if 10 Nf3, then 10 … Qa5 is strong) Ba5 11 Nf3 a6 12 bxa6 (or 12 Rb1 Bxc3+ 13 bxc3 axb5) Bxf3 14 gxf3 d5.

Robert M. Snyder

4. 7 Rc1. Black obtains a good game with 7 … bxc4 8 e4 exd5 9 Bxf6 Qxf6 10 Qxd5 (if 10 exd5, then 10 … Qe7+ 11 Qe2 d6 12 Qxe7+ Kxe7 13 Bxc4 Ba6) Nc6 11 Bxc4 0-0 12 Nf3 Bb7 13 Qxd7 Na5 14 Be2 Bxe4 15 0-0 Bc6 16 Qh3 Rad8. 7 … exd5 Black liquidates part of White’s Pawn center and opens the “e” file. Also playable is 7 … g5 8 Bg3 Nxe4. This gives White two ways to play: 1. 9 Qf3 exd5 10 0-0-0 Bxc3 11 Rxd5 Bf6 12 Qxe4+ Qe7 13 Qxe7+ (if 13 Qc2, then 13 … Bb7 14 Rd1 Nc6; or if 13 Qe3, then 13 … Qxe3+ 14 fxe3 Be7) Bxe7 14 cxb5 a6 with an equal game. 2. White can go for a draw with 9 Be5 0-0 10 Qh5 d6 11 Bd3 Nxc3 12 Qxh6 Ne4+ 13 Kf1 dxe5 14 Bxe4 f5 15 Qg6+ Kh8 16 Qh6+. 8 exd5 White recovers his Pawn and removes his “e” Pawn from being a target to Black’s Knight. If 8 cxd5, then g5 9 e5 (9 Bg3 Nxe4 10 Qf3 0-0 favors Black) gxh4 10 exf6 Qxf6 11 Bxb5 a6 12 Ba4 (12 Bd3 Bxc3+ 13 bxc3 Qxc3+ 14 Kf1 d6 and Black stands better) Bxc3+ 13 bxc3 Qxc3+ 14 Kf1 a5 15 Bb5 Ba6 and Black stands better.

225

8 … 0-0 Black removes his King from the center and opens the “e8” square for possible use by his Rook or Queen. 9 Bd3 White develops his Bishop to the “b1h7” diagonal. However, the drawback behind this move is that Black will force the Bishop to move a second time. White can come close to achieving equality by accepting the gambit Pawn with 9 cxb5 Bb7 (also playable is 9 … Re8+ 10 Be2 Bb7 11 Rc1 Bxc3+ 12 Rxc3 a6) 10 Bd3 (if 10 Be2, then 10 … g5 11 Bg3 Nxd5 and Black stands better, or if 10 Bc4, then 10 … Qe8+ planning to meet 11 Nge2 with 11 … Qe4, or 11 Qe2 with 11 … Nxd5 and Black stands better) Bxd5 11 Kf1 Bxc3 12 bxc3 Re8. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1w4kd} {0wdpdp0w} {wdwdwhw0} {dp0Pdwdw} {wgPdwdwG} {dwHBdwdw} {P)wdw)P)} {$wdQIwHR} vllllllllV Diagram 233. Position after 9 Bd3.

226


9 … bxc4

11 Kf1??

Black forces White’s Bishop to move a second time. In order to recover his Pawn, the Bishop will also need to leave the “b1-h7” diagonal.

This is a fatal mistake; it loses a piece. The move recommended by theory is to challenge Black’s Queen with 11 Qe2, which ends up with Black standing considerably better after 11 … Ne4 12 Rc1 Ba6 13 Bxa6 Nxa6 14 f3 Nxc3 15 bxc3 Ba3 16 Rd1 c4. The more passive approach with 11 Be2, which is ignored by theory, is actually the best move here. After 11 Be2 the game might continue 11 … Qe5 12 Bxf6 Qxf6 13 Rc1 d6 14 Nf3 Nd7 15 0-0 Nb6 16 a3 Bxc3 17 bxc3 Bg4 18 h3 Bh5 and Black stands better. The natural looking 11 Nge2 is weak. White is crushed after 11 … Bxc3+ 12 bxc3 Qe4 13 Bxf6 Qxc4 14 Be7 Re8 15 d6 Ba6 16 f3 Nc6. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

10 Bxc4 White gets his Bishop out of attack and recovers his Pawn. Inferior is 10 Bc2 Bxc3+ 11 bxc3 d6 12 Ne2 Nbd7 13 0-0 Re8 14 Ba4 Rb8 and Black stands clearly better. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 10 … Qe8+!

cuuuuuuuuC {rhbdq4kd} {0wdpdp0w} {wdwdwhw0} {dw0Pdwdw} {wgBdwdwG} {dwHwdwdw} {P)wdw)P)} {$wdQIwHR} vllllllllV

11 … Bxc3 Black removes the Knight that covers the critical “e4” square.

Diagram 234. Position after 10 … Qe8+.

Black removes the pin from his Knight on “f6” and attacks White’s King on the open “e” file. This is much stronger than 10 … Re8+ 11 Nge2 Bxc3+ 12 bxc3 Re4 13 Bxf6 Qxf6 14 Bd3 Re7 15 0-0 d6 16 Re1 with approximate equality.

12 bxc3 White recovers his piece. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

Robert M. Snyder

12 … Qe4 Black forks White’s two Bishops. The flaw in White’s analysis is back on move 11. He didn’t realize that after 13 Bxf6 the move 13 … Qxc4+ places his King in check and gives Black time to recapture on “f6”. Even a 2100 rated player (as in this case) can make such an oversight in serious tournament play. Some of the world’s top players have made terrible blunders that would be an eye opener to the average scholastic player. Therefore, it is possible on any given day for you to win a game against a player rated many hundreds of points above you! Never go into a game feeling that you don’t stand a chance. Keep in mind that no one is perfect and even the best players make mistakes. Be confident and prepared to punish your opponent for their imperfections. 13 Qd3 White had to choose which Bishop to part with. Therefore, he defends his Bishop on “c4” and brings his Queen to a more active location.

227

cuuuuuuuuC {rhbdw4kd} {0wdpdp0w} {wdwdwhw0} {dw0Pdwdw} {wdBdqdwG} {dw)Qdwdw} {Pdwdw)P)} {$wdwdKHR} vllllllllV


13 … Qxh4 Black wins White’s Bishop. The next few moves are instructive in demonstrating how to play efficiently when you have a winning material advantage. 14 Re1 White brings his Rook to the open “e” file and prevents Black’s Queen from going to “e4” to force a favorable exchange. However, this doesn’t prevent Black’s next move! See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 14 … Qxc4! This is Black’s easiest winning method. Black forces the exchange of the Queens and Bishops resulting in a simplified endgame. A professional player will

228


usually choose the “no-brainer” (no thought required) method to win. 15 Qxc4

cuuuuuuuuC {rhbdw4kd} {0wdpdp0w} {wdwdwhw0} {dw0Pdwdw} {wdQdwdwd} {dw)wdwdw} {Pdwdw)P)} {dwdw$KHR} vllllllllV


White recovers his Bishop. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 15 … Ba6 This is the point behind Black’s 14th move. Black pins White’s Queen to his King. 16 Qe2 Since White must lose his Queen anyway he retreats his Queen so that he can capture Black’s Bishop and develop his Knight. 16 … Bxe2+ Black recovers his Queen.

17 Nxe2 White captures Black’s Bishop (actually, White is forced to capture the Bishop one way or another) and develops his Knight. 17 … Nxd5

cuuuuuuuuC {rhwdw4kd} {0wdpdp0w} {wdwdwdw0} {dw0ndwdw} {wdwdwdwd} {dw)wdwdw} {PdwdN)P)} {dwdw$KdR} vllllllllV

Diagram 237. Position after 17 … Nxd5.

Being a piece and Pawn down, White resigned here.

LESSON 24 A Knight on the Rim is Dim Richard Mann vs. Robert Snyder Los Angeles, 1972 Opening: Bird’s Opening Black counters White’s thematic opening idea, of an attempted buildup on the kingside, through active development and queenside expansion. White makes positional mistakes by developing his Knight to the edge of the board and later allowing his Queen to become a target. After taking advantage of these inaccuracies and forcing the win of material, Black increases his advantage by using threats to make even exchanges. Putting the opponent away quickly and efficiently, after obtaining a winning material advantage, is part of being a good player. 1 f4 This Opening is named after the famous British player Henry Bird. Though I have sometimes heard the joke, “It is for the birds,” it isn’t a flighty opening. With 1 f4 White immediately attacks the important “e5” square with the possibility of creating an outpost for his Knight on “e5” after it is developed to “f3”. Another advantage of having the Pawn on “f4” is that White’s Rook

will be more actively posted on the “f ” file after castling kingside. Black must be careful not to allow White to buildup a kingside attack. Some drawbacks of 1 f4 are that it creates a potential weakness on the “e1-h4” diagonal and it doesn’t free a Bishop in the same way as moving a center Pawn (1 e4 or 1 d4). 1 … d5

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kgn4} {0p0w0p0p} {wdwdwdwd} {dwdpdwdw} {wdwdw)wd} {dwdwdwdw} {P)P)PdP)} {$NGQIBHR} vllllllllV


Black immediately stakes his claim in the center by occupying it with a Pawn. This move frees Black’s Bishop along the “c8-h3” diagonal, increases the scope of the Queen on the “d” file and gives Black the possibility of developing a Knight to “d7”. An interesting alternative for Black is 1 … e5, known as “From’s Gambit”. Black offers a Pawn sacrifice in return for rapid development and to try to take advantage of the weakened “h4e1” diagonal. As a general rule, “the best way to refute a gambit is to accept it.”

-229-

230


After 1 … e5 the game might continue, 2 fxe5 (if White plays 2 e4 the game transposes into the King’s Gambit) d6 3 exd6 Bxd6 (threatening 4 … Qh4+ 5 g3 Bxg3+ 6 hxg3 Qxg3++) 4 Nf3 g5 (a reasonable alternative is to develop with 4 … Nf6) 5 d4 g4 6 Ne5 Bxe5 7 dxe5 Qxd1+ 8 Kxd1 Nc6 9 Bf4 Be6 10 e3 0-0-0+ 11 Nd2 Nge7 with a superior position and Pawn structure in return for the sacrificed Pawn.

3 … g6

cuuuuuuuuC {rhb1kgw4} {0p0w0pdp} {wdwdwhpd} {dwdpdwdw} {wdwdw)wd} {dPdwdNdw} {PdP)PdP)} {$NGQIBdR} vllllllllV

Diagram 239. Position after 3 … g6.

2 Nf3 White develops his Knight to its most natural square and increases the attack on “e5” in keeping with the theme of Bird’s Opening. 2 … Nf6 Black develops his Knight toward the center and makes the least committing moves first. 3 b3 White’s use of the “c1-h6” diagonal is restricted because of the Pawn on “f4”. Therefore, White decides to fianchetto his “problem child” Bishop on “c1”. The most common move for White is 3 e3 freeing the Bishop on “f1” and reinforcing the “f ” Pawn.

Black prepares to fianchetto his Bishop to “g7”. The “h8-a1” diagonal will be a very effective placement for Black’s Bishop in this Opening. Black’s Pawn on “g6” also increases Black’s foothold on “f5” directly in front of White’s “f” Pawn. Securing the “f5” square will reduce White’s attacking chances on the kingside. 4 Bb2 White completes his fianchetto by developing his Bishop to the long “a1h8” diagonal. 4 … Bg7 Black also completes his fianchetto and counters White’s Bishop on the “h8-a1” diagonal. This may allow for interesting tactical opportunities later in the game due to a potential discovered attack by Black’s Knight on “f6”. White needs to keep this in mind.

Robert M. Snyder

5 e3 This move frees White’s Bishop along the “f1-a6” diagonal, defends his Pawn on “f4” and covers the “d4” square. 5 … c5 Since this game has the same characteristics as a “d” Pawn opening for Black, he doesn’t want to develop his Knight to “c6” and block the “c” Pawn. This would be very cramping. With 5 … c5 Black gains a greater foothold in both the center and queenside while freeing the Queen on the “d8-a5” diagonal. Black also has the option of developing his Knight to “c6” without blocking his “c” Pawn. A good and flexible alternative is 5 … 0-0, this would prevent White from playing the move he plays next. After removing his King from the center with 5 … 0-0 the game might continue, 6 Be2 c5 7 0-0 Nc6 8 Ne5 Qc7 and Black has comfortable development. 6 Bb5+ White aggressively develops his Bishop and clears the way for castling. However, there is nothing wrong with developing the Bishop less actively with 6 Be2, transposing into the analysis given for Black’s 5th move.

231

6 … Bd7

cuuuuuuuuC {rhw1kdw4} {0pdb0pgp} {wdwdwhpd} {dB0pdwdw} {wdwdw)wd} {dPdw)Ndw} {PGP)wdP)} {$NdQIwdR} vllllllllV


Black develops his Bishop and challenges White’s aggressively posted Bishop on “b5”. Black avoids playing 6 … Nc6 because this gives White the option of doubling Black’s Pawns with 7 Bxc6+ bxc6. The game would be about even, but Black wants to obtain an advantage. 7 Qe2 White brings his Queen to a more active post while defending his Bishop on “b5”. However, it would be more direct to play 7 Bxd7+ immediately and not commit his Queen to “e2”. After 7 Bxd7+ the game might continue 7 … Qxd7 8 Ne5 Qc7 9 0-0 0-0 10 Qf3 Nc6, though once again Black is comfortably developed. 7 … 0-0 Black gets his King to a safer location by removing his King from the center.

232


8 Bxd7 White relieves his Queen from being tied down to the protection of his Bishop on “b5”. Black must now make a decision on how to recapture. 8 … Nbxd7 Black chooses a developing move to recover the piece. However, a good alternative for Black is to activate his Queen with 8 … Qxd7. Black’s idea is to reserve the option of developing his Knight to the more active “c6” post. After 8 … Qxd7 Black doesn’t mind his Queen being attacked with 9 Ne5. The Queen would simply be driven to a nice post after 9 … Qc7 and Black ends up with a good game after 10 0-0 Nc6. 9 0-0

cuuuuuuuuC {rdw1w4kd} {0pdn0pgp} {wdwdwhpd} {dw0pdwdw} {wdwdw)wd} {dPdw)Ndw} {PGP)QdP)} {$NdwdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 241. Position after 9 0-0.

White removes his King from the center and brings his Rook to the “f ”

file, thematic with the opening idea of the game. 9 … Qc7 Besides connecting his Rooks, this move allows Black to bring his Queen to a flexible and active post. From “c7” the Queen exerts pressure on the critical “e5” square and ties White’s “e” Pawn to the defense of his “f ” Pawn. The Queen’s potential use along the “c” file, seventh rank, and “d8-a5” diagonals may come in handy. 10 Na3? This is a positional inaccuracy. The general rule, “Don’t develop Knights to the edge of the board” definitely applies here. It is understandable that White didn’t want to block his “c” Pawn or Bishop on “b2” with 10 Nc3. However, not only is the Knight less actively posted on “a3”, it becomes a target there later in the game. White has a couple of better plans here. He could immediately strike at the center with 10 c4 and make the “c3” square attractive for his Knight. Another idea is 10 d3, this would increase White’s control of the center and open up “d2” for use by his Knight. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move.

Robert M. Snyder

10 … a6! This quiet looking positional move covers the important “b5” square. It further restricts the movement of White’s Knight on “a3”. More important, it gives support for the placement of a Pawn on “b5” in keeping with the theme of queenside expansion. 11 c4 White counters by attacking Black’s Pawn center and restraining Black’s Pawn from going to “b5”. This also opens up possible avenues for White’s Knight on “a3” to come into play. The square “c2” is opened and there is also the possibility of eliminating Black’s “d” Pawn allowing White’s Knight to go to “c4” (attacking the “e5” square). 11 … e6

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdw4kd} {dp1ndpgp} {pdwdphpd} {dw0pdwdw} {wdPdw)wd} {HPdw)Ndw} {PGw)QdP)} {$wdwdRIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 242. Position after 11 … e6.

233

Black reinforces his “d” Pawn to prevent White’s Knight from being able to go to “c4”. 12 cxd5? This results in White giving up his “c” Pawn for Black’s less active “e” Pawn. It is important for the Pawn to stay on “c4” because it applies pressure on Black’s center and helps restrain the advance of Black’s “b” Pawn. The idea of White’s move is to open up the “c” file for his Rook and attempt to take advantage of Black’s Queen being on the same file. But, White should have played 12 d3 to reinforce his “c” Pawn and increase his foothold on the center by attacking the square “e4”. After 12 d3 the game might continue 12 … Rad8 13 Rac1 b6. 12 … exd5 The point of Black’s 11th move becomes clearer now. Black recovers his Pawn while maintaining his strong Pawn center and keeping White’s Knight out of “c4”. 13 Rac1 White places his Rook on the half-open “c” file. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

234


13 … b5

14 … Qa5!

Black begins his queenside expansion.

This move must have come as a devastating blow to White. Black removes his Queen from the same file as White’s Rook and threatens to win White’s “a” Pawn by driving away White’s Knight with 15 … b4.

14 f5? Another inaccuracy! It will soon be demonstrated how a series of what may appear to be small inaccuracies lead to a lost game. White is trying to attack on the kingside when he doesn’t have an attack. White doesn’t realize how serious things are becoming on the queenside. He gives up what foothold he had on the critical “e5” square. As mentioned earlier, one of the major thematic ideas behind Bird’s Opening is to secure “e5”. White should have either taken the outpost for his Knight with 14 Ne5 or played 14 d3 opening up his Queen along the 2nd rank and attacking the “c4” and “e4” squares. Against either move Black would have the edge after playing the same move he did in the actual game. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move.

cuuuuuuuuC {rdwdw4kd} {dw1ndpgp} {pdwdwhpd} {dp0pdPdw} {wdwdwdwd} {HPdw)Ndw} {PGw)QdP)} {dw$wdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 243. Position after 14 f5.

15 fxg6 White continues to be inconsistent. This helps Black by giving his Rook on “f8” an open file. White should leave his Pawn on “f5” as Black had no interest in capturing it because it would have given Black weak, isolated, doubled Pawns and opened up his kingside. It is better for White to defend his “a” Pawn with 15 Ra1. After 15 Ra1 the game might continue 15 … c4 16 Nc2 Nc5 with Black standing slightly better. 15 … fxg6 Black recovers his Pawn and opens up the “f ” file for his Rook. 16 Ra1 White defends his “a” Pawn to avoid losing it.

Robert M. Snyder

16 … Rae8

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdr4kd} {dwdndwgp} {pdwdwhpd} {1p0pdwdw} {wdwdwdwd} {HPdw)Ndw} {PGw)QdP)} {$wdwdRIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 244. Position after 16 … Rae8.

Black brings his Rook into play on the half-open center file and pins White’s “e” Pawn. Black now has a “dream position”. Black’s advantages consist of having a substantial spatial advantage in the center and on the queenside, and his pieces are more active and better coordinated. A good alternative for Black is to immediately expand on the queenside with 16 … c4. 17 Qd3 White removes his Queen from the same file as Black’s Rook. This solves one problem, but creates another. White’s Queen will now be a greater target on “d3”. White should improve the position of his Knight with 17 Nc2. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move.

235

17 … c4 Black continues to gain even more space while gaining time by attacking White’s Queen. 18 bxc4 It is better for White to play 18 Qe2 Nc5 19 Nc2 maintaining his Pawn on “b3” to combat Black’s queenside expansion. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move. 18 … Nc5 Black brings his Knight to an awesome post and gains time by attacking White’s Queen. 19 Qd4

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdr4kd} {dwdwdwgp} {pdwdwhpd} {1phpdwdw} {wdP!wdwd} {Hwdw)Ndw} {PGw)wdP)} {$wdwdRIw} vllllllllV


On “d4” the Queen will continue to be a major target for Black. It is better

236


to retreat the Queen to a less exposed location with 19 Qc2. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 19 … b4! This forces the win of material. Black threatens White’s Knight on “a3” while defending his attacked Knight on “c5”. However, the key point to this move is that it attacks “c3” and takes away a critical retreat square for White’s Queen. As a result Black is now threatening to trap White’s Queen in the middle of the board with 20 … Re4. 20 Nb5 White cuts off the Black Queen’s defense of the Knight on “c5” and threatens 21 Qxc5. 20 … Ne6 Black gets his Knight out of attack while gaining time by attacking White’s Queen.

21 Qh4

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdr4kd} {dwdwdwgp} {pdwdnhpd} {1Ndpdwdw} {w0Pdwdw!} {dwdw)Ndw} {PGw)wdP)} {$wdwdRIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 246. Position after 21 Qh4.

White gets his Queen out of attack with the idea of keeping her as active as possible without making her a target again. White may have learned his lesson, however it is too late to save the game. 21 … axb5 Black wins White’s Knight. 22 cxd5 White exchanges Pawns by taking the center Pawn and leaving doubled Pawns on the “b” file. 22 … Nxd5 Black recovers his Pawn with a discovered attack on Black’s unprotected Bishop on “b2”. Now that Black is ahead (Black has a Knight for a Pawn) it is to Black’s advantage to exchange pieces with the

Robert M. Snyder

idea of simplifying into an easily won endgame. 23 Bxg7 White had nothing better to do than to trade off his threatened Bishop. 23 … Kxg7 Black recovers his Bishop. The alternative, 23 … Nxg7 would remove the Knight from a more centralized location. 24 Ne5

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdr4wd} {dwdwdwip} {wdwdndpd} {1pdnHwdw} {w0wdwdw!} {dwdw)wdw} {Pdw)wdP)} {$wdwdRIw} vllllllllV


White aggressively posts his Knight on “e5” trying to complicate matters as much as possible. This is a good idea when you are materially lost. 24 … Qd8 Since Black’s Queen is somewhat out of play on “a5” he retreats her and

237

challenges White’s Queen on “h4”. There are two ideas in play here: 1. If White exchanges Queens, then Black simplifies down to an easily won endgame. 2. If White’s Queen moves to avoid exchanging, then Black has succeeded in gaining time to reposition his Queen more actively. 25 Qg4 White knows that his best chance is to avoid trading Queens. He keeps his Queen actively posted while tying Black’s pieces to the defense of the Knight on “e6” and the Pawn on “b4”. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 25 … Qd6 Black continues with his plan of repositioning his Queen. From “d6” Black’s Queen threatens White’s Knight on “e5” while adding protection to Black’s Knight on “e6” and Pawn on “b5”. 26 Qg3 White does his best to maintain his Knight’s active outpost on “e5” by defending it. This move also defends

238


White’s “e” Pawn a second time so that White’s “d” Pawn is free to go to “d4”. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 26 … Nc5 Black opens up his Rook on the “e” file with a discovered attack on White’s Knight. Additionally, from “c5” Black’s Knight has some good potential squares to which it can go. 27 d4

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdr4wd} {dwdwdwip} {wdw1wdpd} {dphnHwdw} {w0w)wdwd} {dwdw)w!w} {PdwdwdP)} {$wdwdRIw} vllllllllV Diagram 248. Position after 27 d4.

White defends his threatened Knight on “e5” and attacks Black’s Knight on “c5”.

28 Rxf8 Since White doesn’t have a good way of avoiding an exchange of Rooks along the “f ” file he decides to initiate the exchange. By exchanging, White removes Black’s Rook from the “e” file where it applies pressure to White’s backward “e” Pawn. The idea behind White’s move becomes apparent when we look at White’s alternative after 28 Nxd7 Rxf1+ 29 Rxf1 Qxd7. White’s “e” Pawn is in serious trouble. If White tries defending his “e” Pawn with either 30 Rf3 or 30 Re1, then Black would play 30 … Nxe3! with the plan to meet 31 Rxe3 with 31 … Qxd4 32 Kf2 Qd2+. Now White loses his Rook. 28 … Rxf8 Black recovers his Rook while placing his Rook on the open “f ” file and keeping up the pressure on White’s Knight. Black now threatens to trade Knights on “e5” and give White doubled isolated Pawns. 29 Nxd7

27 … Nd7

White avoids getting doubled, isolated Pawns by exchanging first.

This is in line with the idea of forcing simplifying exchanges when ahead in material, Black attacks and challenges White’s actively posted Knight.

29 … Qxd7 Black recovers his Knight.

Robert M. Snyder

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdw4wd} {dwdqdwip} {wdwdwdpd} {dpdndwdw} {w0w)wdwd} {dwdw)w!w} {PdwdwdP)} {$wdwdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 249. Position after 29 … Qxd7.

239

32 a3

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdw4wd} {dwdwdwip} {wdwdqdpd} {dpdwdwdw} {w0w)wdwd} {)whw)w!P} {wdwdwdPd} {dwdw$wIw} vllllllllV Diagram 250. Position after 32 a3.

30 h3 White creates a breathing square (“luft”) for his King by opening up “h2”. 30 … Qe6 Black attacks and threatens White’s “e” Pawn while he also prepares to attack White’s Pawn on “a2”. 31 Re1 White defends his threatened “e” Pawn. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 31 … Nc3 Black attacks White’s “a” Pawn twice and allows for the possibility of placing his Knight on the strong outpost at “e4”.

White attempts to save his Pawn and sets up a nifty trap. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game. 32 … Ne4 Black occupies the strong outpost on “e4” with his Knight and attacks White’s Queen as well as the important “f2” square. Black does not want to play 32 … bxa3? because 33 Qc7+ forks King and Knight, thereby winning the Knight. 33 Qc7+ White removes his Queen from attack and plans to maneuver the Queen to the queenside to defend his “a” Pawn. However, White will soon discover that even larger problems for him exist on the kingside.

240


33 … Rf7

35 … Rf2

Black gets his King out of check and at the same time gains time by threatening White’s Queen.

Black penetrates with a devastating attack along White’s 2nd rank. The immediate threat is 36 … Rxg2+ leading to a quick mate. Also winning quickly is 35 … Qf2+ followed by 36 … Qg3.

34 Qc1 White gets his Queen out of attack and defends his threatened “a” Pawn. See if you can find Black’s best move here without looking at the next move in the game.

36 Qc7+ White uses the check to gain time to maneuver his Queen over to the defense of the kingside.

34 … Qa2 Black attacks White’s “a” Pawn again and prepares to attack along White’s 2nd rank. The “f2” square is vulnerable and a Rook and Queen on the 2nd rank would be a serious threat to the White King. 35 axb4 White saves his “a” Pawn and wins Black’s “b” Pawn, but he allows Black to gain the “f2” square.

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdwdwd} {dwdwdrip} {wdwdwdpd} {dpdwdwdw} {w)w)ndwd} {dwdw)wdP} {qdwdwdPd} {dw!w$wIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 251. Position after 35 axb4.

36 … Kh6 Black finds the safest square to hide his King from any further attack since he controls the “f ” file and prevents White’s Queen from checking at f4. 37 Qh2 White defends his attacked “g” Pawn. 37 … Qd2 Black attacks White’s Rook and “e” Pawn which forces the issue. White cannot save both.

Robert M. Snyder

38 Ra1

cuuuuuuuuC {wdwdwdwd} {dwdwdwdp} {wdwdwdpi} {dpdwdwdw} {w)w)ndwd} {dwdw)wdP} {wdw1w4P!} {$wdwdwIw} vllllllllV

Diagram 252. Position after 38 Ra1.

White saves his Rook. 38 … Qxe3 Black wins White’s “e” Pawn and threatens 39 … Rf1+ 40 Kxf1 (forced because he is in double check) Qf2++. 39 Kh1 White tries to hide his King. 39 … Ng3+ White resigned. White has the choice of losing his Queen with 40 Qxg3 Qxg3 or allowing mate after 40 Kg1 Rf1++. Also, moving the Rook anywhere along the “f ” file or 2nd rank except to “g2” is mate!

241

About the Author

Robert M. Snyder is a National Master and chess educator. He has introduced chess to over 170,000 Elementary and Junior High School students through his presentations. His students have won thirty-six individual first place titles (a national record) in championship sections at the National Scholastic Championships. His teams have won first place in championship sections at the National Scholastic Championships ten times. At the age of twelve, Mr. Snyder learned how to play chess. By the time he was 18 he earned the title of National Chess Master. In 1973 he became champion of the Western United States. Mr. Snyder had the highest score when he represented the United States on the Correspondence Olympic Chess Team. He qualified for the semi-finals of the World Correspondence Championships and earned an International rating of 2405. In 1983 Mr. Snyder founded the Chess for Juniors club, which grew to become one of the largest and most active clubs in the nation. He currently gives instruction to individual students by providing lessons and analysis of games through the Internet (www.chessforeveryone.com). Mr. Snyder has arranged matches and exchange programs for students; they have traveled to Australia, Canada, England and Germany. He has written articles for Chess Life, School Mates, Fernschach (Germany) and Schach-Echo (Germany) magazines and is author of Chess for Everyone, Unbeatable Chess Lessons, Winning Chess Tournaments, Winning Chess Traps, Basic Chess Tactics and The Snyder Sicilian.

-243-

More Unbeatable Chess Lessons Snyder

Recommend Documents